custom-bib

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@809 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

22 files changed, 15854 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/catalan.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/catalan.mbs
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a423cd6a93b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/catalan.mbs
@@ -0,0 +1,324 @@
+%\iffalse         THIS IS A META COMMENT
+% File: catalan.mbs
+% Copyright 1997-1999 Patrick W Daly
+% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Aeronomie
+% Max-Planck-Str. 2
+% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
+% Germany
+% E-mail: daly@linmpi.mpg.de
+%
+% Copyright 1997, 1998 Robert Fuster
+% Departament de Matem\`atica Aplicada
+% Universitat Polit\`ecnica de Val\`encia
+% E-46071 Val\`encia
+% Spain
+% E-mail: rfuster@mat.upv.es
+%
+% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+%
+% It is part of the custom-bib collection,
+%   a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
+%====================================================================
+%       A Language Definition File:  CATALAN
+%     to be included with other master bibliography style files
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%   (See version and date in the \ProvidesFile command below)
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%    This file is self-documenting: simply LaTeX it!
+%====================================================================
+%
+%\fi
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module: catalan.mbs
+ % \ProvidesFile{catalan.mbs}[2003/11/06 4.2 (PWD)]
+%\iffalse
+%<*a&!a>
+% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
+% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
+\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
+  \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
+%</a&!a>
+%<*driver>
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
+   \documentclass[a4paper,10pt,twoside]{article}%
+   \usepackage{doc}%
+   \raggedbottom
+   \CodelineNumbered
+   \RecordChanges
+ %  Comment out next line to print coding
+   \OnlyDescription
+   \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.5\paperwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5\textwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+   \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
+
+\begin{document}
+   \DocInput{catalan.mbs}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%                   END OF META COMMENT   \fi
+% \CharacterTable
+%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm}
+%
+% \changes{2.0}{1998 May 17}{Initial version}
+% \changes{2.1}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{bbl.etal}}
+% \changes{2.2}{1999 Feb 1}{Add option \texttt{xedn}}
+% \changes{2.2}{1999 Feb 24}{Update copyright notice}
+% \changes{4.0}{1999 Oct 11}{For merlin 4.0}
+% \changes{4.0a}{2002 Oct 18}{Fix bug in page number suppression}
+% \changes{4.2}{2003 Nov 6}{Fix comma separator, consistent with \texttt{makebst} 4.1}
+%
+% \pagestyle{myheadings}
+% \markboth{R. Fuster}{Catalan Bibliographies}
+%
+% \title{{\bfseries Catalan Language Definition File}\\
+%      for master bibliographic style files}
+%
+% \author{Patrick W. Daly and Robert Fuster}
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{catalan.mbs}
+% \date{This paper describes file \texttt{\filename},\\
+%  version \fileversion{} from \filedate}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \parskip=1ex \parindent=0pt
+%
+% \newcommand{\btx}{{\sc Bib}\TeX}
+% \newcommand{\dtx}{\textsf{docstrip}}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+% This file is to be used as a language definition file with master
+% bibliographic files. The language it defines is
+% \begin{quote}\bfseries Catalan\end{quote}
+%
+% This is not a self-sufficient \texttt{.mbs} file, but rather may
+% be used together with one that contains language support via
+% external definition files.
+%
+% See the documentation for \texttt{makebst} for formatting details.
+%
+% \section{The Menu Information}
+%
+% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
+% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
+% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between |%<*!options&!driver>|
+% \dots\ |%</!options&!driver>| in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
+% extract only the menu information or the documentation driver.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+\mes{^^JOptions for CATALAN}
+\wr{\spsp\spsp catalan,\pc: Catalan language}
+
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGINES':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`P\string`agina(es)'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{ps}{`P\string`agina' abbreviated}{as p.}
+\optdef{b}{pag}{`P\string`agina' abbreviated}{as p\string`ag.}
+\optdef{x}{ppx}{`P\string`agina' omitted}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITOR':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`editor(s)'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{ed}{`editor' abbreviated}{as ed.}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE `MONTHS'::}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of gener, febrer, etcetera}
+\optdef{a}{mab}{Abbreviations}{of months, as in abbrev.bst}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of Volum, Edici'o, Cap'itol}
+\optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory}
+\optdef{w}{nom}{Write out editions}{as primera, segona, tercera, etc}
+\optdef{a}{}{Numerical editions}{as 1a, 2a, 3a, etc}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptions
+%</options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
+%
+% \section{The Coding}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!options&!driver>
+
+ % The language selected here is CATALAN
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{ "i"}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{ "et~al." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+%<!ed>{ "editors" }
+%<ed>{ "eds." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+%<!ed>{ "editor" }
+%<ed>{ "ed." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "editat per" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+%<!abr>{ "edici\'o" }
+%<abr>{ "ed." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+%<!abr>{ "volum" }
+%<abr>{ "vol." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "de" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+%<!abr>{ "n\'umero" }
+%<abr>{ "n\'um." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "n." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "dins" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+%<!ps&!pag>{ "p\`agines" }
+%<pag>{ "p\`ags." }
+%<ps>{ "ps." }
+%<!ps&!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+%<!ps&!pag>{ "p\`agina" }
+%<pag>{ "p\`ag." }
+%<ps>{ "p." }
+%<!ps&!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+%<*revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "p\`agines" }
+
+%</revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+%<!abr>{ "cap\'{\i}tol" }
+%<abr>{ "cap." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+%<!abr>{ "Report t{\`e}cnic" }
+%<abr>{ "Rep. T{\`e}c." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Projecte F. de Carrera o Tesina de L." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Tesi Doctoral" }
+
+%<*!xedn>
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+%<!nom>{ "1a" }
+%<nom>{ "primera" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+%<!nom>{ "2a" }
+%<nom>{ "segona" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+%<!nom>{ "3a" }
+%<nom>{ "tercera" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+%<!nom>{ "4a" }
+%<nom>{ "quarta" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+%<!nom>{ "5a" }
+%<nom>{ "cinquena" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "a" }
+
+%</!xedn>
+%<*!mab>
+MACRO {jan} {"gener"}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"febrer"}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"mar\c{c}"}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"abril"}
+
+MACRO {may} {"maig"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"juny"}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"juliol"}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"agost"}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"setembre"}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"octubre"}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"novembre"}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"desembre"}
+
+%</!mab>
+%<*mab>
+MACRO {jan} {"gen."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"mar\c{c}"}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"abr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"maig"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"juny"}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"ag."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"set."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"oct."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"des."}
+
+%</mab>
+%</!options&!driver>
+ % End module: catalan.mbs
+ %    \end{macrocode}
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/dansk.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/dansk.mbs
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d3cd21194c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/dansk.mbs
@@ -0,0 +1,315 @@
+%\iffalse         THIS IS A META COMMENT
+% File: dansk.mbs
+% Copyright 1995-1999 Patrick W Daly
+% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Aeronomie
+% Max-Planck-Str. 2
+% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
+% Germany
+% E-mail: daly@linmpi.mpg.de
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1999, Brian Elmegaard
+% Department of Energy Engineering, Technical University of Denmark
+% Nils Koppels Alle
+% DK-2800 Lyngby
+%
+% E-mail: brian.elmegaard@et.dtu.dk
+%
+% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+%
+% It is part of the custom-bib collection,
+%   a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
+%====================================================================
+%       A Language Definition File:  DANISH
+%     to be included with other master bibliography style files
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%   (See version and date in the \ProvidesFile command below)
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%    This file is self-documenting: simply LaTeX it!
+%====================================================================
+%
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+%\fi
+ % \ProvidesFile{norsk.mbs}[2004/05/06 4.2a (RL/PWD)]
+%\iffalse
+%<*a&!a>
+% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
+% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
+\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
+  \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
+%</a&!a>
+%<*driver>
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
+   \documentclass[a4paper,10pt,twoside]{article}%
+   \usepackage{doc}%
+   \raggedbottom
+   \CodelineNumbered
+   \RecordChanges
+ %  Comment out next line to print coding
+   \OnlyDescription
+   \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.5\paperwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5\textwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+   \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
+
+\begin{document}
+   \DocInput{dansk.mbs}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%                   END OF META COMMENT   \fi
+% \CharacterTable
+%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm}
+%
+% \changes{1.0}{1999 Nov 8}{Submitted to PWD by BE}
+% \changes{4.0}{1999 Nov 10}{Converted for merlin 4.0}
+% \changes{4.1}{2001 Jan 9}{Included corrections from Thomas Martin
+% \changes{4.1a}{2002 Oct 18}{Fix bug in page number suppression}
+%   Widmann BE}
+% \changes{4.2}{2003 Nov 6}{Fix comma separator, consistent with \texttt{makebst} 4.1}
+% \changes{4.2a}{2004 May 6}{Add missing backslash in a menu text}
+%
+% \markboth{Brian Elmegaard}{Danish bibliographies}
+%
+% \title{{\bfseries Danish Language Definition File}\\
+%      for master bibliographic style files}
+%
+% \author{Patrick W. Daly and Brian Elmegaard}
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{dansk.mbs}
+% \date{This paper describes file \texttt{\filename},\\
+%  version \fileversion{} from \filedate}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \parskip=1ex \parindent=0pt
+%
+% \newcommand{\btx}{{\sc Bib}\TeX}
+% \newcommand{\dtx}{\textsf{docstrip}}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+% This file is to be used as a language definition file with master
+% bibliographic files. The language it defines is
+% \begin{quote}\bfseries Dansk\end{quote}
+%
+% This is not a self-sufficient \texttt{.mbs} file, but rather may
+% be used together with one that contains language support via
+% external definition files.
+%
+% See the documentation for \texttt{makebst} for formatting details.
+%
+% \section{The Menu Information}
+%
+% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
+% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
+% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between |%<*!options&!driver>|
+% \dots\ |%</!options&!driver>| in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
+% extract only the menu information or the documentation driver.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+\mes{^^JOptions for DANSK}
+\wr{\spsp\spsp dansk,\pc: Danish language}
+
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`Side(r)'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{pp}{`Side' abbreviated}{as s. or pp.}
+\optdef{x}{ppx}{`Side' omitted}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`Redakt{\string\o}r(er)'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{ed}{`Redakt{\string\o}r' abbreviated}{as red.}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of bind, udgave, kapitel, osv.}
+\optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory}
+\optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as f{\string\o}rste, anden, tredje, osv}
+\optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1., 2., 3., osv}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptions
+%</options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
+%
+% \section{The Coding}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!options&!driver>
+
+ % The language selected here is DANSK
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{ "og"}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{ "et~al." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+%<!ed>{ "redakt{\o}rer" }
+%<ed>{ "red." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+%<!ed>{ "redakt{\o}r" }
+%<ed>{ "red." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "redigeret af" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+%<!abr>{ "udgave" }
+%<abr>{ "udg." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+%<!abr>{ "bind" }
+%<abr>{ "bd." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "af" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+%<!abr>{ "nummer" }
+%<abr>{ "nr." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "nr." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "i" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "sider" }
+%<pp>{ "pp." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "side" }
+%<pp>{ "s." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+%<*revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "sider" }
+
+%</revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+%<!abr>{ "kapitel" }
+%<abr>{ "kap." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+%<!abr>{ "Teknisk rapport" }
+%<abr>{ "Tekn. rap." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Speciale" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "ph.d.-afhandling" }
+
+%<*!xedn>
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+%<!ord>{ "F{\o}rste" }
+%<ord>{ "1." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+%<!ord>{ "Anden" }
+%<ord>{ "2." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+%<!ord>{ "Tredje" }
+%<ord>{ "3." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+%<!ord>{ "Fjerde" }
+%<ord>{ "4." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+%<!ord>{ "Femte" }
+%<ord>{ "5." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "." }
+%</!xedn>
+%<*!abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"Januar"}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Februar"}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Marts"}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"April"}
+
+MACRO {may} {"Maj"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Juni"}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Juli"}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"August"}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"September"}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Oktober"}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"November"}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"December"}
+
+%</!abr>
+%<*abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"Maj"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Okt."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
+
+%</abr>
+%</!options&!driver>
+ % End module: dansk.mbs
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/dutch.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/dutch.mbs
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c3b9ffb0259
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/dutch.mbs
@@ -0,0 +1,326 @@
+%\iffalse         THIS IS A META COMMENT
+% File: dutch.mbs
+% Copyright 1997-1999 Patrick W Daly
+% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Aeronomie
+% Max-Planck-Str. 2
+% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
+% Germany
+% E-mail: daly@linmpi.mpg.de
+%
+% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+%
+% It is part of the custom-bib collection,
+%   a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
+%====================================================================
+%       A Language Definition File:  DUTCH
+%     to be included with other master bibliography style files
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%   (See version and date in the \ProvidesFile command below)
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%    This file is self-documenting: simply LaTeX it!
+%====================================================================
+%
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+%\fi
+ % \ProvidesFile{dutch.mbs}[2003/11/06 4.2 (PWD/MG)]
+%\iffalse
+%<*a&!a>
+% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
+% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
+\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
+  \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
+%</a&!a>
+%<*driver>
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
+   \documentclass[a4paper,10pt,twoside]{article}%
+   \usepackage{doc}%
+   \raggedbottom
+   \CodelineNumbered
+   \RecordChanges
+ %  Comment out next line to print coding
+   \OnlyDescription
+   \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.5\paperwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5\textwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+   \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
+
+\begin{document}
+   \DocInput{dutch.mbs}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%                   END OF META COMMENT   \fi
+% \CharacterTable
+%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm}
+%
+% \changes{1.0}{1997 Oct 30}{Initial version}
+% \changes{1.2}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{bbl.etal}}
+% \changes{1.3}{1999 Feb 1}{Add option \texttt{xedn}}
+% \changes{1.3}{1999 Feb 24}{Update copyright notice}
+% \changes{4.0}{1999 Oct 11}{For merlin 4.0}
+% \changes{4.0a}{2002 Oct 18}{Fix bug in page number suppression}
+% \changes{4.2}{2003 Nov 6}{Fix comma separator, consistent with \texttt{makebst} 4.1}
+%
+% \pagestyle{myheadings}
+% \markboth{P. W. Daly and M. Gelderman}{Dutch Bibliographies}
+%
+% \title{{\bfseries Dutch Language Definition File}\\
+%      for master bibliographic style files}
+%
+% \author{Patrick W. Daly and Maarten Gelderman}
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{dutch.mbs}
+% \date{This paper describes file \texttt{\filename},\\
+%  version \fileversion{} from \filedate}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \parskip=1ex \parindent=0pt
+%
+% \newcommand{\btx}{{\sc Bib}\TeX}
+% \newcommand{\dtx}{\textsf{docstrip}}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+% This file is to be used as a language definition file with master
+% bibliographic files. The language it defines is
+% \begin{quote}\bfseries Dutch\end{quote}
+%
+% This is not a self-sufficient \texttt{.mbs} file, but rather may
+% be used together with one that contains language support via
+% external definition files.
+%
+% See the documentation for \texttt{makebst} for formatting details.
+%
+% \section{The Menu Information}
+%
+% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
+% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
+% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between |%<*!options&!driver>|
+% \dots\ |%</!options&!driver>| in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
+% extract only the menu information or the documentation driver.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+\mes{^^JOptions for DUTCH}
+\wr{\spsp\spsp dutch,\pc: Dutch language}
+
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGINA':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`Pagina'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{pp}{`Pagina' abbreviated}{as pag.}
+\optdef{x}{ppx}{`Pagina' omitted}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `REDACTIE':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`Redactie'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{ed}{`Redactie' abbreviated}{as red.}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of volume, uitgave, hoofdstuk, etc}
+\optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory}
+\optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as eerste, tweede, derde, etc}
+\optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1e, 2e, 3e, etc}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{ET AL.}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Et al}{as et al}
+\optdef{a}{enan}{Et al as en anderen}{}
+\optdef{e}{ea}{Et al as e.a}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptions
+%</options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
+%
+% \section{The Coding}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!options&!driver>
+
+ % The language selected here is DUTCH
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{ "en" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+%<!enan&!ea>{ "et~al." }
+%<enan>{ "en anderen" }
+%<ea>{ "e.a." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+%<!ed>{ "redactie" }
+%<ed>{ "red." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+%<!ed>{ "redactie" }
+%<ed>{ "red." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "uitgegeven door" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+%<!abr>{ "uitgave" }
+%<abr>{ "druk" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+%<!abr>{ "volume" }
+%<abr>{ "vol." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "van" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+%<!abr>{ "nummer" }
+%<abr>{ "nr." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "nr." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "in" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "pagina's" }
+%<pp>{ "pag." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "pagina" }
+%<pp>{ "pag." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+%<*revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "pagina's" }
+
+%</revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+%<!abr>{ "hoofdstuk" }
+%<abr>{ "hfdst." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+%<!abr>{ "Technisch Rapport" }
+%<abr>{ "Tech. Rapp." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "scriptie" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "proefschrift" }
+
+%<*!xedn>
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+%<!ord>{ "eerste" }
+%<ord>{ "1e" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+%<!ord>{ "tweede" }
+%<ord>{ "2e" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+%<!ord>{ "derde" }
+%<ord>{ "3e" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+%<!ord>{ "vierde" }
+%<ord>{ "4e" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+%<!ord>{ "vijfde" }
+%<ord>{ "5e" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.st}
+{ "e" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
+{ "e" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
+{ "e" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "e" }
+
+%</!xedn>
+%<*!abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"Januari"}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Februari"}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Maart"}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"April"}
+
+MACRO {may} {"Mei"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Juni"}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Juli"}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Augustus"}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"September"}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Oktober"}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"November"}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"December"}
+
+%</!abr>
+%<*abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Mrt"}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"Mei"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Okt."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
+
+%</abr>
+%</!options&!driver>
+ % End module: dutch.mbs
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/english.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/english.mbs
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a0e7c9ce9ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/english.mbs
@@ -0,0 +1,359 @@
+%\iffalse         THIS IS A META COMMENT
+% File: english.mbs
+% Copyright 1995-1999 Patrick W Daly
+% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Aeronomie
+% Max-Planck-Str. 2
+% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
+% Germany
+% E-mail: daly@linmpi.mpg.de
+%
+% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+%
+% It is part of the custom-bib collection,
+%   a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
+%====================================================================
+%       A Language Definition File:  ENGLISH
+%     to be included with other master bibliography style files
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%   (See version and date in the \ProvidesFile command below)
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%    This file is self-documenting: simply LaTeX it!
+%====================================================================
+%
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+%\fi
+ % \ProvidesFile{english.mbs}[2003/11/06 4.2 (PWD)]
+%\iffalse
+%<*a&!a>
+% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
+% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
+\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
+  \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
+%</a&!a>
+%<*driver>
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
+   \documentclass[a4paper,10pt,twoside]{article}%
+   \usepackage{doc}%
+   \raggedbottom
+   \CodelineNumbered
+   \RecordChanges
+ %  Comment out next line to print coding
+   \OnlyDescription
+   \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.5\paperwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5\textwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+   \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
+
+\begin{document}
+   \DocInput{english.mbs}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%                   END OF META COMMENT   \fi
+% \CharacterTable
+%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm}
+%
+% \changes{1.0}{1995 Mar 15}{Initial version}
+% \changes{1.1}{1995 May 4}{Do no abbreviate `edited by'}
+% \changes{1.2}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{bbl.etal}}
+% \changes{1.3}{1999 Feb 1}{Make consistent with merlin 3.88}
+% \changes{1.3}{1999 Feb 24}{Update copyright notice}
+% \changes{4.0}{1999 Oct 11}{For merlin 4.0}
+% \changes{4.2}{2003 Nov 6}{Fix comma separator, consistent with \texttt{makebst} 4.1}
+%
+% \pagestyle{myheadings}
+% \markboth{P. W. Daly}{English Bibliographies}
+%
+% \title{{\bfseries English Language Definition File}\\
+%      for master bibliographic style files}
+%
+% \author{Patrick W. Daly}
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{english.mbs}
+% \date{This paper describes file \texttt{\filename},\\
+%  version \fileversion{} from \filedate}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \parskip=1ex \parindent=0pt
+%
+% \newcommand{\btx}{{\sc Bib}\TeX}
+% \newcommand{\dtx}{\textsf{docstrip}}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+% This file is to be used as a language definition file with master
+% bibliographic files. The language it defines is
+% \begin{quote}\bfseries English\end{quote}
+%
+% This is not a self-sufficient \texttt{.mbs} file, but rather may
+% be used together with one that contains language support via
+% external definition files.
+%
+% See the documentation for \texttt{makebst} for formatting details.
+%
+% \section{The Menu Information}
+%
+% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
+% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
+% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between |%<*!options&!driver>|
+% \dots\ |%</!options&!driver>| in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
+% extract only the menu information or the documentation driver.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+\mes{^^JOptions for ENGLISH}
+\wr{\spsp\spsp english,\pc: English language}
+
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES'}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`Page(s)'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{pp}{`Page' abbreviated}{as p. or pp.}
+\optdef{x}{ppx}{`Page' omitted}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`Editor(s)'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{ed}{`Editor' abbreviated}{as ed. or eds.}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of volume, edition, chapter, etc}
+\optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION'
+ (if abbreviating words)}
+ {\if\ans a*\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{}{`Edition' abbreviated as `edn'}{}
+\optdef{a}{ednx}{`Edition' abbreviated as `ed'}{}
+\getans
+\beginoptiongroup{MONTHS WITH DOTS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Months with dots}{as Jan.}
+\optdef{x}{mth-bare}{Months without dots}{as Feb Mar}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory}
+\optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as first, second, third, etc}
+\optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptions
+%</options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
+%
+% \section{The Coding}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!options&!driver>
+
+ % The language selected here is ENGLISH
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{ "and"}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{ "et~al." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+%<!ed>{ "editors" }
+%<ed>{ "eds." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+%<!ed>{ "editor" }
+%<ed>{ "ed." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "edited by" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+%<!abr>{ "edition" }
+%<abr&!ednx>{ "edn." }
+%<abr&ednx>{ "ed." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+%<!abr>{ "volume" }
+%<abr>{ "vol." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "of" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+%<!abr>{ "number" }
+%<abr>{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "in" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "pages" }
+%<pp>{ "pp." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "page" }
+%<pp>{ "p." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+%<*revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "pages" }
+
+%</revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+%<!abr>{ "chapter" }
+%<abr>{ "chap." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+%<!abr>{ "Technical Report" }
+%<abr>{ "Tech. Rep." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Master's thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Ph.D. thesis" }
+
+%<*!xedn>
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+%<!ord>{ "First" }
+%<ord>{ "1st" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+%<!ord>{ "Second" }
+%<ord>{ "2nd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+%<!ord>{ "Third" }
+%<ord>{ "3rd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+%<!ord>{ "Fourth" }
+%<ord>{ "4th" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+%<!ord>{ "Fifth" }
+%<ord>{ "5th" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.st}
+{ "st" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
+{ "nd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
+{ "rd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "th" }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% This function adds English endings for ordinals 1, 2, 3. However, if
+% the second last digit is 1, then the ending is `th' for all last digits.
+% So far, all other languages included do not have this problem, and it is
+% sufficient to add the \textsl{th} equivalent. This might change with further
+% languages.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {eng.ord}
+{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ *
+  #-2 #1 substring$ "1" =
+     { bbl.th * }
+     { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$
+       duplicate$ "1" =
+         { pop$ bbl.st * }
+         { duplicate$ "2" =
+             { pop$ bbl.nd * }
+             { "3" =
+                 { bbl.rd * }
+                 { bbl.th * }
+               if$
+             }
+           if$
+          }
+       if$
+     }
+   if$
+}
+
+%</!xedn>
+%<*!abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"January"}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"February"}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"March"}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"April"}
+
+MACRO {may} {"May"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"June"}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"July"}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"August"}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"September"}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"October"}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"November"}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"December"}
+
+%</!abr>
+%<*abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"May"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
+
+%</abr>
+%</!options&!driver>
+ % End module: english.mbs
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/esperant.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/esperant.mbs
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3e5beddfaf8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/esperant.mbs
@@ -0,0 +1,310 @@
+%\iffalse         THIS IS A META COMMENT
+% File: esperant.mbs
+% Copyright 1995-1999 Patrick W Daly
+% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Aeronomie
+% Max-Planck-Str. 2
+% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
+% Germany
+% E-mail: daly@linmpi.mpg.de
+%
+% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+%
+% It is part of the custom-bib collection,
+%   a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
+%====================================================================
+%       A Language Definition File:  ESPERANTO
+%     to be included with other master bibliography style files
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%   (See version and date in the \ProvidesFile command below)
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%    This file is self-documenting: simply LaTeX it!
+%====================================================================
+%
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+%\fi
+ % \ProvidesFile{esperant.mbs}[2003/11/06 4.2 (PWD)]
+%\iffalse
+%<*a&!a>
+% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
+% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
+\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
+  \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
+%</a&!a>
+%<*driver>
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
+   \documentclass[a4paper,10pt,twoside]{article}%
+   \usepackage{doc}%
+   \raggedbottom
+   \CodelineNumbered
+   \RecordChanges
+ %  Comment out next line to print coding
+   \OnlyDescription
+   \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.5\paperwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5\textwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+   \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
+
+\begin{document}
+   \DocInput{esperant.mbs}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%                   END OF META COMMENT   \fi
+% \CharacterTable
+%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm}
+%
+% \changes{1.0}{1995 Mar 15}{Initial version}
+% \changes{1.1}{1995 May 4}{Do no abbreviate `edited by'}
+% \changes{1.2}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{bbl.etal}}
+% \changes{1.3}{1999 Feb 1}{Add option \texttt{xedn}}
+% \changes{1.3}{1999 Feb 24}{Update copyright notice}
+% \changes{4.0}{1999 Oct 11}{For merlin 4.0}
+% \changes{4.0a}{2002 Oct 18}{Fix bug in page number suppression}
+% \changes{4.2}{2003 Nov 6}{Fix comma separator, consistent with \texttt{makebst} 4.1}
+%
+% \pagestyle{myheadings}
+% \markboth{P. W. Daly}{Esperanto Bibliographies}
+%
+% \title{{\bfseries Esperanto Language Definition File}\\
+%      for master bibliographic style files}
+%
+% \author{Patrick W. Daly}
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{esperant.mbs}
+% \date{This paper describes file \texttt{\filename},\\
+%  version \fileversion{} from \filedate}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \parskip=1ex \parindent=0pt
+%
+% \newcommand{\btx}{{\sc Bib}\TeX}
+% \newcommand{\dtx}{\textsf{docstrip}}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+% This file is to be used as a language definition file with master
+% bibliographic files. The language it defines is
+% \begin{quote}\bfseries Esperanto\end{quote}
+%
+% This is not a self-sufficient \texttt{.mbs} file, but rather may
+% be used together with one that contains language support via
+% external definition files.
+%
+% See the documentation for \texttt{makebst} for formatting details.
+%
+% \section{The Menu Information}
+%
+% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
+% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
+% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between |%<*!options&!driver>|
+% \dots\ |%</!options&!driver>| in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
+% extract only the menu information or the documentation driver.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+\mes{^^JOptions for ESPERANTO}
+\wr{\spsp\spsp esperanto,\pc: Esperanto language}
+
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`Pa^go(j)'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{pp}{`Pa^go' abbreviated}{as p. or pp.}
+\optdef{x}{ppx}{`Pa^goj' omitted}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`Redaktoro{j}'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{ed}{`Redaktoro' abbreviated}{as red-o or red-oj}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of volumo, eldono, ^capitro, etc}
+\optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory}
+\optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as unua, dua, tria, etc}
+\optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1-a, 2-a, 3-a, etc}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptions
+%</options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
+%
+% \section{The Coding}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!options&!driver>
+
+ % The language selected here is ESPERANTO
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{ "kaj"}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{ "et~al." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+%<!ed>{ "redaktoroj" }
+%<ed>{ "red-oj" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+%<!ed>{ "redaktoro" }
+%<ed>{ "red-o" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "redaktita de" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+%<!abr>{ "eldono" }
+%<abr>{ "eld-o" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+%<!abr>{ "volumo" }
+%<abr>{ "vol-o" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "el" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+%<!abr>{ "numero" }
+%<abr>{ "n-ro" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "n-ro" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "en" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "pa\^goj" }
+%<pp>{ "pp." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "pa\^go" }
+%<pp>{ "p\^g" }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+%<*revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "pa\^goj" }
+
+%</revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+%<!abr>{ "\^capitro" }
+%<abr>{ "\^cap-o" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+%<!abr>{ "Teknica Raporto" }
+%<abr>{ "Tek-a Rap-o" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Magistra tezo" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Doktora tezo" }
+
+%<*!xedn>
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+%<!ord>{ "Unua" }
+%<ord>{ "1-a" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+%<!ord>{ "Dua" }
+%<ord>{ "2-a" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+%<!ord>{ "Tria" }
+%<ord>{ "3-a" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+%<!ord>{ "Kvara" }
+%<ord>{ "4-a" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+%<!ord>{ "Kvina" }
+%<ord>{ "5-a" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "-a" }
+
+%</!xedn>
+%<*!abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"januaro"}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"februaro"}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"marto"}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"aprilo"}
+
+MACRO {may} {"majo"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"junio"}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"julio"}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"a\u{u}gusto"}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"septembro"}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"oktobro"}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"novembro"}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"decembro"}
+
+%</!abr>
+%<*abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"maj."}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"a\u{u}g."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"okt."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"dec."}
+
+%</abr>
+%</!options&!driver>
+ % End module: esperant.mbs
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/finnish.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/finnish.mbs
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..85574dea7b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/finnish.mbs
@@ -0,0 +1,301 @@
+%\iffalse         THIS IS A META COMMENT
+% File: finnish.mbs
+% Copyright 1995-1999 Patrick W Daly
+% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Aeronomie
+% Max-Planck-Str. 2
+% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
+% Germany
+% E-mail: daly@linmpi.mpg.de
+%
+% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+%
+% It is part of the custom-bib collection,
+%   a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
+%====================================================================
+%       A Language Definition File:  FINNISH
+%     to be included with other master bibliography style files
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%   (See version and date in the \ProvidesFile command below)
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%    This file is self-documenting: simply LaTeX it!
+%====================================================================
+%
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+%\fi
+ % \ProvidesFile{finnish.mbs}[2003/11/06 4.2 (PWD)]
+%\iffalse
+%<*a&!a>
+% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
+% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
+\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
+  \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
+%</a&!a>
+%<*driver>
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
+   \documentclass[a4paper,10pt,twoside]{article}%
+   \usepackage{doc}%
+   \raggedbottom
+   \CodelineNumbered
+   \RecordChanges
+ %  Comment out next line to print coding
+   \OnlyDescription
+   \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.5\paperwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5\textwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+   \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
+
+\begin{document}
+   \DocInput{finnish.mbs}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%                   END OF META COMMENT   \fi
+% \CharacterTable
+%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm}
+%
+% \changes{1.0}{1995 Mar 15}{Initial version}
+% \changes{1.1}{1995 May 4}{Do no abbreviate `edited by'}
+% \changes{1.1a}{1995 May 11}{Correct \texttt{bbl.phdthesis}}
+% \changes{1.2}{1995 Oct 25}{Remove \texttt{umlaut} option and \cs{qq},
+%      replace with Raichle's trick}
+% \changes{1.3}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{bbl.etal}}
+% \changes{1.4}{1999 Feb 1}{Add option \texttt{xedn}}
+% \changes{1.4}{1999 Feb 24}{Update copyright notice}
+% \changes{1.4a}{1999 Sep 14}{Fix typo in edition query}
+% \changes{4.0}{1999 Oct 11}{For merlin 4.0}
+% \changes{4.0a}{2002 Oct 18}{Fix bug in page number suppression}
+% \changes{4.2}{2003 Nov 6}{Fix comma separator, consistent with \texttt{makebst} 4.1}
+%
+% \pagestyle{myheadings}
+% \markboth{P. W. Daly}{Finnish Bibliographies}
+%
+% \title{{\bfseries Finnish Language Definition File}\\
+%      for master bibliographic style files}
+%
+% \author{Patrick W. Daly}
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{finnish.mbs}
+% \date{This paper describes file \texttt{\filename},\\
+%  version \fileversion{} from \filedate}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \parskip=1ex \parindent=0pt
+%
+% \newcommand{\btx}{{\sc Bib}\TeX}
+% \newcommand{\dtx}{\textsf{docstrip}}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+% This file is to be used as a language definition file with master
+% bibliographic files. The language it defines is
+% \begin{quote}\bfseries Finnish\end{quote}
+%
+% The translations for Finnish were supplied by
+% \begin{quote}\ttfamily "Niilo.Siljamo@Helsinki.FI"\end{quote}
+
+% This is not a self-sufficient \texttt{.mbs} file, but rather may
+% be used together with one that contains language support via
+% external definition files.
+%
+% Bernd Raichle points out that |\^^b| can be used in place of |\"|
+% within \btx{} code. One can thus replace |Nelj\^^b{a}s| with |Nelj\^^b{a}s|
+% and do away with the \texttt{umlaut} option.
+%
+% See the documentation for \texttt{makebst} for formatting details.
+%
+% \section{The Menu Information}
+%
+% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
+% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
+% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between |%<*!options&!driver>|
+% \dots\ |%</!options&!driver>| in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
+% extract only the menu information or the documentation driver.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+\mes{^^JOptions for FINNISH}
+\wr{\spsp\spsp finnish,\pc: Finnish language}
+
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `SIVUT':}{} % `Pages'
+\optdef{*}{}{`Sivu(t)'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{pp}{`Sivu' abbreviated}{as s. or ss.}
+\optdef{x}{ppx}{`Sivu' omitted}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `TOIMITTAJAT':}{} % `Editors'
+\optdef{*}{}{`Toimittaja(t)'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{ed}{`Toimittaja' abbreviated}{as toim.}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of other words}
+\optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory}
+\optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as emsimm\string\"ainen, toinen, etc}
+\optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1., 2., etc}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptions
+%</options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
+%
+% \section{The Coding}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!options&!driver>
+
+ % The language selected here is FINNISH
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{ "ja"}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{ "et~al." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+%<!ed>{ "toimittajat" }
+%<ed>{ "toim." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+%<!ed>{ "toimittaja" }
+%<ed>{ "toim." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "toimittanut" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+%<!abr>{ "painos" }
+%<abr>{ "painos" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+{ "osa" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "sarjasta" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+%<!abr>{ "numero" }
+%<abr>{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "teoksessa" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "sivut" }
+%<pp>{ "ss." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "sivu" }
+%<pp>{ "s." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+%<*revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "sivut" }
+
+%</revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+{ "luku" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+%<!abr>{ "Tekninen Raportti" }
+%<abr>{ "Tekn. Rap." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "pro gradu" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "v\^^b{a}it\^^b{o}skirja" }
+
+%<*!xedn>
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+%<!ord>{ "Ensimm\^^b{a}inen" }
+%<ord>{ "1." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+%<!ord>{ "Toinen" }
+%<ord>{ "2." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+%<!ord>{ "Kolmas" }
+%<ord>{ "3." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+%<!ord>{ "Nelj\^^b{a}s" }
+%<ord>{ "4." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+%<!ord>{ "Viides" }
+%<ord>{ "5." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.st}
+{ "." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
+{ "." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
+{ "." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "." }
+
+%</!xedn>
+MACRO {jan} {"tammikuu"}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"helmikuu"}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"maaliskuu"}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"huhtikuu"}
+
+MACRO {may} {"toukokuu"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"kes\^^b{a}kuu"}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"hein\^^b{a}kuu"}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"elokuu"}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"syyskuu"}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"lokakuu"}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"marraskuu"}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"joulukuu"}
+
+%</!options&!driver>
+ % End module: finnish.mbs
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/french.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/french.mbs
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cf2a561ff40
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/french.mbs
@@ -0,0 +1,312 @@
+%\iffalse         THIS IS A META COMMENT
+% File: french.mbs
+% Copyright 1995-2002 Patrick W Daly
+% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Aeronomie
+% Max-Planck-Str. 2
+% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
+% Germany
+% E-mail: daly@linmpi.mpg.de
+%
+% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+%
+% It is part of the custom-bib collection,
+%   a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
+%====================================================================
+%       A Language Definition File:  FRENCH
+%     to be included with other master bibliography style files
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%   (See version and date in the \ProvidesFile command below)
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%    This file is self-documenting: simply LaTeX it!
+%====================================================================
+%
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+%\fi
+ % \ProvidesFile{french.mbs}[2003/11/06 4.2 (PWD)]
+%\iffalse
+%<*a&!a>
+% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
+% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
+\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
+  \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
+%</a&!a>
+%<*driver>
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
+   \documentclass[a4paper,10pt,twoside]{article}%
+   \usepackage{doc}%
+   \raggedbottom
+   \CodelineNumbered
+   \RecordChanges
+ %  Comment out next line to print coding
+   \OnlyDescription
+   \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.5\paperwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5\textwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+   \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
+
+\begin{document}
+   \DocInput{french.mbs}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%                   END OF META COMMENT   \fi
+% \CharacterTable
+%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm}
+%
+% \changes{1.0}{1995 Mar 15}{Initial version}
+% \changes{1.1}{1995 May 4}{Do no abbreviate `edited by'}
+% \changes{1.2}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{bbl.etal}}
+% \changes{1.3}{1999 Feb 1}{Add option \texttt{xedn}}
+% \changes{1.3}{1999 Feb 24}{Update copyright notice}
+% \changes{4.0}{1999 Oct 11}{For merlin 4.0}
+% \changes{4.0a}{2001 Aug 28}{Correct r\'edacteur}
+% \changes{4.1}{2001 Jan 14}{Number of corrections by Olivier Dupuis}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2002 Oct 18}{Fix bug in page number suppression}
+% \changes{4.2}{2003 Nov 6}{Fix comma separator, consistent with \texttt{makebst} 4.1}
+%
+% \pagestyle{myheadings}
+% \markboth{P. W. Daly}{French Bibliographies}
+%
+% \title{{\bfseries French Language Definition File}\\
+%      for master bibliographic style files}
+%
+% \author{Patrick W. Daly}
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{french.mbs}
+% \date{This paper describes file \texttt{\filename},\\
+%  version \fileversion{} from \filedate}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \parskip=1ex \parindent=0pt
+%
+% \newcommand{\btx}{{\sc Bib}\TeX}
+% \newcommand{\dtx}{\textsf{docstrip}}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+% This file is to be used as a language definition file with master
+% bibliographic files. The language it defines is
+% \begin{quote}\bfseries French\end{quote}
+%
+% This is not a self-sufficient \texttt{.mbs} file, but rather may
+% be used together with one that contains language support via
+% external definition files.
+%
+% See the documentation for \texttt{makebst} for formatting details.
+%
+% \section{The Menu Information}
+%
+% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
+% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
+% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between |%<*!options&!driver>|
+% \dots\ |%</!options&!driver>| in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
+% extract only the menu information or the documentation driver.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+\mes{^^JOptions for FRENCH}
+\wr{\spsp\spsp french,\pc: French language}
+
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`Page(s)'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{pp}{`Page' abbreviated}{as p. or pp.}
+\optdef{x}{ppx}{`Page' omitted}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `REDACTEUR':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`R\string\'edacteur(s)'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{ed}{`R\string\'edacteur' abbreviated}{as R\string\'ed.}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of Tome, \string\'edition, chapitre}
+\optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory}
+\optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as premi\string\`ere, deuxi\string\`eme,...}
+\optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1re, 2e, 3e, etc}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptions
+%</options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
+%
+% \section{The Coding}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!options&!driver>
+
+ % The language selected here is FRENCH
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{ "et"}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{ "et~al." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+%<!ed>{ "r\'edacteurs" }
+%<ed>{ "r\'eds." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+%<!ed>{ "r\'edacteur" }
+%<ed>{ "r\'ed." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "edit\'e par" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+%<!abr>{ "\'edition" }
+%<abr>{ "\'ed." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+%<!abr>{ "tome" }
+%<abr>{ "t." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "de" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+%<!abr>{ "num\'ero" }
+%<abr>{ "n\textsuperscript{o}\kern.2em\relax" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "n\textsuperscript{o}\kern.2em\relax" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "dans" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "pages" }
+%<pp>{ "p." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "page" }
+%<pp>{ "p." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+%<*revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "pages" }
+
+%</revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+%<!abr>{ "chapitre" }
+%<abr>{ "chap." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+%<!abr>{ "Rapport technique" }
+%<abr>{ "Rap. tech." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Th\`ese de ma\^itre" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Th\`ese de doctorat" }
+
+%<*!xedn>
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+%<!ord>{ "Premi\`ere" }
+%<ord>{ "1$^{\mbox{\scriptsize re}}$" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+%<!ord>{ "Deuxi\`eme" }
+%<ord>{ "2$^{\mbox{\scriptsize e}}$" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+%<!ord>{ "Troisi\`eme" }
+%<ord>{ "3$^{\mbox{\scriptsize e}}$" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+%<!ord>{ "Quatri\`eme" }
+%<ord>{ "4$^{\mbox{\scriptsize e}}$" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+%<!ord>{ "Cinqui\`eme" }
+%<ord>{ "5$^{\mbox{\scriptsize e}}$" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "$^{\mbox{\scriptsize e}}$" }
+
+%</!xedn>
+%<*!abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"janvier"}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"f\'evrier"}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"mars"}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"avril"}
+
+MACRO {may} {"mai"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"juin"}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"juillet"}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"ao\^ut"}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"septembre"}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"octobre"}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"novembre"}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"d\'ecembre"}
+
+%</!abr>
+%<*abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"f\'ev."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"mars"}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"avr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"mai"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"juin"}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"juil."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"ao\^ut"}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"sept."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"oct."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"d\'ec."}
+
+%</abr>
+%</!options&!driver>
+ % End module: french.mbs
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/geojour.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/geojour.mbs
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9eb05791cf5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/geojour.mbs
@@ -0,0 +1,404 @@
+%\iffalse         THIS IS A META COMMENT
+% File: physjour.mbs
+% Copyright 1994-1999 Patrick W Daly
+% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Aeronomie
+% Max-Planck-Str. 2
+% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
+% Germany
+% E-mail: daly@linmpi.mpg.de
+%
+% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+%
+% It is part of the custom-bib collection,
+%   a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
+%====================================================================
+%       A Journal Definition File for Geophysics journals
+%     to be included with other master bibliography style files
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%   (See version and date in the \ProvidesFile command below)
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%    This file is self-documenting: simply LaTeX it!
+%====================================================================
+%
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+%\fi
+ % \ProvidesFile{geojour.mbs}[2002/07/10 2.0h (PWD)]
+%\iffalse
+%<*a&!a>
+% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
+% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
+\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
+  \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
+%</a&!a>
+%<*driver>
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
+   \documentclass[a4paper,10pt,twoside]{article}%
+   \usepackage{doc}%
+   \raggedbottom
+   \CodelineNumbered
+   \RecordChanges
+ %  Comment out next line to print coding
+   \OnlyDescription
+   \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.5\paperwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5\textwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+   \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
+
+\begin{document}
+   \DocInput{geojour.mbs}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%                   END OF META COMMENT   \fi
+% \CharacterTable
+%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm}
+%
+% \changes{1.0}{1996 Feb 2}{Initial version, contributed by N.S.}
+% \changes{1.1}{1996 Jun 20}{Additions/correction by Martin Dix}
+% \changes{2.0}{1996 Jun 26}{Reorganize with \texttt{physjour} and
+%         \texttt{photjour}}
+% \changes{2.0a}{1997 May 26}{Correct grl abbreviation; add \texttt{pss}}
+% \changes{2.0b}{1997 Sep 15}{Replace umlaut with Raichle trick}
+% \changes{2.0c}{1998 Nov 25}{Add \texttt{pce} and \texttt{sp}}
+% \changes{2.0d}{1998 Dec 22}{Add \texttt{empl}, \texttt{ass}, \texttt{expa},
+%    and \texttt{sgp}}
+% \changes{2.0e}{1999 Feb 24}{Update copyright notice}
+% \changes{2.0f}{1999 Oct 8}{Revise some journal abbreviations}
+% \changes{2.0g}{1999 Nov 16}{Get \texttt{pce} right}
+% \changes{2.0h}{2002 Jul 10}{Add \texttt{jastp}}
+%
+% \pagestyle{myheadings}
+% \markboth{P. W. Daly}{Geophysics Journal Names}
+%
+% \title{{\bfseries Geophysics Journal Definition File}\\
+%      for master bibliographic style files}
+%
+% \author{Patrick W. Daly}
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{geojour.mbs}
+% \date{This paper describes file \texttt{\filename},\\
+%  version \fileversion{} from \filedate}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \parskip=1ex \parindent=0pt
+%
+% \newcommand{\btx}{{\sc Bib}\TeX}
+% \newcommand{\dtx}{\textsf{docstrip}}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% This file adds a list of preprogrammed geophysics journal names to
+% bibliographic style files, in both full and abbreviated versions.
+% These defined journal names will be added to those in the main master
+% bibliography style file.
+%
+% This is not a self-sufficient \texttt{.mbs} file, but rather may
+% be used together with one that contains support for
+% external definition files.
+%
+% This file was contributed by
+% \begin{quote}
+% Niilo Siljamo, email \texttt{siljamo@rock.helsinki.fi}.
+% \end{quote}
+% with additions and corrections by
+% \begin{quote}
+% Martin Dix, email \texttt{mrd@dar.csiro.au}
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% Version 2.0: I go through all journal names, checking for conflicts and
+% duplications with \texttt{physjour.mbs} and \texttt{photjour.mbs}.
+% Optical and physical journals removed; geophysical journals included
+% from the others. Where one journal exists with multiple shorthands,
+% all versions are kept.
+%
+% Version 2.0a: correct abbreviation for GRL; introduce \texttt{pss} for
+% Planetary and Space Science, which for some wierd reason is keyed as
+% \texttt{pps}, which I leave for compatibility.
+%
+% Version 2.0b: Fixes a problem with umlauts acting as string terminator.
+%
+% Versions 2.0c,d: Add more journals.
+%
+% Version 2.0e: revise copyright notice to LPPL standard.
+%
+% Version 2.0f: revise journal abbreviations as suggested by Conrado
+% Badenas \texttt{Conrado.Badenas@uv.es}
+%
+% See the documentation for \texttt{makebst} for formatting details.
+%
+% \section{The Menu Information}
+%
+% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
+% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
+% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between |%<*!options>|
+% \dots\ |%</!options>| in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
+% extract only the menu information.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+\mes{^^JGEOPHYSICS JOURNAL NAMES:}
+\optdef{*}{}{Full geophysics journal names}{}
+\optdef{a}{jabr}{Abbreviate geophysics names}{for journals}
+\getans
+\endoptions
+%</options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
+%
+% \section{The Coding}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!options>
+%<*jabr>
+MACRO {aisr} {"Adv. Space Res."}
+MACRO {ag} {"Ann. Geophys."}
+MACRO {anigeo} {"Ann. Geofis."}
+MACRO {angl} {"Ann. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {andmet} {"Ann. d. Meteor."}
+MACRO {andgeo} {"Ann. d. Geophys."}
+MACRO {andphy} {"Ann. Phys.-Paris"}
+MACRO {afmgb} {"Arch. Meteor. Geophys. Bioklimatol."}
+MACRO {atph} {"Atm\'osphera"}
+MACRO {aao} {"Atmos. Ocean"}
+MACRO {ass}{"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {atenv} {"Atmos. Environ."}
+MACRO {aujag} {"Aust. J. Agr. Res."}
+MACRO {aumet} {"Aust. Meteorol. Mag."}
+MACRO {blmet} {"Bound.-Lay. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {bams} {"Bull. Amer. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {cch} {"Clim. Change"}
+MACRO {cdyn} {"Clim. Dynam."}
+MACRO {cbul} {"Climatol. Bull."}
+MACRO {cap} {"Contrib. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {dsr} {"Deep-Sea Res."}
+MACRO {dhz} {"Dtsch. Hydrogr. Z."}
+MACRO {dao} {"Dynam. Atmos. Oceans"}
+MACRO {eco} {"Ecology"}
+MACRO {empl}{"Earth, Moon and Planets"}
+MACRO {envres} {"Environ. Res."}
+MACRO {envst} {"Environ. Sci. Technol."}
+MACRO {ecms} {"Estuarine Coastal Mar. Sci."}
+MACRO {expa}{"Exper. Astron."}
+MACRO {geoint} {"Geofis. Int."}
+MACRO {geopub} {"Geofys. Publ."}
+MACRO {geogeo} {"Geol. Geofiz."}
+MACRO {gafd} {"Geophys. Astrophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {gfd} {"Geophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {geomag} {"Geophys. Mag."}
+MACRO {georl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {grl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {ga} {"Geophysica"}
+MACRO {gs} {"Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ieeetap} {"IEEE Trans. Antenn. Propag."}
+MACRO {ijawp} {"Int. J. Air Water Pollut."}
+MACRO {ijc} {"Int. J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {ijrs} {"Int. J. Remote Sens."}
+MACRO {jam} {"J. Appl. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {jaot} {"J. Atmos. Ocean. Technol."}
+MACRO {jatp} {"J. Atmos. Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jastp} {"J. Atmos. Solar-Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jce} {"J. Climate"}
+MACRO {jcam} {"J. Climate Appl. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcm} {"J. Climate Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcy} {"J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {jgr} {"J. Geophys. Res."}
+MACRO {jga} {"J. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {jh} {"J. Hydrol."}
+MACRO {jmr} {"J. Mar. Res."}
+MACRO {jmrj} {"J. Meteor. Res. Japan"}
+MACRO {jm} {"J. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jpo} {"J. Phys. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {jra} {"J. Rech. Atmos."}
+MACRO {jaes} {"J. Aeronaut. Sci."}
+MACRO {japca} {"J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc."}
+MACRO {jas} {"J. Atmos. Sci."}
+MACRO {jmts} {"J. Mar. Technol. Soc."}
+MACRO {jmsj} {"J. Meteorol. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {josj} {"J. Oceanogr. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jwm} {"J. Wea. Mod."}
+MACRO {lao} {"Limnol. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {mwl} {"Mar. Wea. Log"}
+MACRO {mau} {"Mausam"}
+MACRO {meteor} {"``Meteor'' Forschungsergeb."}
+MACRO {map} {"Meteorol. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {metmag} {"Meteor. Mag."}
+MACRO {metmon} {"Meteor. Monogr."}
+MACRO {metrun} {"Meteor. Rundsch."}
+MACRO {metzeit} {"Meteor. Z."}
+MACRO {metgid} {"Meteor. Gidrol."}
+MACRO {mwr} {"Mon. Weather Rev."}
+MACRO {nwd} {"Natl. Weather Dig."}
+MACRO {nzjmfr} {"New Zeal. J. Mar. Freshwater Res."}
+MACRO {npg} {"Nonlin. Proc. Geophys."}
+MACRO {om} {"Oceanogr. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {ocac} {"Oceanol. Acta"}
+MACRO {oceanus} {"Oceanus"}
+MACRO {paleoc} {"Paleoceanography"}
+MACRO {pce} {"Phys. Chem. Earth"}
+MACRO {pmg} {"Pap. Meteor. Geophys."}
+MACRO {ppom} {"Pap. Phys. Oceanogr. Meteor."}
+MACRO {physzeit} {"Phys. Z."}
+MACRO {pps} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pss} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pag} {"Pure Appl. Geophys."}
+MACRO {qjrms} {"Quart. J. Roy. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {quatres} {"Quat. Res."}
+MACRO {rsci} {"Radio Sci."}
+MACRO {rse} {"Remote Sens. Environ."}
+MACRO {rgeo} {"Rev. Geophys."}
+MACRO {rgsp} {"Rev. Geophys. Space Phys."}
+MACRO {rdgeo} {"Rev. Geofis."}
+MACRO {revmeta} {"Rev. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {sgp}{"Surveys in Geophys."}
+MACRO {sp} {"Solar Phys."}
+MACRO {ssr} {"Space Sci. Rev."}
+MACRO {tellus} {"Tellus"}
+MACRO {tac} {"Theor. Appl. Climatol."}
+MACRO {tagu} {"Trans. Am. Geophys. Union (EOS)"}
+MACRO {wrr} {"Water Resour. Res."}
+MACRO {weather} {"Weather"}
+MACRO {wafc} {"Weather Forecast."}
+MACRO {ww} {"Weatherwise"}
+MACRO {wmob} {"WMO Bull."}
+MACRO {zeitmet} {"Z. Meteorol."}
+%</jabr>
+%<*!jabr>
+MACRO {aisr} {"Advances in Space Research"}
+MACRO {ag} {"Annales Geophysic\ae"}
+MACRO {anigeo} {"Annali di Geofisica"}
+MACRO {angl} {"Annals of Glaciology"}
+MACRO {andmet} {"Annalen der Meteorologie"}
+MACRO {andgeo} {"Annales de Geophysique"}
+MACRO {andphy} {"Annales de Physique"}
+MACRO {afmgb} {"Archiv f\^^b{u}r Meteorologie, Geophysik und Bioklimatologie"}
+MACRO {ass}{"Astrophysics and Space Science"}
+MACRO {atph} {"Atm\'osphera"}
+MACRO {aao} {"Atmosphere-Ocean"}
+MACRO {atenv} {"Atmospheric Environment"}
+MACRO {aujag} {"Australian Journal of Agricultural Research"}
+MACRO {aumet} {"Australian Meteorological Magazine"}
+MACRO {blmet} {"Boundary-Layer Meteorology"}
+MACRO {bams} {"Bulletin of the American Meteorological Society"}
+MACRO {cch} {"Climatic Change"}
+MACRO {cdyn} {"Climate Dynamics"}
+MACRO {cbul} {"Climatological Bulletin"}
+MACRO {cap} {"Contributions to Atmospheric Physics"}
+MACRO {dsr} {"Deep-Sea Research"}
+MACRO {dhz} {"Deutsche Hydrographische Zeitschrift"}
+MACRO {dao} {"Dynamics of Atmospheres and Oceans"}
+MACRO {eco} {"Ecology"}
+MACRO {empl}{"Earth, Moon and Planets"}
+MACRO {envres} {"Environmental Research"}
+MACRO {envst} {"Environmental Science and Technology"}
+MACRO {ecms} {"Estuarine and Coastal Marine Science"}
+MACRO {expa}{"Experimental Astronomy"}
+MACRO {geoint} {"Geofisica Internationale"}
+MACRO {geopub} {"Geofysiske Publikasjoner"}
+MACRO {geogeo} {"Geologiya i Geofizika"}
+MACRO {gafd} {"Geophysical and Astrophysical Fluid Dynamics"}
+MACRO {gfd} {"Geophysical Fluid Dynamics"}
+MACRO {geomag} {"Geophysical Magazine"}
+MACRO {georl} {"Geophysical Research Letters"}
+MACRO {grl} {"Geophysical Research Letters"}
+MACRO {ga} {"Geophysica"}
+MACRO {gs} {"Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ieeetap} {"IEEE Transactions on Antennas and Propagation"}
+MACRO {ijawp} {"International Journal of Air and Water Pollution"}
+MACRO {ijc} {"International Journal of Climatology"}
+MACRO {ijrs} {"International Journal of Remote Sensing"}
+MACRO {jam} {"Journal of Applied Meteorology"}
+MACRO {jaot} {"Journal of Atmospheric and Oceanic Technology"}
+MACRO {jatp} {"Journal of Atmospheric and Terrestrial Physics"}
+MACRO {jastp} {"Journal of Atmospheric and Solar-Terrestrial Physics"}
+MACRO {jce} {"Journal of Climate"}
+MACRO {jcam} {"Journal of Climate and Applied Meteorology"}
+MACRO {jcm} {"Journal of Climate Meteorology"}
+MACRO {jcy} {"journal of Climatology"}
+MACRO {jgr} {"Journal of Geophysical Research"}
+MACRO {jga} {"Journal of Glaciology"}
+MACRO {jh} {"Journal of Hydrology"}
+MACRO {jmr} {"Journal of Marine Research"}
+MACRO {jmrj} {"Journal of Meteorological Research, Japan"}
+MACRO {jm} {"Journal of Meteorology"}
+MACRO {jpo} {"Journal of Physical Oceanography"}
+MACRO {jra} {"Journal de Recherches Atmospheriques"}
+MACRO {jaes} {"Journal of the Aeronautical Sciences"}
+MACRO {japca} {"Journal of the Air Pollution Control Association"}
+MACRO {jas} {"Journal of the Atmospheric Sciences"}
+MACRO {jmts} {"Journal of the Marine Technology Society"}
+MACRO {jmsj} {"Journal of Meteorological Society of Japan"}
+MACRO {josj} {"Journal of the Oceanographical Society of Japan"}
+MACRO {jwm} {"Journal of Weather Modification"}
+MACRO {lao} {"Limnology and Oceanography"}
+MACRO {mwl} {"Mariners Weather Log"}
+MACRO {mau} {"Mausam"}
+MACRO {meteor} {"``Meteor'' Forschungsergebnisse"}
+MACRO {map} {"Meteorology and Atmospheric Physics"}
+MACRO {metmag} {"Meteorological Magazine"}
+MACRO {metmon} {"Meteorological Monographs"}
+MACRO {metrun} {"Meteorologische Rundschau"}
+MACRO {metzeit} {"Meteorologische Zeitschrift"}
+MACRO {metgid} {"Meteorologiya i Gidrologiya"}
+MACRO {mwr} {"Monthly Weather Review"}
+MACRO {nwd} {"National Weather Digest"}
+MACRO {nzjmfr} {"New Zealand Journal of Marine and Freshwater Research"}
+MACRO {npg} {"Nonlinear Processes in Geophysics"}
+MACRO {om} {"Oceanography and Meteorology"}
+MACRO {ocac} {"Oceanologica Acta"}
+MACRO {oceanus} {"Oceanus"}
+MACRO {paleoc} {"Paleoceanography"}
+MACRO {pce} {"Physics and Chemistry of the Earth"}
+MACRO {pmg} {"Papers in Meteorology and Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ppom} {"Papers in Physical Oceanography and Meteorology"}
+MACRO {physzeit} {"Physikalische Zeitschrift"}
+MACRO {pps} {"Planetary and Space Science"}
+MACRO {pss} {"Planetary and Space Science"}
+MACRO {pag} {"Pure and Applied Geophysics"}
+MACRO {qjrms} {"Quarterly Journal of the Royal Meteorological Society"}
+MACRO {quatres} {"Quaternary Research"}
+MACRO {rsci} {"Radio Science"}
+MACRO {rse} {"Remote Sensing of the Environment"}
+MACRO {rgeo} {"Reviews of Geophysics"}
+MACRO {rgsp} {"Reviews of Geophysics and Space Physics"}
+MACRO {rdgeo} {"Revista de Geofisica"}
+MACRO {revmeta} {"Revista Meteorologica"}
+MACRO {sgp}{"Surveys in Geophysics"}
+MACRO {sp} {"Solar Phys."}
+MACRO {ssr} {"Space Science Review"}
+MACRO {tellus} {"Tellus"}
+MACRO {tac} {"Theoretical and Applied Climatology"}
+MACRO {tagu} {"Transactions, American Geophysical Union (EOS)"}
+MACRO {wrr} {"Water Resources Research"}
+MACRO {weather} {"Weather"}
+MACRO {wafc} {"Weather and Forecasting"}
+MACRO {ww} {"Weatherwise"}
+MACRO {wmob} {"World Meteorological Organization Bulletin"}
+MACRO {zeitmet} {"Zeitschrift f\^^b{u}r Meteorologie"}
+%</!jabr>
+%</!options>
+ % End module: geojour.mbs
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/geophys.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/geophys.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f74e560cbe2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/geophys.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,334 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `geophys.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% shorthnd.ins  (with options: `head')
+%% physjour.mbs 
+%% geojour.mbs 
+%% shorthnd.ins  (with options: `tail')
+%% ===============================================
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE
+%% See below for the copyright and distribution conditions.
+%% 
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% It may be distributed without the source files listed above.
+%% ===============================================
+%% Copyright 1998, 1999 Patrick W. Daly
+%%
+%% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+%% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+%% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+%% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{longtable}
+
+\def\ACRO{\begingroup\catcode`\M=11\relax\catcode`\"=9\relax\acro}
+\def\acro#1#2{\endgroup\ttfamily#1 & \raggedright #2 \tabularnewline}
+\def\PF#1[#2]{\\\hline\multicolumn{2}{c}{File: \texttt{#1}, version: #2
+              \rule[-.75em]{0pt}{2em}}\\\hline\\[-1ex]}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\setlength{\parskip}{1ex}
+
+\pagestyle{myheadings}
+\markright{List of Journal Shorthands}
+\begin{document}
+
+\title
+  {List of the Shorthands for Journal Names in Various \texttt{.mbs} Files}
+
+\author{Patrick W. Daly}
+
+\date{This is part of the \texttt{makebst} or \texttt{custom-bib} bundle}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\newcommand{\btx}{\textsc{Bib}\TeX}
+
+The shorthands here may be used in \btx\ database (\texttt{.bib}) files in
+place of the full journal name. For example, instead of
+\begin{verbatim}
+journal = "Phys. Rev.",
+\end{verbatim}
+it is sufficient to give
+\begin{verbatim}
+journal = pr,
+\end{verbatim}
+The advantage of this is not only the convenience of typing a shorter form,
+but also the automatic switching between the abbreviated (here ``Phys.\
+Rev.'')\ and full forms (``Physical Review'') depending on the bibliographic
+style file. Thus the one database entry is reformatted automatically.
+
+There is a set of standard shorthands for computing science included in the
+original \texttt{plain.bst}, \texttt{abbrv.bst}, \texttt{unsrt.bst}, and
+\texttt{alpha.bst} files. These are built into \texttt{merlin.mbs} and are
+always present in every \texttt{.bst} file generated from it.
+
+Whether or not the shorthand is present in your \texttt{.bst} file depends on
+the inclusion of the proper \texttt{.mbs} source file during its creation with
+the \texttt{makebst} program. Check the heading to the \texttt{.bst} file
+to find out what source files went into its generation.
+
+You may make up your own list of journal names, abbreviated and full, by using
+one of the existing \texttt{.mbs} files as a model. Include its name in
+\texttt{shorthnd.ins} to obtain a listing of its shorthands too.
+
+\newpage
+
+\begingroup
+\centering
+\def\PC#1{\ifx#1\ProvidesFile \let\next=#1\else\let\next=\skipline\fi\next}
+\def\skipline{\begingroup\catcode`\^^M=12 \SKPLNE}
+{\catcode`\^^M=12 \endlinechar=-1 \gdef\SKPLNE#1^^M{\endgroup}}
+\let\ProvidesFile=\PF
+\catcode`\%=\active
+\let%=\PC
+\catcode`\M=0
+\begin{longtable}{lp{6cm}}
+ \PF{merlin.mbs}[(all)]
+MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"}
+MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"}
+MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"}
+MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"}
+MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"}
+MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"}
+MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"}
+MACRO {ieeetcad}
+  {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"}
+MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"}
+MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"}
+MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"}
+MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"}
+MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"}
+MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"}
+MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"}
+MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"}
+MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"}
+MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"}
+MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"}
+MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"}
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{physjour.mbs}[2002/01/14 2.2 (PWD)]
+MACRO {aa}{"Astronomy and Astrophysics"}
+MACRO {aasup}{"Astronomy and Astrophysics, Supplement Series"}
+MACRO {aj}{"Astronomical Journal"}
+MACRO {aph} {"Acta Physica"}
+MACRO {advp} {"Advances in Physics"}
+MACRO {ajp} {"American Journal of Physics"}
+MACRO {ajm} {"American Journal of Mathematics"}
+MACRO {amsci} {"American Scientist"}
+MACRO {anofd} {"Annals of Fluid Dynamics"}
+MACRO {am} {"Annals of Mathematics"}
+MACRO {ap} {"Annals of Physics"}
+MACRO {adp} {"Annalen der Physik"}
+MACRO {ao} {"Applied Optics"}
+MACRO {apl} {"Applied Physics Letters"}
+MACRO {app} {"Astroparticle Physics"}
+MACRO {apj} {"Astrophysical Journal"}
+MACRO {apjsup} {"Astrophysical Journal Supplement"}
+MACRO {apss} {"Astrophysics and Space Science"}
+MACRO {araa} {"Annual Review of Astronomy and Astrophysics"}
+MACRO {baas} {"Bulletin of the American Astronomical Society"}
+MACRO {baps} {"Bulletin of the American Physical Society"}
+MACRO {cmp} {"Communications in Mathematical Physics"}
+MACRO {cpam} {"Communications on Pure and Applied Mathematics"}
+MACRO {cppcf} {"Comments on Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {cpc} {"Computer Physics Communications"}
+MACRO {cqg} {"Classical and Quantum Gravity"}
+MACRO {cra} {"Comptes Rendus des S{\'e}ances de l'Acad{\'e}mie des Sciences A"}
+MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Engineering and Design"}
+MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Technology"}
+MACRO {grg} {"General Relativity and Gravitation"}
+MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science"}
+MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Transactions on Plasma Science"}
+MACRO {ijimw} {"International Journal of Infrared and Millimeter Waves"}
+MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Physics"}
+MACRO {irp} {"Infrared Physics"}
+MACRO {jap} {"Journal of Applied Physics"}
+MACRO {jasa} {"Journal of the Acoustical Society of America"}
+MACRO {jcp} {"Journal of Computational Physics"}
+MACRO {jetp} {"Soviet Physics--JETP"}
+MACRO {jfe} {"Journal of Fusion Energy"}
+MACRO {jfm} {"Journal of Fluid Mechanics"}
+MACRO {jmp} {"Journal of Mathematical Physics"}
+MACRO {jne} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy"}
+MACRO {jnec} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy, Part C: Plasma Physics, Accelerators, Thermonuclear Research"}
+MACRO {jnm} {"Journal of Nuclear Materials"}
+MACRO {jpc} {"Journal of Physical Chemistry"}
+MACRO {jpp} {"Journal of Plasma Physics"}
+MACRO {jpsj} {"Journal of the Physical Society of Japan"}
+MACRO {jsi} {"Journal of Scientific Instruments"}
+MACRO {jvst} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology"}
+MACRO {nat} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nature} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nedf} {"Nuclear Engineering and Design/Fusion"}
+MACRO {nf} {"Nuclear Fusion"}
+MACRO {nim} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods"}
+MACRO {nimpr} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research"}
+MACRO {np} {"Nuclear Physics"}
+MACRO {npb} {"Nuclear Physics B"}
+MACRO {nt/f} {"Nuclear Technology/Fusion"}
+MACRO {npbpc} {"Nuclear Physics B (Proceedings Supplements)"}
+MACRO {inc} {"Il Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {nc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {pf} {"Physics of Fluids"}
+MACRO {pfa} {"Physics of Fluids A: Fluid Dynamics"}
+MACRO {pfb} {"Physics of Fluids B: Plasma Physics"}
+MACRO {pl} {"Physics Letters"}
+MACRO {pla} {"Physics Letters A"}
+MACRO {plb} {"Physics Letters B"}
+MACRO {prep} {"Physics Reports"}
+MACRO {pnas} {"Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the USA"}
+MACRO {pp} {"Physics of Plasmas"}
+MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {phitrsl} {"Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London"}
+MACRO {prl} {"Physical Review Letters"}
+MACRO {pr} {"Physical Review"}
+MACRO {physrev} {"Physical Review"}
+MACRO {pra} {"Physical Review A"}
+MACRO {prb} {"Physical Review B"}
+MACRO {prc} {"Physical Review C"}
+MACRO {prd} {"Physical Review D"}
+MACRO {pre} {"Physical Review E"}
+MACRO {ps} {"Physica Scripta"}
+MACRO {procrsl} {"Proceedings of the Royal Society of London"}
+MACRO {rmp} {"Reviews of Modern Physics"}
+MACRO {rsi} {"Review of Scientific Instruments"}
+MACRO {science} {"Science"}
+MACRO {sciam} {"Scientific American"}
+MACRO {sam} {"Studies in Applied Mathematics"}
+MACRO {sjpp} {"Soviet Journal of Plasma Physics"}
+MACRO {spd} {"Soviet Physics--Doklady"}
+MACRO {sptp} {"Soviet Physics--Technical Physics"}
+MACRO {spu} {"Soviet Physics--Uspeki"}
+MACRO {st} {"Sky and Telescope"}
+ % End module: physjour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{geojour.mbs}[2002/07/10 2.0h (PWD)]
+MACRO {aisr} {"Advances in Space Research"}
+MACRO {ag} {"Annales Geophysic\ae"}
+MACRO {anigeo} {"Annali di Geofisica"}
+MACRO {angl} {"Annals of Glaciology"}
+MACRO {andmet} {"Annalen der Meteorologie"}
+MACRO {andgeo} {"Annales de Geophysique"}
+MACRO {andphy} {"Annales de Physique"}
+MACRO {afmgb} {"Archiv f\^^b{u}r Meteorologie, Geophysik und Bioklimatologie"}
+MACRO {ass}{"Astrophysics and Space Science"}
+MACRO {atph} {"Atm\'osphera"}
+MACRO {aao} {"Atmosphere-Ocean"}
+MACRO {atenv} {"Atmospheric Environment"}
+MACRO {aujag} {"Australian Journal of Agricultural Research"}
+MACRO {aumet} {"Australian Meteorological Magazine"}
+MACRO {blmet} {"Boundary-Layer Meteorology"}
+MACRO {bams} {"Bulletin of the American Meteorological Society"}
+MACRO {cch} {"Climatic Change"}
+MACRO {cdyn} {"Climate Dynamics"}
+MACRO {cbul} {"Climatological Bulletin"}
+MACRO {cap} {"Contributions to Atmospheric Physics"}
+MACRO {dsr} {"Deep-Sea Research"}
+MACRO {dhz} {"Deutsche Hydrographische Zeitschrift"}
+MACRO {dao} {"Dynamics of Atmospheres and Oceans"}
+MACRO {eco} {"Ecology"}
+MACRO {empl}{"Earth, Moon and Planets"}
+MACRO {envres} {"Environmental Research"}
+MACRO {envst} {"Environmental Science and Technology"}
+MACRO {ecms} {"Estuarine and Coastal Marine Science"}
+MACRO {expa}{"Experimental Astronomy"}
+MACRO {geoint} {"Geofisica Internationale"}
+MACRO {geopub} {"Geofysiske Publikasjoner"}
+MACRO {geogeo} {"Geologiya i Geofizika"}
+MACRO {gafd} {"Geophysical and Astrophysical Fluid Dynamics"}
+MACRO {gfd} {"Geophysical Fluid Dynamics"}
+MACRO {geomag} {"Geophysical Magazine"}
+MACRO {georl} {"Geophysical Research Letters"}
+MACRO {grl} {"Geophysical Research Letters"}
+MACRO {ga} {"Geophysica"}
+MACRO {gs} {"Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ieeetap} {"IEEE Transactions on Antennas and Propagation"}
+MACRO {ijawp} {"International Journal of Air and Water Pollution"}
+MACRO {ijc} {"International Journal of Climatology"}
+MACRO {ijrs} {"International Journal of Remote Sensing"}
+MACRO {jam} {"Journal of Applied Meteorology"}
+MACRO {jaot} {"Journal of Atmospheric and Oceanic Technology"}
+MACRO {jatp} {"Journal of Atmospheric and Terrestrial Physics"}
+MACRO {jastp} {"Journal of Atmospheric and Solar-Terrestrial Physics"}
+MACRO {jce} {"Journal of Climate"}
+MACRO {jcam} {"Journal of Climate and Applied Meteorology"}
+MACRO {jcm} {"Journal of Climate Meteorology"}
+MACRO {jcy} {"journal of Climatology"}
+MACRO {jgr} {"Journal of Geophysical Research"}
+MACRO {jga} {"Journal of Glaciology"}
+MACRO {jh} {"Journal of Hydrology"}
+MACRO {jmr} {"Journal of Marine Research"}
+MACRO {jmrj} {"Journal of Meteorological Research, Japan"}
+MACRO {jm} {"Journal of Meteorology"}
+MACRO {jpo} {"Journal of Physical Oceanography"}
+MACRO {jra} {"Journal de Recherches Atmospheriques"}
+MACRO {jaes} {"Journal of the Aeronautical Sciences"}
+MACRO {japca} {"Journal of the Air Pollution Control Association"}
+MACRO {jas} {"Journal of the Atmospheric Sciences"}
+MACRO {jmts} {"Journal of the Marine Technology Society"}
+MACRO {jmsj} {"Journal of Meteorological Society of Japan"}
+MACRO {josj} {"Journal of the Oceanographical Society of Japan"}
+MACRO {jwm} {"Journal of Weather Modification"}
+MACRO {lao} {"Limnology and Oceanography"}
+MACRO {mwl} {"Mariners Weather Log"}
+MACRO {mau} {"Mausam"}
+MACRO {meteor} {"``Meteor'' Forschungsergebnisse"}
+MACRO {map} {"Meteorology and Atmospheric Physics"}
+MACRO {metmag} {"Meteorological Magazine"}
+MACRO {metmon} {"Meteorological Monographs"}
+MACRO {metrun} {"Meteorologische Rundschau"}
+MACRO {metzeit} {"Meteorologische Zeitschrift"}
+MACRO {metgid} {"Meteorologiya i Gidrologiya"}
+MACRO {mwr} {"Monthly Weather Review"}
+MACRO {nwd} {"National Weather Digest"}
+MACRO {nzjmfr} {"New Zealand Journal of Marine and Freshwater Research"}
+MACRO {npg} {"Nonlinear Processes in Geophysics"}
+MACRO {om} {"Oceanography and Meteorology"}
+MACRO {ocac} {"Oceanologica Acta"}
+MACRO {oceanus} {"Oceanus"}
+MACRO {paleoc} {"Paleoceanography"}
+MACRO {pce} {"Physics and Chemistry of the Earth"}
+MACRO {pmg} {"Papers in Meteorology and Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ppom} {"Papers in Physical Oceanography and Meteorology"}
+MACRO {physzeit} {"Physikalische Zeitschrift"}
+MACRO {pps} {"Planetary and Space Science"}
+MACRO {pss} {"Planetary and Space Science"}
+MACRO {pag} {"Pure and Applied Geophysics"}
+MACRO {qjrms} {"Quarterly Journal of the Royal Meteorological Society"}
+MACRO {quatres} {"Quaternary Research"}
+MACRO {rsci} {"Radio Science"}
+MACRO {rse} {"Remote Sensing of the Environment"}
+MACRO {rgeo} {"Reviews of Geophysics"}
+MACRO {rgsp} {"Reviews of Geophysics and Space Physics"}
+MACRO {rdgeo} {"Revista de Geofisica"}
+MACRO {revmeta} {"Revista Meteorologica"}
+MACRO {sgp}{"Surveys in Geophysics"}
+MACRO {sp} {"Solar Phys."}
+MACRO {ssr} {"Space Science Review"}
+MACRO {tellus} {"Tellus"}
+MACRO {tac} {"Theoretical and Applied Climatology"}
+MACRO {tagu} {"Transactions, American Geophysical Union (EOS)"}
+MACRO {wrr} {"Water Resources Research"}
+MACRO {weather} {"Weather"}
+MACRO {wafc} {"Weather and Forecasting"}
+MACRO {ww} {"Weatherwise"}
+MACRO {wmob} {"World Meteorological Organization Bulletin"}
+MACRO {zeitmet} {"Zeitschrift f\^^b{u}r Meteorologie"}
+ % End module: geojour.mbs
+%% Copyright 1998, 1999 Patrick W. Daly
+%%
+%% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+%% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+%% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+%% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+\end{longtable}
+\endgroup
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `geophys.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/german.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/german.mbs
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..63ae1006cc3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/german.mbs
@@ -0,0 +1,335 @@
+%\iffalse         THIS IS A META COMMENT
+% File: german.mbs
+% Copyright 1995-1999 Patrick W Daly
+% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Aeronomie
+% Max-Planck-Str. 2
+% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
+% Germany
+% E-mail: daly@linmpi.mpg.de
+%
+% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+%
+% It is part of the custom-bib collection,
+%   a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
+%====================================================================
+%       A Language Definition File:  GERMAN
+%     to be included with other master bibliography style files
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%   (See version and date in the \ProvidesFile command below)
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%    This file is self-documenting: simply LaTeX it!
+%====================================================================
+%
+%\fi
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{german.mbs}[2003/11/06 4.2 (PWD)]
+%\iffalse
+%<*a&!a>
+% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
+% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
+\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
+  \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
+%</a&!a>
+%<*driver>
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
+   \documentclass[a4paper,10pt,twoside]{article}%
+   \usepackage{doc}%
+   \raggedbottom
+   \CodelineNumbered
+   \RecordChanges
+ %  Comment out next line to print coding
+   \OnlyDescription
+   \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.5\paperwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5\textwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+   \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
+
+\begin{document}
+   \DocInput{german.mbs}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%                   END OF META COMMENT   \fi
+% \CharacterTable
+%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm}
+%
+% \changes{1.0}{1995 Mar 15}{Initial version}
+% \changes{1.1}{1995 May 4}{Do no abbreviate `edited by'}
+% \changes{1.2}{1995 Jun 7}{Revisions suggested by Sven Hartrumpf}
+% \changes{1.3}{1995 Aug 2}{Revisions suggested by Gerd Neugebauer,
+%         dissertation option, `Techn. Ber.'}
+% \changes{1.3}{1995 Aug 2}{Techn. Ber. in braces to preserve case}
+% \changes{1.3a}{1995 Aug 3}{Herausgeber abbreviated as Hg, sing and plural}
+% \changes{1.4}{1995 Oct 25}{Remove \texttt{umlaut} option and \cs{qq},
+%      replace with Raichle's trick}
+% \changes{1.5}{1995 Nov 2}{Some bugs removed}
+% \changes{1.6}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{bbl.etal}}
+% \changes{1.7}{1999 Feb 1}{Add option \texttt{xedn}}
+% \changes{1.7}{1999 Feb 24}{Update copyright notice}
+% \changes{4.0}{1999 Oct 11}{For merlin 4.0}
+% \changes{4.0a}{2002 Oct 18}{Fix bug in page number suppression}
+% \changes{4.2}{2003 Nov 6}{Fix comma separator, consistent with \texttt{makebst} 4.1}
+%
+% \pagestyle{myheadings}
+% \markboth{P. W. Daly}{German Bibliographies}
+%
+% \title{{\bfseries German Language Definition File}\\
+%      for master bibliographic style files}
+%
+% \author{Patrick W. Daly}
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{german.mbs}
+% \date{This paper describes file \texttt{\filename},\\
+%  version \fileversion{} from \filedate}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \parskip=1ex \parindent=0pt
+%
+% \newcommand{\btx}{{\sc Bib}\TeX}
+% \newcommand{\dtx}{\textsf{docstrip}}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+% This file is to be used as a language definition file with master
+% bibliographic files. The language it defines is
+% \begin{quote}\bfseries German\end{quote}
+%
+% This is not a self-sufficient \texttt{.mbs} file, but rather may
+% be used together with one that contains language support via
+% external definition files.
+%
+% See the documentation for \texttt{makebst} for formatting details.
+%
+% Some improvements to the translations have been contributed by
+% Sven Hartrumpf of the Universit\"at Koblenz-Landau.
+%
+% Bernd Raichle points out that |\^^b| can be used in place of |\"|
+% within \btx{} code. One can thus replace |M\qq{a}rz| with |M\^^b arz|
+% and do away with the \texttt{umlaut} option.
+%
+% Some bugs have been removed on the advice of Gerd Neugebauer, Universit\"at
+% Koblenz.
+%
+% \section{The Menu Information}
+%
+% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
+% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
+% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between |%<*!options&!driver>|
+% \dots\ |%</!options&!driver>| in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
+% extract only the menu information or the documentation driver.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+\mes{^^JOptions for GERMAN}
+\wr{\spsp\spsp german,\pc: German language}
+
+
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `SEITEN':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`Seite(n)'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{pp}{`Seite' abbreviated}{as S.}
+\optdef{x}{ppx}{`Seite' omitted}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `HERAUSGEBER':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`Herausgeber'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{ed}{`Herausgeber' abbreviated}{as Hg.}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of Band, Auflage, Kapitel}
+\optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory}
+\optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as erste, zweite, dritte, etc}
+\optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1., 2., 3., etc}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{ALTERNATIVE FOR PHD THESIS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{ger-phd}{PhD as `Doktorarbeit}{}
+\optdef{d}{}{PhD as `Dissertation'}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptions
+%</options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
+%
+% \section{The Coding}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!options&!driver>
+
+ % The language selected here is GERMAN
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{ "und"}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{ "et~al." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+%<!ed>{ "Herausgeber" }
+%<ed>{ "Hg." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+%<!ed>{ "Herausgeber" }
+%<ed>{ "Hg." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "herausgegeben von" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+%<!abr>{ "Auf\/lage" }
+%<abr>{ "Aufl." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+%<!abr>{ "Band" }
+%<abr>{ "Bd." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "von" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+%<!abr>{ "Nummer" }
+%<abr>{ "Nr." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "Nr." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "in" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "Seiten" }
+%<pp>{ "S." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "Seite" }
+%<pp>{ "S." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+%<*revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "Seiten" }
+
+%</revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+%<!abr>{ "Kapitel" }
+%<abr>{ "Kap." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+%<!abr>{ "{Technischer Bericht}" }
+%<abr>{ "{Techn.\ Ber.}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Diplomarbeit" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+%<ger-phd>{ "Doktorarbeit" }
+%<!ger-phd>{ "Dissertation" }
+
+%<*!xedn>
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+%<!ord>{ "Erste" }
+%<ord>{ "1." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+%<!ord>{ "Zweite" }
+%<ord>{ "2." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+%<!ord>{ "Dritte" }
+%<ord>{ "3." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+%<!ord>{ "Vierte" }
+%<ord>{ "4." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+%<!ord>{ "F\^^b{u}nfte" }
+%<ord>{ "5." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "." }
+
+%</!xedn>
+%<*!abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"Januar"}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Februar"}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"M\^^b{a}rz"}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"April"}
+
+MACRO {may} {"Mai"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Juni"}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Juli"}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"August"}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"September"}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Oktober"}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"November"}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Dezember"}
+
+%</!abr>
+%<*abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Febr."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"M\^^b{a}rz"}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"Mai"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Juni"}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Juli"}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"Sept."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Okt."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Dez."}
+
+%</abr>
+%</!options&!driver>
+ % End module: german.mbs
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/italian.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/italian.mbs
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5f6b012cb6f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/italian.mbs
@@ -0,0 +1,308 @@
+%\iffalse         THIS IS A META COMMENT
+% File: italian.mbs
+% Copyright 1995-1999 Patrick W Daly
+% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Aeronomie
+% Max-Planck-Str. 2
+% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
+% Germany
+% E-mail: daly@linmpi.mpg.de
+%
+% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+%
+% It is part of the custom-bib collection,
+%   a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
+%====================================================================
+%       A Language Definition File:  ITALIAN
+%     to be included with other master bibliography style files
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%   (See version and date in the \ProvidesFile command below)
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%    This file is self-documenting: simply LaTeX it!
+%====================================================================
+%
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+%\fi
+ % \ProvidesFile{italian.mbs}[2003/11/06 4.2 (PWD/GP)] 
+%\iffalse
+%<*a&!a>
+% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
+% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
+\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
+  \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
+%</a&!a>
+%<*driver>
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
+   \documentclass[a4paper,10pt,twoside]{article}%
+   \usepackage{doc}%
+   \raggedbottom
+   \CodelineNumbered
+   \RecordChanges
+ %  Comment out next line to print coding
+   \OnlyDescription
+   \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.5\paperwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5\textwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+   \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
+
+\begin{document}
+   \DocInput{italian.mbs}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%                   END OF META COMMENT   \fi
+% \CharacterTable
+%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm}
+%
+% \changes{1.1}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{bbl.etal}}
+% \changes{1.2}{1999 Feb 1}{Add option \texttt{xedn}}
+% \changes{1.2}{1999 Feb 24}{Update copyright notice}
+% \changes{4.0}{1999 Oct 11}{For merlin 4.0}
+% \changes{4.0a}{2002 Oct 18}{Fix bug in page number suppression}
+% \changes{4.2}{2003 Nov 6}{Fix comma separator, consistent with \texttt{makebst} 4.1}
+%
+% \pagestyle{myheadings}
+% \markboth{Giovanni Pensa}{Italian Bibliographies}
+%
+% \title{{\bfseries Italian Language Definition File}\\
+%      for master bibliographic style files}
+%
+% \author{Patrick W. Daly \and Giovanni Pensa}
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{italian.mbs}
+% \date{This paper describes file \texttt{\filename},\\
+%  version \fileversion{} from \filedate}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \parskip=1ex \parindent=0pt
+%
+% \newcommand{\btx}{{\sc Bib}\TeX}
+% \newcommand{\dtx}{\textsf{docstrip}}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+% This file is to be used as a language definition file with master
+% bibliographic files. The language it defines is
+% \begin{quote}\bfseries Italian\end{quote}
+%
+% This is not a self-sufficient \texttt{.mbs} file, but rather may
+% be used together with one that contains language support via
+% external definition files.
+%
+% See the documentation for \texttt{makebst} for formatting details.
+%
+% \section{The Menu Information}
+%
+% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
+% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
+% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between |%<*!options&!driver>|
+% \dots\ |%</!options&!driver>| in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
+% extract only the menu information or the documentation driver.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+\mes{^^JOptions for ITALIAN}
+\wr{\spsp\spsp italian,\pc: Italian language}
+
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGINE':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`Pagina/e'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{pp}{`Pagina' abbreviated}{as pag.}
+\optdef{x}{ppx}{`Pagina' omitted}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `CURATORI':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`Curatore/i'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{ed}{`Curatore' abbreviated}{as cur.}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of volume, edizione, capitolo, etc}
+\optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory}
+\optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as prima, seconda, terza, etc}
+\optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1a, 2a, 3a, etc}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptions
+%</options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
+%
+% \section{The Coding}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!options&!driver>
+
+ % The language selected here is ITALIAN
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{ "e" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{ "et~al." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+%<!ed>{ "curatori" }
+%<ed>{ "cur." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+%<!ed>{ "curatore" }
+%<ed>{ "cur." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "curato da" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+%<!abr>{ "edizione" }
+%<abr>{ "ed." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+%<!abr>{ "volume" }
+%<abr>{ "vol." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "di" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+%<!abr>{ "numero" }
+%<abr>{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "in" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "pagine" }
+%<pp>{ "pp." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "pagina" }
+%<pp>{ "p." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+%<*revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "pagine" }
+
+%</revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+%<!abr>{ "capitolo" }
+%<abr>{ "cap." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+%<!abr>{ "Rapporto Tecnico" }
+%<abr>{ "Rap. Tecn." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Tesi di laurea" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Tesi di dottorato" }
+
+%<*!xedn>
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+%<!ord>{ "Prima" }
+%<ord>{ "1a" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+%<!ord>{ "Seconda" }
+%<ord>{ "2a" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+%<!ord>{ "Terza" }
+%<ord>{ "3a" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+%<!ord>{ "Quarta" }
+%<ord>{ "4a" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+%<!ord>{ "Quinta" }
+%<ord>{ "5a" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "a" }
+
+%</!xedn>
+%<*!abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"gennaio"}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"febbraio"}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"marzo"}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"aprile"}
+
+MACRO {may} {"maggio"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"giugno"}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"luglio"}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"agosto"}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"settembre"}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"ottobre"}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"novembre"}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"dicembre"}
+
+%</!abr>
+%<*abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"gen."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"mag"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"giu."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"lug."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"ago."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"set."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"ott."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"dic."}
+
+%</abr>
+%</!options&!driver>
+ % End module: italian.mbs
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/makebst.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/makebst.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2800c8aa875
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/makebst.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,310 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `makebst.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% makebst.dtx  (with options: `program,optlist,')
+%% =============================================
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% It is subject to the same copyright conditions (see below)
+%% as in the original file: makebst.dtx.
+%% It may not be distributed without makebst.dtx.
+%% 
+%% Full documentation can be obtained by LaTeXing that original file.
+%% Only a few abbreviated comments remain here to describe the usage.
+%% =============================================
+%% Copyright 1993-2003 Patrick W Daly
+%% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Aeronomie
+%% Max-Planck-Str. 2
+%% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
+%% Germany
+%% E-mail: daly@linmpi.mpg.de
+%%
+%% With additions by Arthur Ogawa
+%% E-mai: ogawa@teleport.com
+%%
+%% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+%% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+%% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+%% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+%%
+%% This is a contributed file to the LaTeX2e system.
+%% -------------------------------------------------
+\def\ProvidesFile#1 [#2 #3 #4]{\def\filename{#1}%
+  \def\fileversion{#3}\def\filedate{#2}}
+ \ProvidesFile{makebst}
+    [2003/09/08 4.1 (PWD, AO)]
+ % This file is to be run under TeX (or even LaTeX)
+ % It interactively asks questions about the bibliographic style file
+ % that you want to produce. When it is finished, it writes a docstrip
+ % driver file that produces that .bst file from the generic .mbs that
+ % you specified; optionally, it will call the docstrip run immediately.
+ % For details, read the documentation in the source file makebst.dtx.
+ %--------------------------------------------------------------------
+\newwrite\outfile
+\newread\ttyin
+\newread\infile
+\newwrite\ttyout
+\def\mes{\immediate\write\ttyout}
+\def\wr#1{\immediate\write\outfile{#1}}
+\def\umes#1{\mes{^^J#1}\wr{\pc#1}}%
+\newlinechar=`\^^J
+\def\MBswitch{\catcode`\{=12 \catcode`\}=12
+              \catcode`\(=1 \catcode`\)=2\relax}
+\def\defpar{\par}
+\def\remblk#1 @@{#1}
+\def\ask#1#2{\mes{#2}\read\ttyin to #1\ifx#1\defpar\def#1{}\else
+   \edef#1{\expandafter\remblk#1@@}\fi}
+\def\groot#1.#2@@{#1}
+\def\getroot#1{\expandafter\groot#1.@@}
+\def\gext#1.#2.#3@@{#2}
+\def\getext#1{\expandafter\gext#1..@@}
+\def\MBaskfile#1(#2.#3)#4#5{%
+\loop
+  \def\ans{#2.#3}
+\if!#2!
+ \if!#3!\ask{#5}{#1}\fi
+  \ask{#5}{#1 (default extension=#3)}\else
+  \ask{#5}{#1 (default=\ans)}
+\fi
+  \ifx#5\empty \edef#5{\ans}\fi
+  \edef\froot{\getroot#5}
+  \edef\fext{\getext#5}
+  \ifx\fext\empty \def\fext{#3}\fi
+  \edef#5{\froot.\fext}
+\if#4i
+  \def\temp{Cannot find file `#5'}
+  \openin\infile#5\relax
+  \ifeof\infile \def\ans{}\fi \closein\infile
+\else
+ \def\temp{There is no default}
+ \ifx\froot\empty \def\ans{}\fi
+\fi
+  \ifx\ans\empty \mes{*** \temp}
+\repeat}
+{\catcode`\%=12
+ \gdef\pc{%}
+ \gdef\pcpc{%% }
+}
+\def\spsp{\space\space}
+\newcount\hours
+\newcount\minutes
+\def\SetTime{\hours=\time
+        \global\divide\hours by 60
+        \minutes=\hours
+        \multiply\minutes by 60
+        \advance\minutes by-\time
+        \global\multiply\minutes by-1 }
+\SetTime
+\def\now{\number\hours:\ifnum\minutes<10 0\fi\number\minutes}
+\def\today{\number\year/\ifnum\month<10 0\fi\number\month
+   /\ifnum\day<10 0\fi\number\day}
+\def\Now{\today\space at \now}
+\def\optdef#1#2#3#4{%
+  \expandafter\def\csname opt@#1\endcsname{#2}%
+  \expandafter\def\csname txt@#1\endcsname{#3}%
+  \expandafter\def\csname cmt@#1\endcsname{#4}%
+  \edef\optlist{\optlist#1,}%
+  \def\OptAns{#1}%
+  \mes{(#1) #3\space #4}%
+}
+\def\optlist{}
+\def\nxtopt#1,#2@@{#1} \def\rstopt#1,#2@@{#2}
+\newif\ifsw
+\def\getans{%
+ \edef\optlist{\optlist\pc,}%
+ \ask{\ans}{\spsp Select:}%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname opt@\ans\endcsname\relax
+  \def\ans{*}%
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname opt@\ans\endcsname\relax
+  \let\ans\OptAns
+ \fi
+  \edef\ansx{\csname opt@\ans\endcsname}
+  \swtrue \loop
+    \edef\temp{\expandafter\nxtopt\optlist@@}%
+    \edef\optlist{\expandafter\rstopt\optlist@@}%
+  \if\temp\pc\swfalse\else
+   \if\temp\ans
+    \wropt\ans
+   \else
+    \ifoptlist\wrxopt\temp\fi
+      \fi
+      \expandafter\let\csname opt@\temp\endcsname\relax
+    \fi
+  \ifsw \repeat
+ \def\optlist{}%
+ \ifoptverbose
+  \wr{\pc------\string\ans=\ans (==\ansx)-------}%
+ \else
+   \ifoptlist
+     \wr{\pc--------------------}%
+   \fi
+ \fi
+}
+\def\wropt#1{%
+ \edef\tempx{\csname opt@#1\endcsname}%
+ \if!\tempx!
+  \wr{\spsp\spsp\pc: (def)
+   \csname txt@#1\endcsname
+   \ifoptverbose\space\csname cmt@#1\endcsname\fi
+  }%
+ \else
+  \wr{\spsp\tempx,\pc:
+   \csname txt@#1\endcsname
+   \ifoptverbose\space\csname cmt@#1\endcsname\fi
+  }%
+ \fi
+ \mes{\spsp You have selected: \csname txt@#1\endcsname}%
+}
+\def\wrxopt#1{%
+ \edef\tempx{\csname opt@#1\endcsname}%
+ \if!\tempx!
+  \wr{\pc\space\spsp\pc: (def)
+   \csname txt@#1\endcsname
+   \ifoptverbose\space\csname cmt@#1\endcsname\fi
+  }%
+ \else
+  \wr{\pc\space\tempx,\pc:
+   \csname txt@#1\endcsname
+   \ifoptverbose\space\csname cmt@#1\endcsname\fi
+  }%
+ \fi
+}
+\def\beginoptiongroup#1{\begingroup\activatestar\OGcontinue{#1}}%
+\def\OGcontinue#1#2{%
+ \endgroup
+ \begingroup
+  \let\OGswitch\secondoftwo\def\tempa{#2}%
+  \ifx\tempa\empty\expandafter\firstoftwo\else\expandafter\secondoftwo\fi
+  {%
+   \activestar
+  }{%
+   \tempa
+  }%
+  \OGswitch{}{%
+    \let\wropt\wrxopt
+    \let\ask\nilans
+    \def\mes##1{}%
+  }%
+  \def\OGmessage{#1}%
+  \umes{\ifoptverbose<<\fi\OGmessage}%
+}
+\def\endoptiongroup{%
+  \ifoptverbose\umes{>>\OGmessage}\fi
+  \aftergroup\let\aftergroup\ans\expandafter
+ \endgroup
+ \ans
+}
+\def\activestar{\let\OGswitch\firstoftwo}
+\def\activatestar{\catcode`\*13\relax}
+{\activatestar\gdef*{\activestar}}
+\def\firstoftwo#1#2{#1}
+\def\secondoftwo#1#2{#2}
+{\catcode`\$=12\gdef\nilans#1#2{\def\ans{$}}}
+\mes{***********************************^^J%
+     * This is Make Bibliography Style *^^J%
+     ***********************************^^J%
+     It makes up a docstrip batch job to produce^^J%
+     a customized .bst file for running with BibTeX}
+
+\ask{\yn}{Do you want a description of the usage? (NO)}
+
+\if!\yn!\else\if\yn n\else\if\yn N\else
+\mes{In the interactive dialogue that follows,^^J%
+     you will be presented with a series of menus.^^J%
+     In each case, one answer is the default, marked as (*),^^J%
+     and a mere carriage-return is sufficient to select it.^^J%
+     (If there is no * choice, then the default is the last choice.)^^J%
+     For the other choices, a letter is indicated^^J%
+     in brackets for selecting that option. If you select^^J%
+     a letter not in the list, default is taken.^^J^^J%
+     The final output is a file containing a batch job^^J%
+     which may be (La)TeXed to produce the desired BibTeX^^J%
+     bibliography style file. The batch job may be edited^^J%
+     to make minor changes, rather than running this program^^J%
+     once again.}
+\fi\fi\fi
+\MBaskfile{^^JEnter the name of the MASTER file}(merlin.mbs)i\mfile
+\let\mroot=\froot
+\let\mext=\fext
+\edef\temp{\mroot.opt}
+\openin\infile\temp\relax
+\let\mnext=\mext
+\ifeof\infile\else
+  \ask{\yn}{** Warning: a file `\temp' also exists^^J
+       \spsp Shall I read it for the menu information? (NO)^^J
+       \spsp (Answer `yes' only if you really know what you are doing)}
+\if\yn y\def\mnext{opt}\else\if\yn Y\def\mnext{opt}\fi\fi
+\mes{Menu information read from `\mroot.\mnext'}
+\fi
+\closein\infile
+\MBaskfile{^^JName of the final OUTPUT .bst file?}(.bst)o\ofile
+\let\oroot=\froot
+\let\oext=\fext
+\ask{\ans}{^^JGive a comment line to include in the style file.^^J%
+           Something like for which journals it is applicable.}
+\immediate\openout\outfile\oroot.dbj
+\wr{\pcpc Driver file to produce \oroot.\oext\space from \mroot.\mext}
+\wr{\pcpc Generated with \filename, version \fileversion\space (\filedate)}
+\wr{\pcpc Produced on \Now}
+\wr{\pcpc}
+\wr{\string\input\space docstrip}
+\wr{}
+\wr{\string\preamble}
+\wr{----------------------------------------}
+\wr{*** \ans\space ***}
+\wr{}
+\wr{\string\endpreamble}
+\wr{}
+\wr{\string\postamble}
+\wr{End of customized bst file}
+\wr{\string\endpostamble}
+\wr{}
+\wr{\string\keepsilent}
+\wr{}
+\wr{\string\askforoverwritefalse}
+\begingroup\MBswitch
+\wr(\string\def\string\MBopts{\string\from{\mroot.\mext}{\pc)
+\endgroup
+\newif\ifoptlist
+\optlisttrue
+\ifoptlist\else
+ \ask\yn{Do you want the unused option lines^^J%
+         \spsp to appear as comments in the output? (NO)}
+ \if!\yn!\else\if\yn n\else\if\yn N\else\optlisttrue\fi\fi\fi
+\fi
+\newif\ifoptverbose
+\ifoptlist
+ \ifoptverbose\else
+  \ask\yn{Do you want verbose comments? (NO)}
+  \if!\yn!\else\if\yn n\else\if\yn N\else\optverbosetrue\fi\fi\fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+\edef\temp{\mroot.\mnext}
+\let\endoptions=\endinput
+\input\temp
+\begingroup\MBswitch
+\wr(\spsp}})
+\endgroup
+\wr{\string\generate{\string\file{\oroot.\oext}{\string\MBopts}}}
+\wr{\string\endbatchfile}
+
+\immediate\closeout\outfile
+\mes{^^JFinished!!^^J%
+     Batch job written to file `\oroot.dbj'}
+\def\ofile{\oroot.dbj}
+\ask{\yn}{Shall I now run this batch job? (NO)}
+\def\temp{\relax}
+\if!\yn!\else\if\yn n\else\if\yn N\else
+\def\temp{\input\ofile}\fi\fi\fi
+{\catcode`\@=11 \ifx\@@end\undefined\else
+  \global\let\end=\@@end\fi}
+\temp
+\end
+%% <<<<< End of generated file <<<<<<
+%%
+%% End of file `makebst.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/merlin.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/merlin.mbs
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6e5014dc22b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/merlin.mbs
@@ -0,0 +1,9043 @@
+%\iffalse         THIS IS A META COMMENT
+% File: merlin.mbs
+%% Copyright 1994-2005 Patrick W Daly
+% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Sonnensystemforschung
+% Max-Planck-Str. 2
+% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
+% Germany
+% E-mail: daly@mps.mpg.de
+%
+% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+%
+% It is part of the custom-bib collection,
+%   a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
+%====================================================================
+%       Master  Bibliography  Style
+%    for customizing bibliographic style files (.bst)
+%    with the help of     docstrip.tex
+%    and the auxiliary program     makebst.tex
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%   (See version and date in the \ProvidesFile command below)
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%    This file supports numerical and author-year citation styles
+%        for natbib, harvard, astronom, authordate, apalike
+%    It also supports languages other than English
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%    This file is self-documenting: simply LaTeX it!
+%  (Alternatively, extract documentation driver with option `driver')
+%====================================================================
+%
+%<*!tail>
+% (The following notice appears in bst files generated from this file)
+ % ===============================================================
+ % IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+ % This bibliographic style (bst) file has been generated from one or
+ % more master bibliographic style (mbs) files, listed above.
+ %
+ % This generated file can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+ % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+ % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+ % version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+ % ===============================================================
+ % Name and version information of the main mbs file:
+%\fi
+ % \ProvidesFile{merlin.mbs}[2005/10/17 4.14 (PWD, AO, DPC)]
+%\iffalse
+%</!tail>
+%<*a&!a>
+% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
+% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
+\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
+  \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
+%</a&!a>
+%<*driver>
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
+   \documentclass[a4paper,10pt,twoside]{article}%
+   \usepackage{doc}%
+   \raggedbottom
+   \CodelineNumbered
+   \RecordChanges
+ %  Comment out next line to print coding
+   \OnlyDescription
+   \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.5\paperwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5\textwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+   \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
+
+\begin{document}
+   \DocInput{merlin.mbs}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%                   END OF META COMMENT   \fi
+% \CharacterTable
+%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \CheckSum{450}
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm}
+%
+% \changes{1.0}{1993 Aug 16}{Initial version}
+% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add multilingual capabilities}
+% \changes{2.1--2.5}{1995 May 2}{Changes to \texttt{babel.mbs} parallel 1.3--1.7
+%    in \texttt{genbst.mbs}}
+% \changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Change documentation to \LaTeXe}
+% \changes{1.3(2.1)a}{1994 Sep 1}{Alter wording of article title capitalization
+%          choice}
+% \changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 5}{Add full author name possibilities}
+% \changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 5}{Fix up some punctuations}
+% \changes{1.4(2.2)a}{1994 Sep 7}{Add possibility to put titles in quotes}
+% \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 15}{Accommodate new \texttt{harvard.sty}}
+% \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 15}{Add full names for \texttt{natbib} v5.3}
+% \changes{1.5(2.3)a}{1994 Oct 11}{Add option so year can contain any text}
+% \changes{1.5(2.3)b}{1995 Jan 18}{Allow edited by to be in parentheses}
+% \changes{1.5(2.3)b}{1995 Jan 18}{Allow (year) to have no punctuation
+%     following}
+% \changes{1.5(2.3)c}{1995 Jan 20}{Journal volume numbers with more choice}
+% \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Date with no punctuation preceding it}
+% \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Editor names can be reversed like authors'}
+% \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Can abbreviate `edited by' to `ed(s).'}
+% \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Released version}
+% \changes{1.7(2.5)}{1995 Feb 9}{Add \texttt{seq-key} option}
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 15}{Becomes \texttt{merlin.mbs}, with language
+%      support in additional files}
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 27}{Allow full author names to be reversed}
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 1}{Add \texttt{isbn} field option}
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 3}{Citation names can be bold or small caps}
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 8}{Colon and space may follow year}
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 15}{Names can be reversed, dotless intials}
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 17}{Volume, number can be followed by semi-colon}
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 20}{Allow word editor or ed to be in parentheses}
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 20}{Abbreviated journal names can have dots removed}
+% \changes{3.1}{1995 May 4}{Fix `edited by' so it is not abbreviated
+%         automatically with `editor'}
+% \changes{3.1}{1995 May 6}{Re-do head/tail options to allow easy update of
+%         older \texttt{.dbj} files}
+% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Minimum number of authors can be up to 6, not  5}
+% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Allow date as part of journal spec., for medical
+%         journals}
+% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Suppress `pages' and `pp'}
+% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Allow date to be `1994 Jul', with or without dot}
+% \changes{3.2}{1995 Jun 7}{Authors as Jones C.T.}
+% \changes{3.2}{1995 Jun 16}{Sort without \emph{von} part}
+% \changes{3.2}{1995 Jul 31}{Release as version 3.2}
+% \changes{3.3}{1995 Aug 7}{Extra labels put in braces so they are treated
+%     as one unit by natbib}
+% \changes{3.3}{1995 Aug 7}{Publisher's address can precede name}
+% \changes{3.3}{1995 Sep 4}{Add full authors only if different from short list}
+% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 5}{Add number of references as argument to
+%      \texttt{thebibliography} environment}
+% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Fix placement of \texttt{bolden} in
+%      \texttt{format.vol.num.pages}}
+% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add possibility of date between volume and pages}
+% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Word `and' can be in normal font in citations}
+% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 4}{Tech Reports to have titles like books}
+% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 9}{Delimit \texttt{\char`\\harvardyearright} properly}
+% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 9}{Add option to sort by year (numerical only)}
+% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 12}{Allow multiple journal-name files}
+% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 16}{Allow months in dates even for author-year}
+% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 24}{Fix sorting bug for limited number of authors}
+% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 30}{Add \texttt{named} format for author--year cites}
+% \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 2}{Blocks can be separated by semi-colons}
+% \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 23}{Journal names in normal font}
+% \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 23}{Volume subnumber added to pages}
+% \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 24}{Book pages in parentheses}
+% \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 7}{Put Jr at end for AGU author style}
+% \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 7}{Put `and' in same font in list and citation}
+% \changes{3.6}{1996 Jan 30}{Allow `et al' to be in normal font}
+% \changes{3.6a}{1996 Feb 1}{Fix bugs with \texttt{xand} option}
+% \changes{3.7}{1996 Feb 2}{Fix small caps with NFSS}
+% \changes{3.7}{1996 Feb 5}{Fix clash of \texttt{emphasize} and
+%      \texttt{purify\$}}
+% \changes{3.8}{1996 Feb 29}{Add \texttt{alpha}-type style}
+% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 1}{Style alpha is never unsorted}
+% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 12}{Allow blanks between blocks}
+% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 12}{Publisher in parentheses}
+% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 15}{Allow author-year to be sorted by year}
+% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 16}{Cited `and' resets only one attribute}
+% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 19}{Allow date to be between volume and number}
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 17}{Add \texttt{\char`\\natexlab} for \texttt{natbib} 6.3}
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Fix coding for adding `page' to journals}
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Add `volume' to journals}
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Remove word `in'}
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Place publisher before chapter/pages}
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 25}{Allow period after date}
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 26}{Commas between blocks, except for article titles
+%         where period comes}
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 12}{Allow comma before date}
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 13}{Reorganize incollection organization and
+%             publisher}
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 13}{Allow edition to come before publisher}
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 16}{Allow author--year to be in citation order}
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 16}{Publisher, address, date can all be in
+%            parentheses}
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 18}{Remove extraneous hyphen before
+%           \texttt{\char`\\getans}}
+% \changes{3.82}{1996 Nov 15}{Allow pages at end before notes}
+% \changes{3.82}{1996 Nov 15}{Fix bug with quoted titles when title missing}
+% \changes{3.82}{1996 Dec 16}{Fix bug that put comma before publisher in
+%           parentheses}
+% \changes{3.82}{1996 Dec 16}{Allow AGU author style with full names}
+% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 5}{Allow dash for repeated authors, periods
+%   before notes}
+% \changes{3.83}{1997 Apr 25}{Change case of first note word if mid-sentence}
+% \changes{3.84}{1997 Sep 16}{Option to break long page numbers}
+% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 20}{Option for titles in guillemets}
+% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 20}{Option to use underlining for emphasis}
+% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Reorganize options for year in journal spec}
+% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Multiple options in menu}
+% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 10}{Fonts for names: can exclude first names,
+% use-defined font allowed, improved coding for `and' and `et~al.'}
+% \changes{3.86}{1998 Feb 25}{Use \texttt{format.date} consistently in place
+%   of \texttt{year} alone}
+% \changes{3.86}{1998 Feb 25}{Suppress ISBN number when certain crossrefs
+%    are present}
+% \changes{3.86}{1998 Feb 25}{Add option for comma between year and pages}
+% \changes{3.86}{1998 Apr 20}{Bug with minimum 6 authors corrected}
+% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Add \texttt{url} field for all styles}
+% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Suppress months in numerical mode}
+% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Author limitation now 99}
+% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Add \texttt{annote} field and annotation}
+% \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{issn} field}
+% \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Correct spelling of `guillimet'}
+% \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Make \textsl{et~al.} a variable \texttt{bbl.etal}}
+% \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{language} field}
+% \changes{3.87h}{1998 Oct 16}{Add html output possibilities}
+% \changes{3.88}{1998 Nov 27}{Option to suppress edition conversion in English}
+% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Conf. booktitles are upright if book titles are}
+% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Various extra options for book pages,
+%         inproceedings, mainly for MPG Jahrbuch}
+% \changes{3.88}{1998 Jan 13}{For html, newblock just adds period, no new line}
+% \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 1}{Do edition suppression properly}
+% \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 26}{Fix font handling of names}
+% \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 26}{Test for multipages for word `page(s)' in journals}
+% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 12}{Missing years may be left blank, not just ????}
+% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 12}{When key replaces author, leave year blank}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 Jul 20}{AO: %Arthur Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com)
+%      Add new entries: collaboration, eid, eprint, numpages, per option
+%      \texttt{revdata}}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 Jul 20}{AO: Add reference component tags (\texttt{bibinfo}
+%      and friends)}
+% \changes{4.00}{1999 Sept 17}{PWD: incorporate AO's changes with moderations}
+% \changes{4.00}{2000 Jan 21}{PWD: add \texttt{archive} field}
+% \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{PWD: Fix improper \texttt{change.case\$} and
+%     \texttt{bibinfo.check} ordering}
+% \changes{4.02}{2000 June 27}{Fix bug with `in' with articles}
+% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{PWD: add \texttt{seq-yrr} for reversed year ordering}
+% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{PWD: add \texttt{thtit-x} to suppress thesis titles}
+% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{PWD: add line to define \texttt{natexlab} in aux file for harvard}
+% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{PWD: bug fix when both \texttt{pp-last} and \texttt{dt-jnl} given}
+% \changes{4.04}{2002 Sep 13}{PWD: add support for Slovene/Slovenian language}
+% \changes{4.05}{2002 Oct 21}{PWD: bug fix in \texttt{inproceedings} with
+%         \texttt{pp-last} and \texttt{dt-beg}}
+% \changes{4.06}{2003 Apr 2}{PWD: add \texttt{nmd-2} and \texttt{nmd-3} for use with \texttt{nmdash}}
+% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{PWD: add DOI}
+% \changes{4.10}{2003 June 3}{PWD: use \texttt{\backslash providecommand}
+%    instead of \TeX\ commands, but provide \texttt{noprov} option to undo it.}
+% \changes{4.10}{2003 June 3}{PWD: make \texttt{eid} available not just for Rev\TeX}
+% \changes{4.10}{2003 June 11}{PWD: add \texttt{pg-pre} for total book pages location}
+% \changes{4.11}{2003 June 23}{PWD: fix DOI to have no space after colon}
+% \changes{4.11}{2003 June 23}{PWD: add options \texttt{ser-vol} and \texttt{ser-ed}}
+% \changes{4.11a}{2003 Aug 19}{PWD: fix bug with \texttt{ser-ed} option}
+% \changes{4.12}{2003 Sep 8}{PWD: rename \texttt{noprov} to \texttt{plntx} for Plain \TeX\ compatibility}
+% \changes{4.12a}{2003 Nov 6}{PWD: fix bug in which comma separators go on wrong side; change was
+%                             originally made in \texttt{makebst} but not in \texttt{merlin}}
+% \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{PWD: fix some bugs in \texttt{inbook} and \texttt{incollection}}
+% \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{PWD: add option \texttt{nm-rvcx}}
+% \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{PWD: add option \texttt{tit-col} for colon after titles}
+% \changes{4.14}{2005 Oct 17}{PWD: add option \texttt{nm-rvvc}, spaceless initials with comma}
+% \changes{4.14}{2005 Oct 17}{PWD: add option \texttt{etal-xc} to suppress comma before et al.}
+%
+% \pagestyle{myheadings}
+% \markboth{P. W. Daly}{A General Master Bibliography Style}
+%
+% \title{{\bfseries A Master Bibliographic Style File}\\
+%      for numerical, author--year, multilingual applications}
+%
+% \author{Patrick W. Daly}
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{merlin.mbs}
+% \date{This paper describes file \texttt{\filename},\\
+%  version \fileversion{} from \filedate
+%   \thanks{Work on \texttt{custom-bib}~4.00 was supported by the
+%          American Physical Society}}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \parskip=1ex \parindent=0pt
+%
+% \newcommand{\btx}{{\sc Bib}\TeX}
+% \newcommand{\dtx}{\textsf{docstrip}}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+% A problem facing users of \btx{} is that there is no standard for
+% formatting lists of references. Publishers and journals insist
+% on completely arbitrary placement of commas, colons, and ordering of
+% entries. Furthermore, author--year styles of citations are supported by
+% certain special \LaTeX{} packages, but each for only a very limited
+% number of bibliographic styles. Finally, most such style files are for
+% English only, and any adaptations to other languages must duplicate the
+% entire spectrum of such files.
+%
+% All of these obstacles are in principle easily overcome by simply
+% reprogramming \btx{} by means of an appropriate \emph{bibliographic style
+% file} (extension \texttt{.bst}). \btx{} is in fact extremely flexible;
+% unfortunately its programming language is very low-level, permitting only
+% the most basic of hacks for the normal user.
+%
+% The solution to this is a \emph{generic} or \emph{master bibliographic
+% style file} (extension \texttt{.mbs}) containing \dtx{} options for
+% alternative coding. By selecting the desired options, one can customize a
+% \texttt{.bst} file to one's needs.
+%
+% This file, \texttt{\filename}, is my latest version of a general-purpose
+% \texttt{.mbs} file to meet as many bibliographic needs as possible.
+% It was originally assembled from Oren Patashnik's standard files {\tt
+% plain.bst} and \texttt{unsrt.bst}, plus his non-standard file {\tt
+% apalike.bst}, a very basic author--year citation style.
+% It has since evolved extensively as I have added features found in
+% available \texttt{.bst} files, and those demanded by publishers or
+% suggested to me by many user/contributors.
+%
+% To produce a customized bibliographic style (\texttt{.bst}) file from this
+% master file, simply \TeX{} or \LaTeX{} the `program' \texttt{makebst.tex}.
+% When asked for the name of the master file, answer with
+% \begin{quote}\tt\filename\end{quote}
+% and then reply to the questions in the following menus. The last question
+% is whether you want to generate the \texttt{.bst} file right away.
+%
+% More details on this process and on the options available are to be found
+% in the rest of this article.
+%
+% \section{History of this File}
+%
+% Since the first release of this generic file, in November 1993, under the
+% name \texttt{genbst.mbs}, I have received innumerable
+% suggestions for additions, most of which I have tried to include. Often
+% this has resulted in reorganizing the coding, and adding new functions.
+% The resulting \texttt{.bst} files are now quite different from those of
+% Patashnik, although the underlying ideas are the same.
+%
+% A second version was released shortly afterwards that paralleled the first
+% one except that it included support for languages other than English.
+% That file was named \texttt{babel.mbs}, following the \texttt{babel}
+% system of Johannes Braams. Although I always viewed it as version 2 of
+% \texttt{genbst.mbs}, all additions to the one were also included in the
+% other. This of course was tedious and prone to error. I looked forward to
+% the day when \texttt{babel.mbs} would become the only supported version.
+% The reason I was reluctant to do that before was that the overhead per
+% language was fairly high, and I dreaded to think how large the file would
+% become when 20 or 30 languages were added.
+%
+% I then found a way to put the language definitions into separate files,
+% one per language. This means that new languages do not burden the basic
+% file, and that users need only keep those support files that might
+% interest him or her. New ones may also be made up locally by hacking an
+% existing language definition file. (The file \texttt{english.mbs} is
+% supplied only for this purpose.)
+%
+% For this reason, \texttt{\filename} was released as version~3 of
+% \texttt{genbst.mbs} and \texttt{babel.mbs}. In spite of the new name, it
+% should be regarded as their direct successor. Needless to say, this means
+% that the earlier two \texttt{.mbs} files will no longer be maintained.
+%
+% To include language support, all explicit English words like
+% \textsl{editor} and \textsl{chapter} have been replaced by functions
+% whose definitions may be altered in the resulting \texttt{.bst} file
+% (less desirable method) or which may be redefined by an external
+% language definition file (preferred method).  Alternatively, one can select
+% the pseudo-language named \texttt{babel} which inserts \LaTeX{} commands
+% for the explicit words, the definitions of which must be
+% contained in a file called {\tt babelbst.tex}. Only the languages English
+% and \texttt{babel} are included internally to \texttt{\filename}; all
+% others are contained in external language definition files.
+%
+% Another new feature is the possibility of including a file containing
+% prestored shorthand designations for certain journal names. Such a file
+% is provided for physics journals, but others could be made up using this
+% one as a model. See Section~\ref{sec:jnames}.
+%
+% To take advantage of these external files, one must use
+% \texttt{makebst} version~3; \texttt{\filename} may still be used with
+% earlier versions, but without the external files.
+%
+% Version~4 arose out of a project by David Carlisle who created a variant
+% of \texttt{\filename} for REV\TeX\ and the American Physical Society with
+% the help of Mark Doyle of the APS. The main purpose was to add extra
+% fields (see page~\pageref{sec:revtex}) that were needed. Subsequently
+% Arthur Ogawa revised the code considerably, making it more rational,
+% fixing some bugs and adding some extra features.
+%
+% I was then asked to incorporate all these changes into the official
+% version of \texttt{\filename}. This required much debugging, since the
+% Ogawa's rationalization upset several of the delicate interplays between
+% various options. The result is version~4.0, the work on which has been
+% supported by the American Physical Society.
+%
+% Version~4.0 contains the REV\TeX\ extra fields and the
+% Carlisle-Doyle-Ogawa rewrites. An additional feature that derived from
+% Carlisle's work on REV\TeX\ is the tagging of the text entries in the
+% bibliography. This means the volume number is given as
+% |\bibinfo{volume}{5}|. Normally only the number 5 is printed, but another
+% program could use this to reconstruct the original database entries.
+%
+% Arthur Ogawa also added some features to \texttt{makebst} to provide a more
+% verbose protocol. As a result, version~4 of \texttt{\filename} can only be
+% used with version~4 of \texttt{makebst}. Older versions of \texttt{\filename}
+% will still function with the newer \texttt{makebst}. Also, \texttt{.dbj}
+% files created with older versions should still produce the same results with
+% \texttt{\filename}~4.
+%
+% \def\temp{merlin.mbs}\ifx\temp\filename
+% This file is now named after the legendary magician in the hope that it
+% can produce wonders by incanting the right magic formulas. However, one
+% should bear in mind that even Merlin was not omnipotent. It would be too
+% much to hope that all bibliographic wishes will be fulfilled quickly and
+% easily, but we shall try as best we can. Watch the wizardry at work!
+% \fi
+%
+% \section{About Master Bibliographic Style Files}
+%
+% For details about how master bibliography style files are to be
+% constructed, see the documentation on \texttt{makebst}. Here only a
+% rough overview is given.
+%
+% \subsection{The \dtx{} Program}
+% The \dtx{} program, written by Frank Mittelbach, is now a fundamental
+% part of the \LaTeXe{} installation. Its original purpose is to remove
+% comment lines from documented files, but has the secondary function of
+% selecting alternative lines of coding.
+%
+% A master \btx{} bibliographic style file is one that, when processed by
+% \dtx{} with selected options, produces a regular \btx{} \texttt{.bst}
+% file with the desired features.
+%
+% In this sense, \dtx{} functions something like a C preprocessor. In fact,
+% Oren Patashnik's original \texttt{.bst} files were all produced from a single
+% source file by means of the preprocessor. The advantage of \dtx{} is that
+% it is portable to all installations with \TeX.
+%
+% \subsection{The \dtx{} Batch Job}
+%
+% The \dtx{} program can be run either interactively, where the user must
+% answer questions via the keyboard, or by means of a batch job where all
+% the inputs are prepared in a file beforehand. For producing a \btx{}
+% style file from a master file, the batch job method is the only feasible
+% one, simply because of the large number of options available. (There is
+% another reason for employing a batch job: the interactive method adds an
+% |\endinput| command at the end, something that \btx{} will protest
+% about.)
+%
+% The batch job files in general do not have any particular extension but I
+% use \texttt{.dbj} for \emph{\dtx{} batch job}. These files are useful
+% because they document the options used to produce the \texttt{.bst} file,
+% and they may be edited to experiment with alternative options.
+%
+% \subsection{The \texttt{makebst} Program}
+%
+% It is possible to make up a batch job file by hand using the option
+% information listed in Section~\ref{sec:options}, but my accompanying
+% program \texttt{makebst} simplifies the task considerably. It reads menu
+% information in the master file itself in order to present the user with
+% an interactive list of choices, translating the answers into appropriate
+% options that are then written to a batch job file.
+%
+% To run it, simply process \texttt{makebst.tex} with \TeX\ or \LaTeX, and
+% answer the questions. The first of these is whether you want some
+% instructions or not, and the second is the name of the \texttt{.mbs} that
+% you want to use. The next query is about the name of the desired
+% \texttt{.bst} file (which will also be the root name of the batch job).
+% After that, all further questions come from menu information in the
+% master file.
+%
+% At the very end, \texttt{makebst} asks if it should run the batch job for
+% you. Isn't that a fine service?
+%
+% \section{Multilingual Adaptation}
+% The original \texttt{.bst} files from Oren Patashnik contain explicit
+% English words that are output into the final text. Since \LaTeX{} is
+% increasingly being used for other languages, and since the official
+% version since December 1991 also uses macros in place of explicit words,
+% it seems appropriate for \btx{} to follow suit.
+%
+% In this master bibliographic style file {\tt\filename}, all explicit
+% words have been replaced by functions: e.g., the word \textsl{editor} has
+% become the function \texttt{bbl.editor}. Depending on the language option
+% chosen, this function is defined to be the text {\tt"editor"},
+% {\tt"Redakteur"}, or {\tt"redacteur"}, for English, German, and French,
+% respectively.
+%
+% There is another special `language' called \texttt{babel} that instead inserts
+% the text |"\bbleditor{}"|; the definitions of these \LaTeX{} commands
+% must be in a separate file named \texttt{babelbst.tex} that is read in at
+% the start of the bibliography.
+%
+% Only English and \texttt{babel} are supported directly in
+% \texttt{\filename}; all other language definitions are contained in
+% separate definition files, e.g., \texttt{french.mbs}, \texttt{german.mbs}.
+%
+% The language selection is made during the \texttt{makebst} run, which
+% asks for the name of the language definition file as the first menu item. If
+% either English or \texttt{babel} is wanted, reply with the default, which
+% is \texttt{\filename} itself; otherwise give the name of the desired
+% language file.
+%
+% \begin{quote}\slshape
+%   \textbf{Note:} the language definition files can only be used with
+%   \texttt{makebst} version~3 or later, and
+%
+%   with an external definition file, the \dtx{} run requires two passes
+%   through \texttt{\filename}, doubling the processing time.
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% Apart from the language adaptation of the whole bibliography, there is also
+% the possibility of switching languages for individual references, so as to
+% hyphenate the title properly. This is done with the \texttt{language} field
+% and the \verb!\setlanguage! command.
+%
+% \subsection{Adding a New Language Definition File}
+%
+% To create a new language definition file, simply take one of the existing
+% ones, like \texttt{english.mbs}, and replace the explicit English words
+% with their translations. There are, however, a number of points that can
+% complicate this procedure.
+%
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+%   Do not forget to change the documentation in the file, especially
+%   version number, date, author.
+%
+% \item
+%   There are option menus that need to be translated too. It might also be
+%   desirable to add or remove options. In most cases, the options in the
+%   language files involve possible abbreviations, like
+%   \begin{quote}
+%      \verb!\mes{^^JABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES':}!\\
+%      \verb!\optdef{*}{}{`Page(s)'}{(no abbreviation)}!\\
+%      \verb!\optdef{a}{pp}{`Page' abbreviated}{as p. or pp.}!\\
+%      \verb!\getans!
+%   \end{quote}
+%
+%   In this example, the option \texttt{pp} appears later in the definition
+%   \begin{quote}
+%      \verb!FUNCTION {bbl.pages}!\\
+%      \verb+%<!pp>{ "pages" }+\\
+%      \verb!%<pp>{ "pp." }!
+%   \end{quote}
+%   This a \emph{local} option, that only affects the coding in the definition
+%   file. It is possible to add more local options.
+%
+% \item
+%   However, all options, whether activated by the main file or by the
+%   definition file, apply to both. In other words, there really is no such
+%   thing as a local option. In the above example, \texttt{pp} is only
+%   local because it is never used in \texttt{\filename}.
+%
+% \item
+%   Add the name of the language as an option, with
+%   \begin{quote}
+%      \verb!\mes{^^JOptions for ENGLISH}!\\
+%      \verb!\wr{\spsp\spsp english,\pc: English language}!
+%   \end{quote}
+%   (This is how options are added without |\optdef| and |\getans|.) The
+%   main file just might recognize it in order to take some
+%   language-specific action. The least it should do is add a comment at
+%   the start of the \texttt{.bst} file stating for which language it is to
+%   be used.
+%
+% \item
+%   There could be some problems with edition numbers due to language
+%   dependent ways of treating ordinal numbers (1st, 2nd, 3rd in English;
+%   1$^{\mbox{\scriptsize re}}$, 2$^{\mbox{\scriptsize e}}$,
+%   3$^{\mbox{\scriptsize e}}$ in French; 1., 2., 3., in German). Some
+%   accommodation already exists for the oddball language English, and
+%   further hacking may be needed for others.
+%
+% \item
+%   If there should be any need for a double-quote character in
+%   the translations (German needs it for umlauts) then there is trouble
+%   because the \btx{} strings do not allow it. Instead, use the command
+%   |\qq|, as in the German word |F\qq{u}nfte| for {\sl F\"unfte} (fifth).
+%   It is then vital to add the option \texttt{umlaut} with
+%   \begin{quote}
+%      \verb!\wr{\spsp\spsp umlaut,\pc: Activate umlaut command}!
+%   \end{quote}
+%
+% Bernd Raichle points out that |\^^b| can be used in place of |\"|
+% within \btx{} code. One can thus replace |F\qq{u}nfte| with |F\^^b unfte|
+% and do away with the \texttt{umlaut} option.
+%
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \subsection{Changing \texttt{babelbst.tex} for a New Language}
+%
+% Alternatively, a new language can be added by
+% modifying the file \texttt{babelbst.tex} and selecting the language {\tt
+% babel} for the \texttt{.bst} file. If this is the only language to be used,
+% then just change the English words in the definitions.
+%
+% However, some form of switching would be more desirable. With \TeX\
+% version 3, there is a |\language| parameter to control the hyphenation
+% patterns, and this could be used to select the correct language. For
+% example, if language 0 is English and language 1 German, then put the
+% English version of \texttt{babelbst.tex} into \texttt{englbst.tex} and the
+% German
+% version in \texttt{germbst.tex}. Then \texttt{babelbst.tex} could contain:
+% \begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
+% \ifcase\language \input{englbst} \or \input{germbst}
+%   \else \input{englbst} \fi
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% This is of course installation dependent.
+%
+% \subsection{Extracting the Sample \texttt{babelbst.tex} File}
+%
+% A sample \texttt{babelbst.tex} (for English) is contained in this master
+% file.  Extract it with \dtx{} and the option \texttt{bblbst}. It may be
+% edited (and possibly renamed) for other languages as needed.
+%
+% \subsection{Problem with Edition Numbers}
+% Something to note here is the ordinal numbers for editions. \btx{}
+% demands that the field \texttt{edition} be given in the database as a word
+% \textsl{First}, \textsl{Second}, etc., or as \textsl{1st}, \textsl{2nd},
+% etc. This is bad policy
+% because it is language dependent. So what I do is to test for the words
+% \textsl{first} through \textsl{fifth} (case independently) and replace them
+% with language-dependent equivalents. If the {\tt<ord>} option is selected,
+% these equivalents are ordinal numbers for that language. Any other words
+% cannot be interpreted and must be printed as is.
+%
+% However, if the \texttt{edition} is given as a number, with or without
+% following letters, then the numbers 1 through 5 are replaced by their
+% words; any higher numbers just have the ordinal ending (\textsl{th}
+% in English) added to them.
+%
+% These numbers are only used with the word \textsl{edition} or
+% its equivalent in other languages, so the translators need
+% to provide only the one gender, e.g., feminine for both German and
+% French.
+%
+%
+% \section{Prestoring Names of Journals}\label{sec:jnames}
+%
+% The standard \texttt{.bst} files contain the names of some 20 journals
+% in the field of computing, stored as macros for easy reference within the
+% database \texttt{.bib} files. For example, the \textsl{Journal of
+% Computer and System Sciences} can be referred to as \texttt{jcss}.
+% With the option \texttt{jabr} (for journal abbreviation) this same
+% shorthand produces \textsl{J.~Comput. Syst. Sci.}.
+%
+% Some \texttt{.bst} files for physics journals include additional journal
+% names, and it is conceivable that other faculties might wish to prepare
+% their own such lists, with each name present in a full or abbreviated
+% form. Such an external file can now be added with \texttt{\filename} and
+% \texttt{makebst} version~3.
+%
+% As a model, I supply a file \texttt{physjour.mbs} with the names of
+% physics journals which I have taken from other \texttt{.bst} files.
+% I also have a file \texttt{geojour.mbs} with the names of geophysics
+% journals, and a contributed file \texttt{photjour.mbs} containing names of
+% optics journals.
+%
+% In fact, version~3.5 can even include multiple journal-name files.
+% Thus one can decide whether to include both, one, or none of the above
+% files.
+%
+% \section{HTML Output}
+% There is an option \texttt{html} to create a \texttt{.bst} file producing
+% hypertext (HTML) output instead of the regular \LaTeX\ code. This is still
+% experimental. The resulting \btx\ output will still be a file with extension
+% \texttt{.bbl} and will contain the \LaTeX\ special characters, like |\"a| for
+% \"a. One must go over the output to convert such characters to the HTML
+% equivalents, and to remove curly braces. Only then can it be renamed
+% \texttt{.html}.
+%
+% Three possible lists are offered:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item a simple paragraph for each entry,
+% \item a numbered list,
+% \item a description list with the key as the label.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \section{Updating Older \texttt{.dbj} Files}\label{sec:update}
+% If you have existing \texttt{.dbj} files for generating \texttt{.bst}
+% files from the older version \texttt{genbst.mbs}, these may be run with
+% \texttt{\filename} by simply changing the name of the source
+% \texttt{.mbs} file. For example, where the older \texttt{.dbj} file contains
+% the line
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\generateFile{mystyle.bst}{f}{\from{genbst.mbs}{%|
+% \end{quote}
+% edit the file so that \texttt{genbst.mbs} is replaced by
+% \texttt{\filename}. The resulting \texttt{mystyle.bst} file will then be
+% an updated version of the older one, containing all the same features.
+%
+% Version~4 of \texttt{\filename} can only be used with version~4 of
+% \texttt{makebst}, whereas older versions of \texttt{\filename} will still
+% function with the newer \texttt{makebst}. Also, \texttt{.dbj} files created
+% with older versions should still produce the same results with
+% \texttt{\filename}~4, albeit with different coding.
+%
+% \section{Acknowledgements}
+% I wish to thank all the people who have taken the trouble to send me
+% suggestions or special requests. Admittedly, it has been out of
+% self-interest on their part, since they had bibliographic needs to be
+% met. And I have often questioned the need for many of their demands. Yet,
+% that is part of the bibliographic jungle that I am trying to eliminate.
+% If I thought that bibliographies were arbitrarily formatted before I
+% started this project, I have more than sufficient confirmation since
+% then. The fault lies not with the poor contributors, but with the
+% publishers who cannot agree on a decent standard.
+%
+% I want to thank Frank Mittelbach, not only for creating \dtx{}
+% in the first place, but also for sending me his bibliographic requirements,
+% and for suggesting an improvement to \texttt{makebst}.
+%
+% David Carlisle has added the REV\TeX\ fields and |\bibinfo| tagging in a
+% special variant of \texttt{\filename}; Arthur Ogawa then incorporated
+% them into the main file, and overhauled much of the coding to make it
+% more legible and rational.
+%
+% I especially wish to thank Mark Doyle and the American Physical
+% Society for supporting the work on \texttt{custom-bib}~4.0.
+%
+% And finally, all of us must thank Oren Patashnik for providing \btx;
+% without its flexibility and programmability (in spite of the complexity
+% of the language) the master bibliographic styles would not be possible at
+% all.
+%
+% \section{The Options}\label{sec:options}
+% Here I present a list of all the \dtx{} options that are
+% available in this file {\tt\filename}.
+% The normal user can skip this section since he will probably make use
+% of the menus via \texttt{makebst}. These are described in
+% Section~\ref{sec:menu}. The menus provide much more informative prompts
+% than the heavily abbreviated option names listed here. In other words,
+% the options described in this section are meant for internal (programmer)
+% usage, while the normal interface for the user is the menus.
+%
+% I have tried to avoid
+% conflicts with mutually exclusive options by always letting one dominate if
+% more than one has been specified. Such options have the same prefix, such
+% as \texttt{nm-rev} and \texttt{nm-init}.
+% If one uses \texttt{makebst} to produce the
+% \dtx{} batch job, then it is impossible to give mutually
+% exclusive options unless one edits the batch file oneself afterwards.
+% (Anything is possible with computer freaks!)
+%
+% Most mutually exclusive options have the same prefix before the hyphen.
+%
+% \newenvironment{opt}{%
+% \begin{list}{}{\labelwidth2cm \leftmargin2.5cm \labelsep1em \rightmargin0pt
+%  \def\makelabel##1{\ttfamily##1 \hfill}}}{\end{list}}
+% \textbf{Citation style:} whether or not a numerical or author--year system
+% is to be used.
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--] default is numerical, standard \LaTeX, as for {\tt
+%           plain.bst}.\\
+%           |\bibitem{key}...|
+% \item[cite] special for listing entire databases; the cite key is used
+%             as the label so it may be listed.\\
+%             |\bibitem[key]{key}...|
+% \item[ay] for author--year style of citations. Various forms of |\bibitem|
+%           are provided under this option, to support different types
+%           of \LaTeX{} styles for interfacing with the author--year system.
+% \item[alph] for \texttt{alpha.bst} style of citations; essentially numerical
+%           but an abbreviation of the author names plus year is used as
+%           the label. First three letters of single author, or first letters
+%           of first three authors.
+% \item[alf-1] with \texttt{alph}, uses first three letters of first author's
+%           name, regardless of how many authors.
+% \item[alf-f] with \texttt{alph}, uses first author's whole name.
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% For numerical style, one can select the HTML option, to output a
+% hypertext file instead of a \LaTeX\ one.
+%
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--] normal \LaTeX\ output;
+% \item[html] for HTML output, one reference per paragraph
+% \item[htlist] (with \texttt{html}) outputs to a numbered list;
+% \item[htdes] (with \texttt{html}) outputs description list, with the key.
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% If \texttt{ay} has been selected, then the type of author--year interface
+% is selectable. Some of these, like \texttt{natbib} and \texttt{harvard}
+% exist in two versions because of updates in these systems.
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--] default is the system I invented for my \texttt{natbib.sty}.\\
+%            |\bibitem[author(year)]{key}...|
+% \item[nat] for extended format of \texttt{natbib.sty} version 5.3\\
+%            |\bibitem[author(year)full author]{key}...|
+% \item[alk] for the \texttt{apalike.sty} of Oren Patashnik and related
+%            systems\\
+%            |\bibitem[author, year]{key}...|
+% \item[har] for the Harvard family of styles (with \texttt{harvard.sty}).\\
+%            |\harvarditem[short]{long}{year}{key}...|
+% \item[harnm] for the extended Harvard family, containing some extra commands
+%            used by \LaTeXe\ version 2.0.3 of \texttt{harvard.sty}
+% \item[ast] for astronomy family of styles (with \texttt{astron.sty}).\\
+%            |\bibitem[\protect\astroncite{author}{year}]{key}...|
+% \item[cay] for the Chicago family of styles (with \texttt{chicago.sty}).\\
+%            |\bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{long}{short}{year}]{key}...|
+% \item[nmd] for the `named' variant of Chicago (with \texttt{named.sty}).\\
+%            |\bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{author}{year}]{key}...|
+% \item[cn] for the ``author--date'' group of styles (with {\tt
+%            authordate1-4.sty})\\
+%            |\bibitem[\protect\citename{author, }year]{key}...|
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{Sequence:} the order in which the references are listed.
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]      default is alphabetical by all authors, date, title
+% \item[seq-yr]  order by year (ascending), authors, title
+% \item[seq-yrr]  order by year (descending), authors, title
+% \item[seq-no]  sequence by citation order
+% \item[seq-lab] (author--year) by label, date, title (means that Daly
+%                precedes Daly and Williams, precedes Daly et al.)
+% \item[seq-key] (author--year) like \texttt{seq-lab} except that for
+%                identical authors and year, the cite keyword is used
+%                instead of the title
+% \item[vonx]    ignore \emph{von} part of name when ordering (default is
+%                to consider \emph{von} as part of the whole surname)
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{Language selection:} the translations of certain explicit words.
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]      default is English, for \textsl{and}, \textsl{chapter},
+%                  \textsl{editor}, etc.;
+% \item[babel]     replace words with \LaTeX{} commands that are defined
+%                  in the file \texttt{babelbst.tex};
+% \item[lang]     adds the \texttt{language} field for switching language
+%                 for one reference only by means of the \verb!\setlanguage!
+%                 command in \texttt{babel}.
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% If one of the external language definition files is used, then the name of
+% its language should be in the list of active options. Many other language
+% names are already included as options in this main file simply for the
+% purpose of adding a comment at the start of the \texttt{.bst} file.
+%
+% The \texttt{language} field is intended to allow the hyphenation patterns
+% to be switched temporarily so that titles can be set in the original
+% language.
+%
+% \textbf{Annotation:}
+% annotations are added either by means of the \texttt{annote} field, or
+% with a \texttt{.tex} file of the same name as the citation key.
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]   no annotations
+% \item[annote] annotations enabled, with \texttt{annote} field.
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{Missing names:}
+% If the author and/or editor is missing, the standard \texttt{.bst} files
+% use the \texttt{key} field in place of the names for purposes of ordering the
+% entries.
+%
+% For author--year styles, the \texttt{key} field is even inserted in the
+% reference list and in the label in place of the authors. Optionally, one can
+% suppress the year in this case, which causes \texttt{natbib} (version~7)
+% to print only that key text as a code designation for the work.
+%
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--] year is inserted in the labels when \texttt{key} replaces authors
+% \item[keyxyr] year is left blank in this case
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{Names formatting:} how initials and surnames are to be combined.
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]       default is full names, given names first
+% \item[nm-revf]  full names, surname first
+% \item[nm-init]  initials plus surname
+% \item[nm-rev]   surname plus initials
+% \item[nm-rev1]  surname plus initials (1st name only) then initials
+%                 plus surname
+% \item[nm-revv1] same as \texttt{nm-rev1} but with full names
+% \item[nm-rv]    as \texttt{nm-rev}, but initials without dots
+% \item[nm-rvvc]  as \texttt{nm-rev}, but initials without spaces
+% \item[nm-rvv]   as \texttt{nm-rev}, but initials without spaces or comma
+% \item[nm-rvx]   as \texttt{nm-rev}, but initials without dots or spaces
+% \item[nm-rvcx]  as \texttt{nm-rvx}, but with comma after surname
+% \item[ed-rev]   editors' names in collections are reversed the same as authors'
+% \item[ed-au]    editors are formatted with same routine as authors; this
+%                 is an alias for \texttt{ed-rev}, which is kept only for
+%                 compatibility
+% \item[aunm-semi] a semi-colon is placed between author names instead of
+%                  a comma
+% \item[aunm-sl]  a slash is placed between author names instead of a comma
+% \item[nmdash]   repeated author/editor names replaced by dash
+% \item[nmd-2]    with \texttt{nmdash}, uses 2 em dashes
+% \item[nmd-3]    with \texttt{nmdash}, uses 3 em dashes
+% \item[jnrlab]   include the junior part of name in citations (normally
+%                 appears only in reference listing)
+% \item[jnrlst]   with one of the \texttt{nm-rev} type options, puts the
+%                 junior part last, after the (reversed) first name
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{Number of names:} normally all names listed (in reference list)
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[nmlm]     limit number of names
+% \item[x1...x90]  (with \texttt{nmlm}) maximum number of names to appear;
+%                  for over 9, give the tens and units separately, as
+%                  \texttt{x20,x5} for 25
+% \item[m1...m90]  (with \texttt{nmlm}) minimum number before \textsl{et al.}
+%                   written;
+%                 no check for consistency is taken; one \texttt{x} and
+%                 one \texttt{m} number must be given, and {\tt x}$\le${\tt m}
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{Names font:} in the reference list
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]       default is names in normal typeface
+% \item[nmft]     names are in some special font
+% \item[nmfted]   editors' names in collections also get special fonts
+% \item[nmft-sc]  names in small caps
+% \item[nmft-it]  names in italics
+% \item[nmft-bf]  names in bold
+% \item[nmft-def]  names in user defined font |\bibnamefont{}|.
+% \item[nmand-rm] `and' in normal font, not same as authors'.
+% \item[fnm-rm]   (with \texttt{nmft}) first names are in regular font
+% \item[fnm-def]  (with \texttt{nmft}) first names are in user defined
+%                 font |\bibfnamefont{}|.
+% \item[--]       first names are in same font as the surnames.
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{Citation font:} what is written by the |\cite| command
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]       default is no special font
+% \item[lab-it]   cited names in italics
+% \item[lab-sc]   cited names in small caps
+% \item[lab-bf]   cited names in bold face
+% \item[lab-def]  cited names in user defined font |\bibnamefont{}|.
+% \item[and-rm]   word `and' in cited names in normal font
+% \item[xlab-it]  extra label (letter after year) in italics
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{Block punctuation:} between logical sections (not mutually
+% exclusive)
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]       default is period after each logical section, including end
+% \item[blk-com]  use commas, except at very end (changes \textsl{In} to
+%                     \textsl{in})
+% \item[blk-tit]  like \texttt{blk-com} except period follows titles of
+%                      articles and books
+% \item[blk-tita] like \texttt{blk-com} except period follows article title
+% \item[tit-col] with \texttt{blk-tit} or \texttt{blk-tita}, for colon instead of period
+% \item[com-semi] with \texttt{blk-com}, uses semi-colon instead of comma
+% \item[com-blank] with \texttt{blk-com}, uses blanks instead of comma
+% \item[in-col]   puts a colon after \textsl{In} or \textsl{in} for edited works
+% \item[in-it]    puts word \textsl{in} in italics (may be used with
+%                   \texttt{in-col})
+% \item[in-x]     suppresses the word \textsl{in} for edited works
+% \item[fin-bare] no punctuation at the very end
+% \item[au-col] puts a colon after the author/editor block
+% \item[blknt]  puts period before note
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{Date:} if missing
+%
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--] Missing date replaced by ???? (author--year)
+% \item[blkyear] Missing date left blank, even in label.
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{Date:} position and enclosure
+%
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]       default is date at end, before notes; for author--year,
+%                   date consists only of year, no month
+% \item[dt-jnl]   date at end as for default, except for journal articles
+%                   where it follows the journal name as part of specification
+% \item[dt-end]   date goes after any notes
+% \item[dt-beg]   date goes after authors' names
+% \item[yr-par]   date in parentheses ()
+% \item[yr-brk]   date in brackets []
+% \item[yr-com]   date preceded by comma and space
+% \item[yr-col]   date preceded by colon and space
+% \item[yr-per]   date preceded by period and space
+% \item[yr-blk]   date preceded by space
+% \item[dtrev]    date as year month instead of month year
+% \item[dtbf]     date bold face
+% \item[aymth]    include month even for author-year
+% \item[xmth]     suppress month for numerical mode
+% \item[yrp-x]    suppresses punctuation following month, year when date
+%                 is just after authors
+% \item[yrp-col]  adds colon and space after date when just after authors
+% \item[yrp-semi] adds semi-colon and space after date when just after authors
+% \item[yrp-per]  adds period and space after date
+% \item[yrpp-xsp] removes blank following year punctuation
+% \item[note-yr]  permits text (like ``in press'') in the \texttt{year} field
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{Article in journal:} style of title, volume, pages
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]       default is: Title. \textit{Journal}, vol(num):p1--p2
+% \item[injnl]    adds word \textsl{in} before journal name, same style as
+%                 for incollections
+% \item[volp-sp]  as above, but with a space, vol(num):~p1--p2
+% \item[volp-semi] semi-colon instead of colon:   vol(num);~p1--p2
+% \item[volp-com] comma and space instead of colon:   vol(num),~p1--p2
+% \item[volp-blk] only space instead of colon:   vol(num)~p1--p2
+% \item[vol-bf]   volume in bold
+% \item[vol-it]   volume in italics
+% \item[vol-2bf]  volume and number bold
+% \item[vnum-x]   no number for journals, only volume
+% \item[vnum-sp]  space between, as vol (num)
+% \item[vnum-cm]  replace vol(num) with vol, num
+% \item[vnum-nr]  replace vol(num) with vol, no. num
+% \item[vnum-h]   replace vol(num) with vol, \#num
+% \item[vnum-b]   replace vol(num) with vol num
+% \item[jdt-v]    year in parentheses attached to volume: vol(year) num
+% \item[jdt-vs]   as above, with space: vol (year) num
+% \item[jdt-p]    year precedes pages: vol(num), (year) p1--p2
+% \item[jdt-pc]   as above, with comma: vol(num), (year), p1--p2
+% \item[jpg-1]    only starting page given
+% \item[pgsep-c]  page numbers over 10,000 have comma
+% \item[pgsep-s]  page numbers over 10\,000 have space
+% \item[pgsep-p]  page numbers over 10.000 have period
+% \item[jwdpg]    include `page' or `pp' for articles
+% \item[jwdvol]   include `volume' or `vol' for articles
+% \item[jnm-x]    no punctuation after journal name
+% \item[tit-it]   article title in italics
+% \item[tit-qq]   article title in quotes
+% \item[bt-rm]    booktitle in upright font, not italic (this will be issued
+%                 with \texttt{btit-rm} normally; separate options allow for
+%                 more control if wanted
+% \item[bt-qq]    booktitle of incollection and inproceedings in quotes
+% \item[qt-s]     (with \texttt{tit-qq}) single instead of double quotes
+% \item[qt-g]     (with \texttt{tit-qq}) guillemets instead of quotes
+% \item[qx]       (with \texttt{tit-qq}) comma outside quotes
+% \item[jtit-x]   no article title (applies only to journals and
+%                 collections)
+% \item[atit-u]   article title capitalized as in entry, default is
+%                 sentence capitalization (first word and words following
+%                 colons)
+% \item[jxper]    abbreviated journal names have periods removed, as
+%                 `Phys Rev'
+% \item[jttl-rm]  name of journal not in italics
+% \item[pp-last]  pages appear at end, before any notes
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{Number and series:} for collections and inproceedings
+%
+% This is a confusing issue. The standard wants to print something like
+% ``number 123 in Collected Works'', and issues a warning if there is a number
+% without a series. However, for many such works, there is an identification
+% number for the collection, such as ESA~SP-123. Giving this as the number
+% without a series results in ``number ESA~SP-123'' and a warning. Setting the
+% series to this code number produces desired results, but is illogical.
+%
+% Another problem is that this code number should often should appear just
+% before the publisher name,
+% whereas the standard places it elsewhere.
+%
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]  default, number must have series, \textsl{number} is printed
+% \item[num-xser] default behaviour if both number and series present, but if
+%      only number is there, it is printed without the word \textsl{number} and
+%      without a warning
+% \item[numser]  moves the number/series to just before the publisher/organization
+% \item[ser-vol] for a book in a series with volume number, appears as ``\textit{Series-Name}, vol.~23''
+%       rather than ``vol.~23 of \textit{Series-Name}''
+% \item[ser-ed] for incollection, inproceedings, the series and volume appear between
+%       the booktitle and the editors
+% \end{opt}
+%
+%
+% \textbf{Thesis title:} formatted like a book or article
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]       default is like a book title
+% \item[thtit-a]  titles of PhD and Master theses formatted like articles
+% \item[thtit-x]  no thesis title
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{Technical Report title:} formatted like book or article
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]       default is like an article title
+% \item[trtit-b]  titles of technical reports formatted like books
+% \item[trnum-it] \textsl{technical report} and number italic
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{Books:}  title font style, pages, and address location
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]       default is italicized
+% \item[btit-rm]  book title plain
+% \item[bkpg-par] pages in books places in parentheses
+% \item[bkpg-x]   pages in books bare without word \textsl{pages}
+% \item[add-pub]  publisher's address before name, colon separated
+% \item[pub-par]  publisher and address in parentheses
+% \item[pub-date] publisher with address and date in parentheses
+% \item[pub-xc]   with \texttt{pub-date}, suppresses comma before date
+% \item[pub-xpar] with \texttt{pub-date} to suppress parentheses
+% \item[pre-pub]  publisher placed before chapter and page information
+% \item[pre-edn]  edition before publisher
+% \item[pg-bk]    add number of pages for books and booklets
+% \item[pg-pre]   with \texttt{pg-bk}, total pages comes before publisher
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{Abbreviations:} of various words, default is no abbreviations
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[pp]       abbreviate \textsl{page(s)} as \textsl{p.} and \textsl{pp.}
+% \item[ppx]      no word \textsl{page(s)} or abbreviation
+% \item[ed]       abbreviate \textsl{editor(s)} as \textsl{ed.} and
+%                     \textsl{eds.}
+% \item[ednx]     abbreviates \textsl{edition} as \textsl{ed.} instead
+%                     of \textsl{edn.}
+% \item[abr]      abbreviate \textsl{volume}, \textsl{edition},
+%                     \textsl{technical report}, etc.
+% \item[mth-bare] months abbreviated without dots
+% \item[jabr]     abbreviate names of prestored journals
+% \item[ord]      write edition numbers as 1st, 2nd, instead as words.
+% \item[xedn]     suppress conversion of editions (for English) to avoid
+%                 overflowing some \btx\ installations
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{Editor:} alternative for \emph{in edited} book, inbook, or proceedings.
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]       ``in \emph{names}, editors, \emph{title}''
+% \item[edpar]    ``in \emph{names} (editors), \emph{title}''
+% \item[edparc]   ``in \emph{names}, (editors) \emph{title}''
+% \item[edparxc]  ``in \emph{names} (editors) \emph{title}''
+% \item[bkedcap]  capitalizes ``Editor''
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{Editor:} alternative for \emph{in edited} incollection or inproceedings.
+% If none of these are selected, they are treated the same as an edited book.
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]       ``in \emph{names}, editors, \emph{title}''
+% \item[edby]     ``in \emph{title}, edited by \emph{names}''
+% \item[edby-par] ``in \emph{title} (edited by \emph{names})''
+% \item[edby-parc] ``in \emph{title}, (edited by \emph{names})''
+% \item[edcap]    (with \texttt{edby-par}) capitalizes ``Edited by'' or
+%                    ``Editor''
+% \item[edbyx]    (with \texttt{edby} or \texttt{edby-par}) replaces text
+%                 \textsl{edited by} by \textsl{editor(s)} before the names,
+% \item[edbyw]    same as \texttt{edbyx} but with word \textsl{editor} only in
+%                  parentheses
+% \item[edbyy]    (with \texttt{edby} or \texttt{edby-par}) replaces text
+%                 \textsl{edited by} by \textsl{editor(s)} after the names,
+%                 as ``in \emph{title}, \emph{names}, editors''.
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{ISBN, ISSN numbers:} include or not
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]       default is no ISBN number, ignore this field,
+% \item[isbn]     include an ISBN number as optional entry for books, booklets,
+%                 incollections, inproceedings
+% \item[issn]     include an ISSN number for periodicals
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{URL address:} include or not, and how
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]       ignore URL field,
+% \item[url]      process URL field,
+% \item[url-blk]  (with \texttt{url}) URL text as regular blocked item,
+% \item[url-nt]   URL text treated as a note
+% \item[url-nl]   URL text added as new line below reference (Harvard style)
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{DOI number:} include or not
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]       default is not to include the Digital Object Identifier
+% \item[doi]      include the DOI number
+% \item[agu-doi]  place DOI number AGU style, as part of page designation
+%
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{REV\TeX\ data fields:} for use with \texttt{revtex.bst}.
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]      Do not include extra fields for REV\TeX
+% \item[revdata] Include fields \texttt{collaboration}, \texttt{eid},
+%                  \texttt{numpages} for REV\TeX.
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{Eprint field:} used by REV\TeX\ but can be used on its own.
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]      Do not include \texttt{eprint} and \texttt{archive} fields
+% \item[eprint]  Include \texttt{eprint} and \texttt{archive} fields.
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{Reference component tagging:} apply structure to the |\bibitem| contents.
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]      no tagging.
+% \item[bibinfo] apply tags like |\bibinfo|, and |\eprint| to the fields of data
+%                in the content of the |\bibitem| statement.
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{Emphasis:} defines what `italicized' really means
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]       default is |\em| (can switch between |\it|
+%                 and |\rm|
+% \item[em-it]    use |\it| instead (always italic)
+% \item[em-x]     no emphasis
+% \item[em-ul]    underline for emphasis (with or without \texttt{ulem})
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{Special punctuation:}
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[amper]    use \& in place of \textsl{and}
+% \item[varand]   use command |\BIBand| in place of \textsl{and}
+% \item[and-xcom] no comma before last \textsl{and} of an author list
+%                   (citations and references)
+% \item[and-com]  add comma before \textsl{and} even for two authors (in list of
+%                  references)
+% \item[and-com-ed] the same as \texttt{and-com} but for editors in
+%                   collections
+% \item[xand]    no \textsl{and} in an author list (references)
+% \item[etal-it]  \textsl{et al.} in italics
+% \item[etal-rm]  \textsl{et al.} in roman even if authors in different font
+% \item[etal-xc]  no comma before \textit{et al.}
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{Font commands:}
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]     use Plain \TeX\ (also \LaTeX~2.09) font commands
+% \item[nfss]   use |\textbf|, |\textit|, |\emph| in place of |\bf|, |\it|,
+%                and |\em|; only works then with \LaTeXe
+% \end{opt}
+%
+% \textbf{Plain \TeX\ compatibility:}
+% \begin{opt}
+% \item[--]    use \LaTeXe\ commands for testing, redefining commands
+% \item[plntx] use \TeX\ for maximum compatibility
+% \end{opt}
+%
+%
+% \section{The Menu Information}\label{sec:menu}
+% Here I describe the options and menu information for this particular
+% master file \texttt{\filename}. To construct a \dtx{} driver file
+% to generate a desired \texttt{.bst} file, simply process \texttt{makebst.tex}
+% with \TeX\ or \LaTeX, and give
+% \begin{quote}\tt\filename\end{quote}
+% when prompted for the name of the master file. Then answer the questions
+% in the menus that follow. The menu information is extracted from here.
+%
+% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
+% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
+% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between
+% \begin{quote}
+%   |%<*!options&!driver&!bblbst>| \dots\ |</!options&!driver&!bblbst>|
+% \end{quote}
+% in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
+% extract the menu information, the documentation driver, or the
+% \texttt{babelbst.tex} file.
+%
+% The main coding is divided into two sections, the \emph{head} and
+% \emph{tail}; in between come any external language or journal name
+% support files. The head part is marked with the \dtx{} guard option
+% |<!tail>| and the tail with |<!head>|. This roundabout means of doing
+% things makes it possible to process \texttt{\filename} with \texttt{.dbj}
+% files that were generated for the older \texttt{genbst.mbs} file by
+% simply changing the name of the source file as shown in
+% Section~\ref{sec:update}. If both \texttt{head} and \texttt{tail} (and
+% \texttt{exlang}) options are omitted, as they are in the older
+% \texttt{.dbj} files, \texttt{\filename} is processed completely in one
+% pass. To include external files, two passes are needed, one for each
+% part, with the external file(s) coming in between.
+%
+% Note too that if the internal language commands are taken (i.e., if
+% \texttt{exlang} option is not given) then the default language is
+% English, which is tested for as |<!babel>|. This too permits the simple
+% update of older \texttt{.dbj}, at least for English.
+%
+% \subsection*{Selecting Language}
+% Explicit words in the bibliography style, such as \textsl{and},
+%      \textsl{editor}, etc.,
+% are represented by functions \texttt{bbl.and}, \texttt{bbl.editor}, and so on.
+% By default these functions translate to the normal English text, but
+% other languages are also possible.
+%
+% The definitions of these functions for other languages are contained in
+% external files. At this point, we can make use of features in
+% \texttt{makebst} (version~3.0 or later) to ask for the name of such a
+% definition file, and store it in |\cfile|. If no external file is
+% specified, then the internal definitions are taken, for which there are
+% two possibilities: English or \LaTeX{} commands (Babel).
+%
+% The commands |\MBswitch|, |\mes|, |\MBaskfile|, |\wr|, |\pc|, |\spsp| are
+% defined in \texttt{makebst.tex}.
+%
+% If |\MBswitch| does not exist, then the version of \texttt{makebst}
+% cannot support external files.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+\expandafter\ifx\csname beginoptiongroup\endcsname\relax
+ \mes{^^J******************^^J%
+        !!!!!! VERSION CLASH !!!!!!!!!^^J%
+        This mbs file requires makebst version 4.0 or more^^J%
+        You must update makebst to run it with this mbs file^^J%
+        No docstrip batch file can be produced on this run^^J%
+         ******************}
+ \let\temp\endinput\else\let\temp\relax\fi\temp
+
+\newif\ifnumerical
+\newif\ifmytemp
+\mes{<<< For more information about the meanings of^^J%
+     <<< the various options, see the section on ^^J%
+     <<< Menu Information in the .mbs file documentation.}
+
+\umes{EXTERNAL FILES:}
+\expandafter\ifx\csname MBswitch\endcsname\relax
+ \mes{^^J**************^^J%
+        Makebst version is less than 3.0^^J%
+        Cannot add external file for language definition^^J%
+        **************}
+ \umes{No included files.}%
+ \def\cfile{}\def\jfile{}%
+\else
+ \MBaskfile{^^JName of language definition file}(\mroot.\mext)i\cfile
+ \edef\ctemp{\mroot.\mext}
+ \ifx\ctemp\cfile\def\cfile{}\fi
+ \umes{Name of language file: \string\cfile=\cfile.}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% A second type of external file that can be added is one containing names
+% of journals that are to be prestored into the \texttt{.bst} file.
+% Several file names are allowed here, with the root names separated by
+% commas, and with the common extension added at the end. To assist later
+% parsing of the names, an additional comma is added before the extension.
+%
+% Note that in this case |\MBaskfile| treats the file(s) as output, i.e.,
+% it does not check if the file(s) actually exist.
+%
+% The macro |\Mgetnext| allows the root names to be extracted from the
+% list of file names.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\jfile{}
+ \ask{\yn}{^^JInclude file(s) for extra journal names? (NO)}
+ \mytempfalse
+ \if!\yn!\else\if\yn n\else\if\yn N\else\mytemptrue\fi\fi\fi
+ \ifmytemp
+  \MBaskfile{^^JFile to include}(physjour,geojour,photjour.mbs)o\jfile
+  \edef\jfile{\froot,.\fext}
+  \umes{Name of included files: \string\jfile=\jfile.}%
+ \else
+  \umes{No included files.}%
+ \fi
+\fi%MBswitch
+\def\Mgetnext#1,#2.#3??{\def\froot{#1}\def\Mrest{#2}\def\fext{#3}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% If no external files are specified, then both |\cfile| and |\jfile| are
+% empty. In this case, do \emph{not} set the options \texttt{head} and
+% \texttt{tail}, which control the \dtx{} passes through
+% \texttt{filename}. Now only one pass is made.
+%
+% If there is an external definition file, or if an external list of
+% journal names, then some extra text must be
+% written to fit in with that already written by \texttt{makebst}. This is
+% explained in that documentation. The |\MBswitch| command turns the curly
+% braces |{..}| into normal characters, and the parentheses |(..)| take on
+% their grouping functionality. This permits unbalances braces to be
+% written to the output file.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if!\cfile\jfile!\else
+ \begingroup\MBswitch
+  \wr(\spsp head,\string\MBopta})
+  \if!\cfile!\else
+   \wr(\string\from{\cfile}{\string\MBopta})
+  \fi
+  \if!\jfile!\else
+   \let\jxfile\jfile
+   \loop
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Parse the list of journal name files, adding a new |\from| for each one.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \expandafter\Mgetnext\jxfile??
+    \wr(\string\from{\froot.\fext}{\string\MBopta})
+    \edef\jxfile(\Mrest.\fext)
+    \if!\Mrest!\def\Mtst(1)\else\def\Mtst()\fi
+   \if!\Mtst!
+   \repeat
+  \fi
+  \wr(\string\from{\mroot.\mext}{tail,\string\MBopta}})
+  \wr(\string\def\string\MBopta{\pc)
+ \endgroup
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Ask whether
+% explicit English words wanted or \LaTeX{} commands whose definitions are
+% to be found in the file \texttt{babelbst.tex}.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{INTERNAL LANGUAGE SUPPORT
+ (if no external language file)}%
+ {\if!\cfile!\relax*\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{}{English}{words used explicitly}
+\optdef{b}{babel}{Babel}
+    {(words replaced by commands defined in babelbst.tex)}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\if!\cfile!\relax\else
+\wr{\spsp\spsp exlang,\pc: External language file}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Author--year or numerical}
+% The first question is whether a numerical or author--year citation style
+% is to be used. If the latter, the supporting system is my {\tt
+% natbib.sty}, which expects |\bibitem| to have an optional argument
+% containing the short form of the authors, plus year in parentheses.
+% E.g.,
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\bibitem[Daly et al.(1990)]{key}...|
+% \end{quote}
+% There is now a newer version of \texttt{natbib.sty} (v5.3) that
+% supports an optional full author list too, as
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\bibitem[Daly et al.(1990)Daly, Keppler, and Williams]{key}...|
+% \end{quote}
+% Other systems are also supported, such as the Harvard family of
+% bibliography styles (with \texttt{harvard.sty}), which have entries in the
+% form
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\harvarditem[Daly et al.]{Daly, Keppler,|\\
+% |       and Williams}{1990}{key}...|
+% \end{quote}
+% or the astronomy family (with \texttt{astron.sty}) with entries like
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\bibitem[\protect\astroncite{Daly et al.}{1990}]{key}...|
+% \end{quote}
+% or the Chicago family (with \texttt{chicago.sty}) with entries like
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\bibitem[\protect\citeautheryear{Daly, Keppler, and|\\
+% |      Williams}{Daly et al.}{1990}]{key}...|
+% \end{quote}
+% or the `named' variant of Chicago (with \texttt{named.sty}) with entries like
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Daly et al.}{1990}]{key}...|
+% \end{quote}
+% or the so-called ``author--date'' group (with \texttt{authordate1-4.sty})
+% with entries of the form
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\bibitem[\protect\citename{Daly et al.}1990]{key}...|
+% \end{quote}
+% Finally, there is the \texttt{apalike} format of Oren Patashnik, for use
+% with \texttt{apalike.sty} that has entries of the form
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\bibitem[Daly et al., 1990]{key}...|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% In addition to numerical or author--year citation styles, there is also a
+% \texttt{cite} style available in which the label is the same as the cite
+% key. This is for listing entire contents of databases with the cite key
+% visible.
+%
+% A flag |\ifnumerical| is established because some of the following menu
+% features depend on which system is to be used.
+%
+% The \texttt{alph} option produces labels as in \texttt{alpha.bst}; options
+% \texttt{alf-1} and \texttt{alf-f} modify these. Standard is: first three
+% letters of the single author (Dal90 for Daly, 1990) and first letters of
+% first three authors (DK90 for Daly and Kopka, 1990). Alternatives are first
+% three letters of the first author, no matter how many authors there are, and
+% full name of first author.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{STYLE OF CITATIONS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Numerical}{as in standard LaTeX}
+\optdef{a}{ay}{Author-year}{with some non-standard interface}
+\optdef{b}{alph}{Alpha style, Jon90 or JWB90}{for single or multiple authors}
+\optdef{o}{alph,alf-1}{Alpha style, Jon90}{even for multiple authors}
+\optdef{f}{alph,alf-f}{Alpha style, Jones90}{(full name of first author)}
+\optdef{c}{cite}{Cite key}{(special for listing contents of bib file)}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\if\ans a\numericalfalse\else\numericaltrue\fi
+\if\ans b\mytempfalse   \else\mytemptrue   \fi
+\beginoptiongroup{HTML OUTPUT
+ (if non author-year citations)}
+ {\ifnumerical*\fi}
+\optdef{*}{}{Normal LaTeX}{output}
+\optdef{h}{html}{Hypertext}{output, in HTML code, in paragraphs}
+\optdef{n}{html,htlist}{Hypertext list}{with sequence numbers}
+\optdef{k}{html,htdes}{Hypertext with keys}{for viewing databases}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{AUTHOR--YEAR SUPPORT SYSTEM
+ (if author-year citations)}
+ {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}
+\optdef{*}{nat}{Natbib}{for use with natbib v5.3 or later}
+\optdef{o}{}{Older Natbib}{without full authors citations}
+\optdef{l}{alk}{Apalike}{for use with apalike.sty}
+\optdef{h}{har}{Harvard}{system with harvard.sty}
+\optdef{a}{ast}{Astronomy}{system with astron.sty}
+\optdef{c}{cay}{Chicago}{system with chicago.sty}
+\optdef{n}{nmd}{Named}{system with named.sty}
+\optdef{d}{cn}{Author-date}{system with authordate1-4.sty}
+\getans
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \texttt{harvard} family has been extended for \LaTeXe, and the new
+% \texttt{.bst} files allow the word \textsl{and} and the brackets around years
+% to be variable with commands. These features may be added too.
+% The URL field used to be exclusively part of Harvard, but now exists
+% independently of it too.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{HARVARD EXTENSIONS INCLUDED
+ (if Harvard support selected)}
+ {\if\ans h*\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{harnm}{With Harvard extensions}{for LaTeX2e version of harvard.sty}
+\optdef{n}{}{Older Harvard}{style, for LaTeX 2.09}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Language switching}
+% A \texttt{language} field can be present to specify the original language of
+% the reference; with \verb!\setlanguge!, the hyphenation patterns are set for
+% setting the title in that language.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{LANGUAGE FIELD}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{No language field}{}
+\optdef{l}{lang}{Add language field}{to switch hyphenation patterns temporarily}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Annotations}
+% Annotations to a reference are additional information not normally printed
+% out in the list of references. They are used for listing databases.
+% The coding here was offered by Soren Dayton.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{ANNOTATIONS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{No annotations}{will be recognized}
+\optdef{a}{annote}{Annotations}{in annote field or in .tex file of citekey name}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Ordering of the listed references}
+%   Choices here depend on citation style. The default in both cases is
+% alphabetical order of all authors. For numerical style, one may also
+% choose an unsorted order, which means the order is the same as the original
+% citations. This corresponds to \texttt{unsrt.bst}. Order of citation is
+% also offered for author--year for \texttt{natbib}-type styles that can
+% also be used for numerical listings.
+%
+% Another possibility is to order first by year, then authors. This too only
+% makes sense for numerical citations. However, it is offered for author--year
+% in the event that a \texttt{natbib}-type style is used for numerical
+% listings.
+%
+% For the alpha style, the ordering is by label only, so no option is
+% offered here (|\ifnumerical| is \meta{true} and |\ifmytemp| is \meta{false}).
+%
+% For author--year, the second choice is by label. (The label is the
+% optional |\bibitem| argument, and is what is printed in place of the
+% |\cite| command.) With this option, all the papers with the same first
+% author are ordered so that the one-author papers come first, followed by
+% the two-author papers, followed by the multiple-author papers. This is a
+% more sensible system for author--year citations, and is demanded by some
+% journals (like JGR).
+%
+% One problem that can arise here is when two or more references have the
+% same set of authors and year; normally they are then ordered by the
+% title, ignoring initial words like \textsl{the} and \textsl{a}, with the
+% letters a, b,
+% c, \dots, added to the year. This can mean that a set of references with
+% a natural sequence will be put into a different order. An alternative is
+% to order them by the citation keyword instead of by title. This of course
+% assumes that the keywords in this case reflect that natural sequence.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\ans\relax
+\beginoptiongroup{ORDERING OF REFERENCES
+ (if non-author/year and non-alph)}
+ {\ifnumerical\ifmytemp*\fi\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{}{Alphabetical}{by all authors}
+\optdef{c}{seq-no}{Citation order}{(unsorted, like unsrt.bst)}
+\optdef{d}{seq-yr}{Year ordered}{and then by authors}
+\optdef{r}{seq-yrr}{Reverse year ordered}{and then by authors}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%
+\beginoptiongroup{ORDERING OF REFERENCES
+ (if author-year citations)}
+ {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{}{Alphabetical}{by all authors}
+\optdef{l}{seq-lab}{By label}%
+   {(Jones before Jones and James before Jones et al)}
+\optdef{k}{seq-key}{By label and cite key}{instead of label and title, as above}
+\optdef{d}{seq-yr}{Year ordered}{and then by authors (for publication lists)}
+\optdef{r}{seq-yrr}{Reverse year ordered}{and then by authors (most recent first)}
+\optdef{c}{seq-no}{Citation order}{(unsorted, only meaningful for numericals)}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The standard \btx\ styles consider the \emph{von} part of the name to be a
+% fixed part of the surname. European usage tends to alphabetize ignoring these
+% honorifics.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{ORDER ON VON PART
+ (if not citation order)}
+ {\if\ans c\else*\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{}{Sort on von part}{(de la Maire before Defoe)}
+\optdef{x}{vonx}{Sort without von part}{(de la Maire after Mahone)}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Formatting author names}
+% The default is that the full names of the authors are listed, given names
+% first, unabbreviated. Of course, if only the initials have been given in
+% the \texttt{.bib} file, then that is all that can appear in the list. Other
+% possibilities are to use initials (even if full names in the \texttt{.bib}
+% file) either before or after the surnames. A specialty of the journals of
+% the American Geophysical Union is to have only the first name with
+% reversed initials.
+%
+% If the reference is part of a larger work with editors, then the editor
+% names appear later in the reference text, usually as ``edited by \dots''
+% or as ``\emph{names} (editors)''. In these cases, the editor names are
+% not usually reversed (surname first) even if the authors' names are.
+% An option is provided to format such editor names exactly as the authors'.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{AUTHOR NAMES:}{}
+\optdef{*}{ed-au}{Full, surname last}{(John Frederick Smith)}
+\optdef{f}{nm-revf}{Full, surname first}{(Smith, John Frederick)}
+\optdef{i}{nm-init,ed-au}{Initials + surname}{(J. F. Smith)}
+\optdef{r}{nm-rev}{Surname + initials}{(Smith, J. F.)}
+\optdef{s}{nm-rv}{Surname + dotless initials}{(Smith J F)}
+\optdef{w}{nm-rvvc}{Surname + comma + spaceless initials}{(Smith, J.F.)}
+\optdef{x}{nm-rvx}{Surname + pure initials}{(Smith JF)}
+\optdef{y}{nm-rvcx}{Surname + comma + pure initials}{(Smith, JF)}
+\optdef{z}{nm-rvv}{Surname + spaceless initials}{(Smith J.F.)}
+\optdef{a}{nm-rev1}{Only first name reversed, initials}%
+   {(AGU style: Smith, J. F., H. K. Jones)}
+\optdef{b}{nm-revv1}{First name reversed, with full names}%
+   {(Smith, John Fred, Harry Kab Jones)}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\mytempfalse
+\if\ans f\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans r\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans x\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans y\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans a\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi
+\beginoptiongroup{EDITOR NAMES IN COLLECTIONS
+ (if author names reversed)}
+ {\ifmytemp*\fi}
+\if\ans r
+\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J. J. Smith}
+\fi
+\if\ans s
+\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J J Smith}
+\fi
+\if\ans a
+\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J. J. Smith}
+\fi
+\if\ans x
+\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by JJ Smith}
+\fi
+\if\ans f
+\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by John James Smith}
+\fi
+\if\ans y
+\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J.J. Smith}
+\fi
+\if\ans b
+\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by John James Smith}
+\fi
+\optdef{r}{ed-rev}{Editor names reversed}{just like authors'}
+\getans
+\beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF JUNIOR
+  (if author names reversed)}
+  {}
+\optdef{*}{jnrlst}{Junior comes last}{as Smith, John, Jr.}
+\optdef{m}{}{Junior between}{as Smith, Jr., John}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{JUNIOR PART IN THE CITATION
+ (if author-year citations)}
+ {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{}{No `junior' part in the citations}{but in the ref listing}
+\optdef{j}{jnrlab}{`Junior' in citations}{as well as in ref listing}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION BETWEEN AUTHOR NAMES:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Author names separated by commas}{}
+\optdef{s}{aunm-semi}{Names separated by semi-colon}{}
+\optdef{h}{aunm-sl}{Names separated by slash}{/}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{ADJACENT REFERENCES WITH REPEATED NAMES:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Author/editor names always present}{}
+\optdef{d}{nmdash}{Repeated author/editor names replaced by dash}{}
+\optdef{2}{nmdash,nmd-2}{Repeated author/editor names replaced by 2 dashes}{}
+\optdef{3}{nmdash,nmd-3}{Repeated author/editor names replaced by 3 dashes}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Number of authors}
+% Normally the complete list of authors as given in the \texttt{.bib} file is
+% presented in the reference list. However, some journals prefer to limit
+% them to a maximum. If there are more than this maximum number of author
+% names, then a minimum number plus \textsl{et al.} are listed.
+%
+% Because no test for consistency of the numbers is carried out in the
+% \texttt{.bst} file itself (it might be possible, but I found it too complex),
+% this is done here.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{NUMBER OF AUTHORS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{All authors}{included in listing}
+\optdef{l}{nmlm}{Limited authors}{(et al replaces missing names)}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\if\ans l
+\loop
+  \ask{\num}{Maximum number of authors (1-99)}
+  \ifnum\num>99\relax
+  \mes{*** Must be between 1 and 99}
+\repeat
+\def\parsenum#1#2{\if#2\relax\wr{\spsp\spsp x#1,\pc: Maximum of #1\space authors}
+  \else\wr{\spsp\spsp x#10,x#2,\pc: Maximum of #1#2\space authors}\fi}
+\expandafter\parsenum\num\relax
+\mes{\spsp You have selected maximum \num\space authors}
+\edef\numx{\num}
+\loop
+  \ask{\num}{Minimum number (before et al given) (1-\numx)}
+  \ifnum\num>\numx
+  \mes{*** Must be between 1 and \numx}
+\repeat
+\def\parsenum#1#2{\if#2\relax\wr{\spsp\spsp m#1,\pc: Minimum of #1\space authors}
+  \else\wr{\spsp\spsp m#10,m#2,\pc: Minimum of #1#2\space authors}\fi}
+\expandafter\parsenum\num\relax
+\mes{\spsp You have selected minimum \num\space authors}
+\fi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Typeface of names}
+% The author names in the list of references normally appear in the current
+% typeface. This may be changed to small caps, bold, or italics.
+%
+% Alternatively, the surnames only can be formatted, with the first names in the
+% regular font. One can also specify that the words `and' and `et~al.'\ should be
+% in the regular font, or that `et~al.'\ be italic.
+%
+% Another possibility is that the names be put into a command |\bibnamefont{..}|,
+% which must be defined in the \LaTeX\ document. By default, this command does
+% not format its argument. There is also a |\bibfnamefont| command for the first
+% names, to be user-defined.
+%
+% Editor names in a collection or in a book will not normally have these
+% fonts applied to them; this may be additionally selected.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Normal font for author names}{}
+\optdef{s}{nmft,nmft-sc}{Small caps authors}{(\string\sc)}
+\optdef{i}{nmft,nmft-it}{Italic authors}{(\string\it\space or \string\em)}
+\optdef{b}{nmft,nmft-bf}{Bold authors}{(\string\bf)}
+\optdef{u}{nmft,nmft-def}{User defined author font}{(\string\bibnamefont)}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\mytempfalse
+\if\ans i\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans u\mytemptrue\fi
+\beginoptiongroup{FONT FOR FIRST NAMES
+ (if non-default font for authors)}
+ {\ifmytemp*\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{}{First names same font as surnames}{}
+\optdef{r}{fnm-rm}{First names in normal font}{}
+\optdef{u}{fnm-def}{First names in user defined font}{(\string\bibfnamefont)}
+\getans
+\beginoptiongroup{EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Editors incollection normal font}{}
+\optdef{a}{nmfted}{Editors incollection like authors}{font}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{FONT FOR `AND' IN LIST:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`And' in author font}{(JONES AND JAMES)}
+\optdef{r}{nmand-rm}{`And' in normal font}{(JONES and JAMES)}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Names in Citation label}
+% This applies to author--year style only. The label is the text written
+% by the |\cite| command, and for author--year style, this is something like
+% `Daly et al.\ (1990b)'. One may select italics for the authors and for the
+% extra label attached to the year. The year always remains plain.
+%
+% This parallels the font selection for the names in the list of references
+% except that there no choice for the first names, since only surnames
+% are used in the labels. A user-defined |\citefontname| may also
+% be selected, but this \emph{must} be defined by the user since there
+% will be no default definition for it.
+%
+% If a font is selected for the cited authors, then the word `and' may be
+% optionally put in the normal font.
+%
+% It is not possible to select the type of brackets for the year, since
+% this is determined by the \LaTeX{} style option that manages the
+% author--year citations. This is not standard \LaTeX, so that there are a
+% number of private style files for achieving this.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{FONT OF CITATION LABELS IN TEXT
+ (if author-year citations)}
+ {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{}{Cited authors plain}{as result of \string\cite\space command}
+\optdef{i}{lab,lab-it}{Cited authors italic}{}
+\optdef{s}{lab,lab-sc}{Cited authors small caps}{}
+\optdef{b}{lab,lab-bf}{Cited authors bold}{}
+\optdef{u}{lab,lab-def}{User defined citation font}{(\string\citenamefont)}
+\getans
+
+\mytempfalse
+\if\ans i\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans u\mytemptrue\fi
+\beginoptiongroup{FONT FOR `AND' IN CITATIONS
+ (if non-default font for citation lables)}
+ {\ifmytemp*\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{}{Cited `and' in author font}{}
+\optdef{r}{and-rm}{Cited `and' in normal font}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{FONT OF EXTRA LABEL
+ (The extra letter on the year)}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Extra label plain}{}
+\optdef{i}{xlab-it}{Extra label italic}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Label for missing author names}
+%
+% If the author and/or editor is missing, the standard \texttt{.bst} files
+% use the \texttt{key} field in place of the names for purposes of ordering the
+% entries.
+%
+% For author--year styles, the \texttt{key} field is even inserted in the
+% reference list and in the label in place of the authors. Optionally, one can
+% suppress the year in this case, which causes \texttt{natbib} (version~7)
+% to print only that key text as a code designation for the work. Thus if
+% \texttt{KEY = "CS1-345"} and there are no authors, then |\citep| produces
+% (CS1-345) and |\citet| simply CS1-345. That is, they behave like
+% |\citeauthor|. If \texttt{natbib} did not recognize the blank year, one would
+% get (CS1-345, ) and CS1-345 (). (Earlier versions of \texttt{natbib} crash on
+% a blank year.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{LABEL WHEN AUTHORS MISSING
+ (if author-year citations)}
+ {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{keyxyr}{Year blank when KEY replaces missing author}{(for natbib 7.0)}
+\optdef{y}{}{Year included when KEY replaces missing author}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Missing date}
+% A missing date can be set to ???? or simply left blank. In the latter case,
+% \texttt{natbib} version~7 will print only the authors without any year
+% punctuation or brackets.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{MISSING DATE
+ (if author-year citations)}
+ {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{}{Missing date set to ????}{in label and text}
+\optdef{b}{blkyear}{Missing date left blank}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Position of date}
+% This applies to author--year style only. It makes sense to put the date
+% immediately after the author list, since the two items (author and year)
+% are the identifiers of the reference. Default position is at the
+% end of the references, before any notes. It is also possible to place
+% it even after the notes.
+%
+% Medical journals have a system where the date is part of the journal
+% specification, as Lancet 1994;45(2):34--40. Otherwise the date appears at
+% the end.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{DATE POSITION:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Date at end}{}
+\optdef{b}{dt-beg}{Date after authors}{}
+\optdef{j}{dt-jnl}{Date part of journal spec.}{(as 1994;45:34-40) else at end}
+\optdef{e}{dt-end}{Date at very end}{after any notes}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\if\ans b\mytemptrue\else\if\ans j\mytemptrue\else\mytempfalse\fi\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Format of date}
+% The year may be enclosed in parentheses, brackets, or preceded by a
+% colon. If none of these are selected, the date (month plus year) appears.
+% For author--year, the date normally consists only of the year, no month,
+% but this may be overridden.
+%
+% If the date comes just after the authors, then one might want special
+% punctuation following it, like a colon, or space only. The latter is
+% probably desirable if the date is brackets or parentheses.
+%
+% The date can even be put into bold face.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{DATE FORMAT
+ (if non author-year citations)}
+ {\ifnumerical*\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{}{Plain month and year}{without any brackets}
+\optdef{p}{yr-par}{Date in parentheses}{as (May 1993)}
+\optdef{b}{yr-brk}{Date in brackets}{as [May 1993]}
+\optdef{c}{yr-col}{Date preceded by colon}{as `: May 1993'}
+\optdef{d}{yr-per}{Date preceded by period}{as `. May 1993'}
+\optdef{m}{yr-com}{Date preceded by comma}{as `, May 1993'}
+\optdef{s}{yr-blk}{Date preceded by space}{only, as ` May 1993'}
+\getans
+\beginoptiongroup{SUPPRESS MONTH:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Date is month and year}{}
+\optdef{x}{xmth}{Date is year only}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{REVERSED DATE
+ (if including month)}
+ {\if\ans x\else*\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{}{Date as month year}{}
+\optdef{r}{dtrev}{Date as year month}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{DATE FORMAT
+ (if author-year citations)}
+ {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{}{Year plain}{without any brackets}
+\optdef{p}{yr-par}{Year in parentheses}{as (1993)}
+\optdef{b}{yr-brk}{Year in brackets}{as [1993]}
+\optdef{c}{yr-col}{Year preceded by colon}{as `: 1993'}
+\optdef{d}{yr-per}{Year preceded by period}{as `. 1993'}
+\optdef{m}{yr-com}{Date preceded by comma}{as `, 1993'}
+\optdef{s}{yr-blk}{Year preceded by space}{only, as ` 1993'}
+\getans
+\beginoptiongroup{INCLUDE MONTHS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Date is year only}{without the month}
+\optdef{m}{aymth}{Include month in date}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{REVERSED DATE
+ (if including month)}
+ {\if\ans m*\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{}{Date as month year}{}
+\optdef{r}{dtrev}{Date as year month}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{DATE PUNCTUATION
+ (if date not at end)}
+ {\ifmytemp*\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{}{Date with standard block punctuation}{(comma or period)}
+\optdef{c}{yrp-col}{Colon after date}{as 1994:}
+\optdef{s}{yrp-semi}{Semi-colon after date}{as 1994;}
+\optdef{p}{yrp-per}{Period after date}{even when blocks use commas}
+\optdef{x}{yrp-x}{No punct. after date}{}
+\getans
+\beginoptiongroup{BLANK AFTER DATE:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Space after date}{and punctuation}
+\optdef{x}{yrpp-xsp}{No space after date}{as 1994:45}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{DATE FONT:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Date in normal font}{}
+\optdef{b}{dtbf}{Date in bold face}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Normally in author--year citations, the \texttt{year} entry is truncated
+% to the last 4 characters, which should be the 4 digits of the year. Some
+% users have requested the possibility of suppressing this truncation so
+% that they may put text in the \texttt{year} field, such as ``in press.''
+% Another use for it is when years are given as ``1968--72''. Actually,
+% I have no idea why the year should be truncated at all.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{TRUNCATE YEAR
+ (if author-year citations)}
+ {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{note-yr}{Year text full}{as 1990--1993 or `in press'}
+\optdef{t}{}{Year truncated}{to last 4 digits}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Article title in journal}
+% The title of an article in a journal or in a collection (a book, or
+% conference proceedings) may appear plain, in italics, within single
+% or double quotes or even in guillemets. The last is best with T1 coding; a
+% poor man's version for OT1 is provided; \LaTeXe\ is required in both cases.
+%
+% Furthermore, it may have sentence capitalization (first
+% word and word following colon) or be capitalized as in the \texttt{.bib} file
+% entry. That is why it is recommended to capitalize the entry text as it
+% should appear when fully capitalized, putting words that are always
+% capitalized in braces. Example:
+% \begin{quote}
+% |TITLE="The Results of the {Giotto} Mission"|
+% \end{quote}
+% which produces either ``The results of the Giotto mission'' or ``The
+% Results of the Giotto Mission'', depending on option.
+%
+% Additionally, the article titles may be fully suppressed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{TITLE OF ARTICLE:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Title plain}{with no special font}
+\optdef{i}{tit-it}{Title italic}{(\string\em)}
+\optdef{q}{tit-qq,qt-s}{Title and punctuation in single quotes}{(`Title,' ..)}
+\optdef{d}{tit-qq}{Title and punctuation in double quotes}{(``Title,'' ..)}
+\optdef{g}{tit-qq,qt-g}{Title and punctuation in guillemets}{(<<Title,>> ..)}
+\optdef{x}{tit-qq,qt-s,qx}{Title in single quotes}{(`Title', ..)}
+\optdef{y}{tit-qq,qx}{Title in double quotes}{(``Title'', ..)}
+\optdef{z}{tit-qq,qt-g,qx}{Title in guillemets}{(<<Title>>, ..)}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\mytempfalse
+\if\ans q\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans d\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans g\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans x\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans y\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans z\mytemptrue\fi
+\beginoptiongroup{COLLECTION/PROCEEDINGS TITLES
+ (if quoted title)}
+ {\ifmytemp*\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{bt-qq}{Quote collection and proceedings titles}{too}
+\optdef{x}{}{Collection and proceedings titles not in quotes}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{CAPITALIZATION OF ARTICLE TITLE:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Sentence style}{(capitalize first word and those in braces)}
+\optdef{t}{atit-u}{Title style}{(just as in bib entry)}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{ARTICLE TITLE PRESENT:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Article title present}{in journals and proceedings}
+\optdef{x}{jtit-x}{No article title}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Journal names}
+% Abbreviated journal names normally contain periods; the periods may be
+% removed with this option. In fact, only letters, numbers, and spacing are
+% retained.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL NAMES:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Periods in journal names}{are retained, as `Phys. Rev.'}
+\optdef{x}{jxper}{Dotless journal names}{as `Phys Rev'}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Journal name is normally printed in italics; can be left in normal font.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL NAME FONT:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Journal name italics}{}
+\optdef{r}{jttl-rm}{Journal name normal}{font}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Title of Theses and Technical Reports}
+% The title of a these (PhD or Master's) is normally treated the same
+% as that of a book. Optionally, it may be formatted like that of
+% an article.
+%
+% The title of a technical report is normally treated the same as that
+% of an article. Optionally, it may be formatted like that of a book.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{THESIS TITLE:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Thesis titles like books}{}
+\optdef{a}{thtit-a}{Thesis title like article}{}
+\optdef{x}{thtit-x}{No thesis title}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Tech. report title like articles}{}
+\optdef{b}{trtit-b}{Tech. report title like books}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{TECHNICAL REPORT NUMBER:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Tech. report and number plain}{as `Tech. Rep. 123'}
+\optdef{i}{trnum-it}{Tech. report and number italic}%
+      {as `{\string\it\space Tech. Rep. 123'}}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Journal reference}
+% Great diversity of opinion exists as to how a journal reference is to be
+% formatted. It consists of a volume, possibly a number, and page limits.
+% The number is really only necessary if the page numbers within one volume
+% start at 1 for each physical `number'. Since journals are often bound
+% together in one volume later, it makes more sense to number the pages
+% continuously through the whole volume.
+%
+% I am only aware of one journal that used to reset the pagination for each
+% `number', in which case the number was part of the page designation.
+% I had erroneously provided an option \texttt{vnum-pg} to achieve this, but I
+% now realize that instead, for this one journal, the database entries must
+% contain \texttt{pages="(2)33--2(55)"}. This option has been removed at
+% version 3.84.
+%
+% A number of styles for journal specifications are
+% \begin{quote}
+%   \begin{tabular}{l@{\qquad}l}
+% 21(2):33--55             & 21, no.\ 2: 33--55\\
+% \textbf{21}(2):33--55    & \textbf{21}, \#2, 33--55\\
+% \textit{21}(2), 33--55   & \textit{21} (2); 33--55 \\
+% 21(2) (1995) 33--55      & 21(1995), 33-55\\
+% 21(2) 33--55             & vol.~21 (2), pp.~33--55
+%   \end{tabular}
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% Here both start and stop page numbers have been given; often only the
+% start page is wanted.
+%
+% It is also possible to include the year as part of the journal specification,
+% in which case the year is always in parentheses, attached snugly or with space
+% to the volume, or preceding the pages.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL VOLUME:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Volume plain}{as vol(num)}
+\optdef{i}{vol-it}{Volume italic}{as {\string\em\space vol}(num)}
+\optdef{b}{vol-bf}{Volume bold}{as {\string\bf\space vol}(num)}
+\optdef{d}{vol-2bf}{Volume and number bold}{as {\string\bf\space vol(num)}}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The form of the `number' is also given: in parentheses, with `no.',
+% with \#, or omitted. The \texttt{vnum-b} option is meant to be used
+% with \texttt{jdt-v} and \texttt{jdt-vs} but could be used alone.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL VOL AND NUMBER:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Journal vol(num)}{as 34(2)}
+\optdef{s}{vnum-sp}{Journal vol (num)}{as 34 (2)}
+\optdef{c}{vnum-cm}{Journal vol, num}{as 34, 2}
+\optdef{n}{vnum-nr}{Journal vol, no. num}{as 34, no. 2}
+\optdef{h}{vnum-h}{Journal vol, \string\# number}{as 34, \string\#2}
+\optdef{b}{vnum-b}{Journal vol number}{as 34 2}
+\optdef{x}{vnum-x}{Journal vol, without number}{as 34}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{VOLUME PUNCTUATION:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Volume with colon}{as vol(num):ppp}
+\optdef{s}{volp-sp}{Volume with colon and space}{as vol(num): ppp}
+\optdef{h}{volp-semi}{Volume with semi-colon}{as vol(num); ppp}
+\optdef{c}{volp-com}{Volume with comma}{as vol(num), ppp}
+\optdef{b}{volp-blk}{Volume with blank}{as vol(num) ppp}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{YEAR IN JOURNAL SPECIFICATION:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Journal year like others}{as given by date position}
+\optdef{v}{jdt-v}{Journal vol(year)}{as 34(1995)}
+\optdef{s}{jdt-vs}{Journal vol (year)}{as 34 (1995)}
+\optdef{p}{jdt-p}{Year with pages}{as 34(2), (1995) 1345--1387}
+\optdef{c}{jdt-pc}{Year, comma, pages}{as 34(2), (1995), 1345--1387}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{PAGE NUMBERS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Start and stop page numbers}{given}
+\optdef{f}{jpg-1}{Only start page number}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{LARGE PAGE NUMBERS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{No separators for large page numbers}{}
+\optdef{c}{pgsep-c}{Comma inserted over 9999}{as 11,234}
+\optdef{s}{pgsep-s}{Thin space inserted over 9999}{as 11 234}
+\optdef{p}{pgsep-p}{Period inserted over 9999}{as 11.234}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{WORD `PAGE' IN ARTICLES:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Article pages numbers only}{as 234-256}
+\optdef{p}{jwdpg}{Include `page' in articles}{as pp. 234--256}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Some journals want page numbers at the end, even for books, proceedings, as
+% well as for journals.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF PAGES:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Pages given mid text}{as is normal}
+\optdef{e}{pp-last}{Pages at end}{but before any notes}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{WORD `VOLUME' IN ARTICLES:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Article volume as number only}{as 21}
+\optdef{p}{jwdvol}{Include `volume' in articles}{as vol. 21}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Fiddle with the format and location of the number/series for collections and
+% inproceedings.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{NUMBER AND SERIES FOR COLLECTIONS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{num-xser}{Allows number without series}{and suppresses word "number"}
+\optdef{s}{}{Standard BibTeX}{as: "number 123 in Total Works"; error if number and no series}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF NUMBER AND SERIES:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{After chapter and pages}{as in standard BibTeX}
+\optdef{t}{numser}{Just before publisher}{or organization}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Fiddle with the format and location of series and volume with books and collections.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{VOLUME AND SERIES FOR BOOKS/COLLECTIONS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Vol. 23 of Series}{as in standard BibTeX}
+\optdef{s}{ser-vol}{Series, vol. 23}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF VOLUME AND SERIES FOR INCOLLECTIONS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Series and volume after the editors}{}
+\optdef{e}{ser-ed}{Series and volume after booktitle}{and before editors}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% It is possible to decide whether the journal name should be
+% separated from the following specifications with a blank or comma.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Comma after journal}{name}
+\optdef{x}{jnm-x}{Space after journal}{name}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Books}
+% The title of a book (as opposed to an article in a book or journal) is
+% normally italicized. This may be set to the regular font.
+%
+% The page numbers in books may be set in parentheses, as (pp.\ 345--350).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{BOOK TITLE:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Book title italic}{(\string\em)}
+\optdef{p}{btit-rm,bt-rm}{Book title plain}{(no font command)}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{PAGES IN BOOKS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Pages in book plain}{as pp. 50-55}
+\optdef{p}{bkpg-par}{Pages in book in parentheses}{as (pp. 50-55)}
+\optdef{x}{bkpg-x}{Pages in book bare}{as 50-55}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{TOTAL PAGES OF A BOOK:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Total book pages not printed}{}
+\optdef{p}{pg-bk}{For book: 345 pages}{or pp.}
+\optdef{a}{pg-bk,pg-pre}{Total book pages before publisher}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Some psychology journals wish to have the publisher's address preceding
+% the name, separated by colon, as
+% \begin{quote}New York: Wiley and Sons\end{quote}
+%
+% Some journals (e.g.\ Nature) put publisher in parentheses with date,
+% as (Wiley and Sons, New York, 1983). These normally put the date in
+% parentheses at the end anyway, so this is a merging of the two sets of
+% parentheses.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{PUBLISHER ADDRESS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Publisher, address}{as Harcourt, New York}
+\optdef{a}{add-pub}{Address: Publisher}{as New York: Harcourt}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Publisher as normal block}{without parentheses}
+\optdef{p}{pub-par}{Publisher in parentheses}{}
+\optdef{d}{pub-date}{Publisher and date in parentheses}{(Oxford, 1994)}
+\optdef{c}{pub-date,pub-xc}{Publisher and date in parentheses, no comma}{(Oxford 1994)}
+\optdef{f}{pub-date,pub-xpar}{Publisher and date without parentheses}{Oxford, 1994}
+\optdef{k}{pub-date,pub-xpar,pub-xc}{Publisher and date, no parentheses, no comma}{Oxford 1994}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{PUBLISHER POSITION:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Publisher after chapter, pages}{}
+\optdef{p}{pre-pub}{Publisher before chapter, pages}{}
+\optdef{e}{pre-edn}{Publisher after edition}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{ISBN, ISSN, DOI numbers}
+% Books normally possess an ISBN number. This may be included as an
+% optional entry for \texttt{book}, \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{booklet},
+% \texttt{incollection}, \texttt{proceedings}, \texttt{inproceedings}.
+% However, it should be suppressed for \texttt{inbook} etc.\ when
+% there is a crossref to another book with the ISBN number.
+%
+% Periodicals contain an ISSN number. Add this to \texttt{article}, or
+% course, but also to \texttt{inproceedings} and \texttt{proceedings}, since
+% they are sometimes printed in a periodical.
+%
+% Journal articles that appear online are given a DOI number, something more
+% robust than a URL that can change as machines are upgraded.
+% The American Geophysical Union (AGU) uses the DOI as part of the
+% page number substitution for electronic journals, placing the number
+% where the pages would normally appear.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{ISBN NUMBER:}{}
+\optdef{*}{isbn}{Include ISBN}{for books, booklets, etc.}
+\optdef{x}{}{No ISBN}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{ISSN NUMBER:}{}
+\optdef{*}{issn}{Include ISSN}{for periodicals}
+\optdef{x}{}{No ISSN}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{DOI NUMBER:}{}
+\optdef{*}{doi}{Include DOI}{as "doi: number"}
+\optdef{a}{agu-doi,doi}{Insert DOI AGU style}{as part of page number}
+\optdef{x}{}{No DOI}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Editor of book without author}
+%
+% This is normally
+% \begin{quote}
+%  J. K. James, editor
+% \end{quote}
+% but may also be
+% \begin{quote}
+%  J. K. James, (editor)\\
+%  J. K. James (editor),
+% \end{quote}
+% Alternatively, the word \textsl{editor} may be capitalized and/or
+% abbreviated.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{`EDITOR' AFTER NAMES (EDITED BOOKS WITHOUT AUTHORS):}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Word `editor' after name}{}
+\optdef{a}{edpar}{`Name (editor),'}{in parentheses, after name, comma after}
+\optdef{b}{edpar,bkedcap}{`Name (Editor),'}{as above, editor upper case}
+\optdef{c}{edparc}{`Name, (editor)'}{in parentheses, after name, comma between}
+\optdef{d}{edparc,bkedcap}{`Name, (Editor)'}{as above, editor upper case}
+\optdef{e}{edparxc}{`Name (editor)'}{in parentheses, after name, no commas}
+\optdef{f}{edparxc,bkedcap}{`Name (Editor)'}{as above, editor upper case}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Edited by}
+% For an article within an edited collection, the normal form is
+% \begin{quote}
+% In J. K. James, editor, \emph{Title of Collection} \dots
+% \end{quote}
+% Alternative forms are
+% \begin{quote}
+% In J. K. James (editor), \emph{Title} \dots\\
+% In \emph{Title}, edited by J. K. James \dots\\
+% In \emph{Title} (Edited by J. K. James) \dots
+% \end{quote}
+% If none of the \texttt{edby} variations is used, then the same system is
+% used as for edited books, i.e. \texttt{edpar} applies.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Same as for edited book}{(names before booktitle)}
+\optdef{b}{edby}{In booktitle, edited by .. }{(where .. is names)}
+\optdef{p}{edby-par}{In booktitle (edited by ..)}{}
+\optdef{c}{edby-parc}{In booktitle, (edited by ..)}{}
+\optdef{e}{edby,edbyx}{In booktitle, editor ..}{}
+\optdef{f}{edby,edbyw}{In booktitle, (editor) ..}{}
+\optdef{k}{edby-par,edbyx}{In booktitle (editor..)}{}
+\optdef{g}{edby-parc,edbyx}{In booktitle, (editor..)}{}
+\optdef{j}{edby,edbyy}{In booktitle, .., editor}{}
+\optdef{m}{edby-par,edbyy}{In booktitle (.., editor)}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\mytempfalse
+\if\ans p\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans k\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans c\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans f\mytemptrue\fi
+\beginoptiongroup{CAPITALIZE `EDITOR' OR `EDITED BY'
+ (if editor capitalizable)}
+ {\ifmytemp*\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{}{`(editor,..)' or `(edited by..)'}{in lower case}
+\optdef{c}{edcap}{`(Editor,..)' or `(Edited by..)'}{in upper case}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Block punctuation}
+% Blocks are logical sections of the reference specification, such as the
+% author block, the journal block, editor block, etc. These are normally
+% separated by periods, but alternatively a comma may be used. Another
+% choice is to use commas except after titles where a period is given.
+%
+% \LaTeX\ offers an \texttt{openbib} option, which means that the blocks
+% are not only new sentences, but new lines as well. This can only
+% function when the default option here is taken, for then the command
+% |\newblock| is placed between the blocks. This command is normally
+% defined to do nothing, but \LaTeX\ redefines it to issue a new line
+% when open bibliographies are wanted.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS (BLOCKS):}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{\string\newblock\space after blocks}
+   {(periods or new lines with openbib option)}
+\optdef{c}{blk-com}{Comma between blocks}{}
+\optdef{s}{blk-com,com-semi}{Semi-colon between blocks}{}
+\optdef{b}{blk-com,com-blank}{Blanks between blocks}{}
+\optdef{t}{blk-tit}{Period after titles of articles, books, etc}{else commas}
+\optdef{u}{blk-tit,tit-col}{Colon after titles of articles, books, etc}{else commas}
+\optdef{a}{blk-tita}{Period after titles of articles}{else commas}
+\optdef{d}{blk-tita,tit-col}{Colon after titles of articles}{else commas}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\mytempfalse
+\if\ans c\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans t\mytemptrue\fi
+\if\ans a\mytemptrue\fi
+\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION BEFORE NOTES
+ (if not using \string\newblock)}
+ {\ifmytemp*\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{}{Notes have regular punctuation}{like all other blocks}
+\optdef{p}{blknt}{Notes preceded by period}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION AFTER AUTHORS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Author block normal}{with regular block punctuation}
+\optdef{c}{au-col}{Author block with colon}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{\textsl{In} with colon}
+% When referring to works in a collection, one begins the block describing
+% that collection with \textsl{In}. Optionally, one may add a colon.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION AFTER `IN':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Space after `in'}{for incollection or inproceedings}
+\optdef{c}{in-col}{Colon after `in'}{(as `In: ...')}
+\optdef{i}{in-it}{Italic `in'}{and space}
+\optdef{d}{in-col,in-it}{Italic `in' and colon}{}
+\optdef{x}{in-x}{No word `in'}{for edited works}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{`IN' WITH JOURNAL NAMES
+ (if using 'in' with collections)}
+ {\if\ans x\else*\fi}
+\optdef{*}{}{No `in' before journal name}{}
+\optdef{i}{injnl}{Add `in' before journal name}{in style for incollection}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Final punctuation}
+% The punctuation at the end of the reference is normally a period. This
+% may be suppressed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{FINAL PUNCTUATION:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Period at very end}{of the listed reference}
+\optdef{x}{fin-bare}{No period at end}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Abbreviations}
+% A number of words may be abbreviated: pages, editors, volume, chapter,
+% and so on. The first two may be independently set to abbreviation, the
+% rest with a single option.
+%
+% Additionally, the edition numbers may be
+% output as words (first, second, etc.) or as numbers (1st, 2nd, etc.).
+% (Recall that the input in the \texttt{.bib} file is always as English
+% words.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES'
+ (if not using external language file)}
+ {\if!\cfile!\relax*\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{}{`Page(s)'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{pp}{`Page' abbreviated}{as p. or pp.}
+\optdef{x}{ppx}{`Page' omitted}{}
+\getans
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`Editor(s)'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{ed}{`Editor' abbreviated}{as ed. or eds.}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of volume, edition, chapter, etc}
+\optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION'
+ (if abbreviating words)}
+ {\if\ans a*\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{}{`Edition' abbreviated as `edn'}{}
+\optdef{a}{ednx}{`Edition' abbreviated as `ed'}{}
+\getans
+\beginoptiongroup{MONTHS WITH DOTS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Months with dots}{as Jan.}
+\optdef{x}{mth-bare}{Months without dots}{as Feb Mar}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory}
+\optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as first, second, third, etc}
+\optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The above choices about abbreviations are made only if the internal
+% languages are taken (English or \texttt{babel}). For an external language
+% definition file, these choices, along with possible other ones, are made
+% in the external file, which is read in at this point.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\umes{Reading external language file \string\cfile=\cfile}%
+\if!\cfile!\relax\else
+ \input\cfile
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This file contains the standard set of stored journal names present in
+% the basic bibliography style files. If other files containing journal
+% names are to be included, they may only contain the options \texttt{jabr}
+% or \texttt{jaa} since these options are selected here. No option
+% menus from the journal-name files will be read in.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{STORED JOURNAL NAMES:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Full journal names}{for prestored journals}
+\optdef{a}{jabr}{Abbreviated journal names}{}
+\optdef{s}{jabr,jaa}{Abbreviated with astronomy shorthands}{like ApJ and AJ}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Variations on \textsl{and}}
+% It is possible to replace the word \textsl{and} with an ampersand \&, and to
+% specify whether a comma is to precede \textsl{and} in a list of more than two
+% names.
+%
+% A variable \textsl{and} may be provided for with the command |\BIBand|
+% in place of the word. In this case, the command must be defined in the
+% document file or some other package called. (This is intended for situations
+% where an ampersand is wanted in parenthetical citations, but the word in
+% textual ones.)
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{AMPERSAND:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Use word `and'}{in author lists}
+\optdef{a}{amper}{Use ampersand}{in place of `and'}
+\optdef{v}{varand}{Use \string\BIBand}{in place of `and'}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{COMMA BEFORE `AND':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Comma before `and'}{as `Tom, Dick, and Harry'}
+\optdef{n}{and-xcom}{No comma before `and'}{as `Tom, Dick and Harry'}
+\optdef{c}{and-com}{Comma even with 2 authors}{as `Tom, and Harry'}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{COMMA BEFORE `AND' EVEN FOR COLLECTION EDITORS
+ (if using comma before `and' with authors)}
+ {\if\ans c*\fi}%
+\optdef{*}{and-com-ed}{Comma with 2 editors}{in collections}
+\optdef{x}{}{Two editors without comma}{as `Tom and Harry'}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{NO `AND' IN REFERENCE LIST:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{With `and'}{before last author in reference list}
+\optdef{x}{xand}{No `and'}{as `Tom, Dick, Harry'}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+
+\beginoptiongroup{COMMA BEFORE `ET AL':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Comma before `et al'}{in reference list}
+\optdef{x}{etal-xc}{No comma before `et al'}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Font of \textsl{et al}}
+% One can chose that \textsl{et~al.}\ be put into italics.
+% Or, if the authors are in a different font from the regular one, the
+% \textsl{et~al.}\ can still be Roman.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{FONT OF `ET AL':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Plain et al}{}
+\optdef{i}{etal-it}{Italic et al}{}
+\optdef{r}{etal-rm}{Roman et al}{even when authors something else}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Additional Data Fields}\label{sec:revtex}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add the revdata option group}
+% The American Physical Society's REV\TeX\ package contains \btx\ support
+% with a \texttt{bst} file generated from a variant of
+% \texttt{\filename}. The extra fields are also available here.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \textbf{collaboration}: A collaboration name associated with a
+% reference.
+% \item \textbf{eprint}: The e-print citation for the reference (Los Alamos
+% or otherwise). E-print numbers can be turned into hyperlinks to the
+% online article. The output is\\
+%    \hspace*{2em}|\eprint{|\textit{eprint-spec}|}|
+% \item \textbf{archive}: is an optional argument for |\eprint|, as\\
+%    \hspace*{2em}|\eprint[|\textit{archive-des}|]{|\textit{eprint-spec}|}|\\
+% The \textit{archive-des} is some code such as \texttt{arXiv} that is
+% translated to a base URL by a class or package file. The default definition
+% of |\eprint| ignores \textit{archive-des} and prints \textit{eprint-spec}
+% as a URL.
+% \item \textbf{url}: A URL associated with the reference. Can be turned
+% into a hyperlink.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% A collaboration appears as part of the author list and the other two
+% appear at the end of the citaton. The URL field can be selected
+% independently of this option.
+%
+% In addition there are new fields for journals like Phys.\ Rev.~D that
+% no longer use page numbers.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \textbf{eid}: Electronic article identifier.
+% \item \textbf{numpages}: Number of pages in an article. For use in
+% conjunction with the \textbf{eid} field when page counts are
+% desired. Deprecated when submitting to Phys.\ Rev.
+%
+% The \texttt{eprint} (with \texttt{archive}) and \texttt{url} fields may be
+% included independently of the other REV\TeX\ fields.
+%
+% The \texttt{eid} field is now always included, although it is optional for
+% the bibliography entries. This electronic identifier is a replacement for the
+% page number in electronic journals: it is the sequence number in the printed
+% volume. If present, it will be used in place of the page number.
+%
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{No additional fields}{for REVTeX}
+\optdef{r}{revdata,eprint,url,url-blk}{Include REVTeX data fields}
+ {collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, numpages, url}
+\getans
+\mytemptrue
+\if\ans r\mytempfalse\fi
+\beginoptiongroup{E-PRINT DATA FIELD:
+(without REVTeX fields)}
+{\ifmytemp*\fi}
+\optdef{*}{}{Do not include eprint field}{}
+\optdef{e}{eprint}{Include eprint and archive fields}{for electronic publications}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{URL address}
+% For electronic documents with an Internet address, add a URL entry.
+% Harvard already has this, but here it is done for all styles.
+% The URL text will be set with the \verb!\url! command in the \texttt{url}
+% package by Donald Arseneau. This package must be loaded for the command
+% to work right. It allows line breaks at punctuations. Otherwise,
+% \verb!\texttt! is used instead, with no line breaks. The URL text is preceded
+% by \verb!\urlprefix! which defaults to ``URL '' but may be redefined by the
+% user to be whatever s/he wants. The final space must be included.
+%
+% Note: selecting the REV\TeX\ fields automatically includes this, so the
+% offer only is made if REV\TeX\ has been rejected.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{URL ADDRESS:
+(without REVTeX fields)}{\ifmytemp*\fi}
+\optdef{*}{}{No URL}{for electronic (Internet) documents}
+\optdef{u}{url,url-blk}{Include URL}{as regular item block}
+\optdef{n}{url,url-nt}{URL as note}{}
+\optdef{l}{url,url-nl}{URL on new line}{after rest of reference}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Reference Component Tagging}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add the bibinfo option group}
+% If reference component tagging is enabled, we
+% apply tags like |\bibinfo| and |\eprint| to the fields of data
+% in the content of the |\bibitem| statement. We also ensure that
+% these commands have a default meaning within the scope of the |thebibliography|
+% environment. The default definitions simply print the field and ignore the
+% tag. However, other programs or packages might make use of the tag
+% information to separate authors from title, for example.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{No reference component tags}
+ {in the \string\bibitem\space entries}
+\optdef{b}{bibinfo}{Reference component tags}
+ {like \string\bibinfo\space in the content of \string\bibitem}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Define emphasis}
+% In everything that been mentioned so far, italicization should be
+% understood to mean `emphasize' in the \LaTeX{} sense. This means that the
+% command |\em| is used. This is not the same as |\it|, which is always
+% italics. Rather, with |\em|, the font style switches between |\rm| and
+% |\it| depending on the context. Here one may choose to true italics, or
+% to switch off italics altogether.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{EMPHASIS:
+ (affects all so-called italics)}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{Use emphasis}{ie, \string\em, allows font switching}
+\optdef{i}{em-it}{Use true italics}{ie, \string\it, absolute italics}
+\optdef{x}{em-x}{No italics}{at all}
+\optdef{u}{em-ul}{Underlining}{in place of italics, best with ulem package}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection*{Plain \TeX\ compatibility}
+% Bold face, italics, and emphasis are made with the \LaTeXe\ commands,
+% which makes them incompatible with the obsolete \LaTeX2.09, and with
+% Plain \TeX. There are also some extra testing for existing commands
+% that best work with \LaTeXe\ syntax.
+%
+% If the bibliography style file is to be fully compatible with Plain \TeX,
+% do not select the option \texttt{nfss} but do take \texttt{plntx}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\beginoptiongroup{COMPATIBILITY WITH PLAIN TEX:}{}
+\optdef{*}{nfss}{Use LaTeX commands}{which may not work with Plain TeX}
+\optdef{t}{plntx}{Use only Plain TeX}{commands for fonts and testing}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Terminate the options list. If a language definition file has been called,
+% then we have a closing brace too many, so add another dummy opening brace.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if!\cfile\jfile!\else
+\begingroup\MBswitch
+\wr(,{\pc)
+\endgroup
+\fi
+
+\endoptions
+%</options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
+%
+% \section{The Bibliographic Coding}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!options&!driver&!bblbst>
+%<*!tail>
+ %   For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+%<*(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))>
+ %  WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING
+ %  The input dbj file contains one of the options
+%<nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def> %        nmft-it, nmft-bf, nmft-sc, or nmft-def
+%<lab-it|lab-sc|lab-bf|lab-def> %        lab-it, lab-bf, lab-sc, or lab-def
+ %  without the corresponding general option(s):
+%<nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def> %              nmft
+%<lab-it|lab-sc|lab-bf|lab-def> %              lab
+ %  (You may be using an older dbj with a newer version of merlin.mbs)
+ %  Please edit your dbj file to add the general option(s) and reprocess.
+ %
+%</(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))>
+%<*!exlang>
+%<!babel> % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH
+%<*babel>
+ % This bibliography style file requires a file named  babelbst.tex
+ %   containing the definitions of word commands like \bbleditor, etc.
+%</babel>
+%</!exlang>
+%<*exlang>
+ % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in
+%<bahasa> %   BAHASA
+%<brazilian> %   BRAZILIAN
+%<catalan> %   CATALAN
+%<croatian> %   CROATIAN
+%<czech> %   CZECH
+%<danish> %   DANISH
+%<dansk> %   DANSK
+%<dutch> %   DUTCH
+%<english> %   ENGLISH
+%<esperanto> %   ESPERANTO
+%<finnish> %   FINNISH
+%<french> %   FRENCH
+%<galacian> %   GALACIAN
+%<german> %   GERMAN
+%<hungarian> %   HUNGARIAN
+%<italian> %   ITALIAN
+%<norwegian> %   NORWEGIAN
+%<norsk> %   NORWEGIAN
+%<polski> %   POLISH
+%<polish> %   POLISH
+%<portuguese> %   PORTUGUESE
+%<romanian> %   ROMANIAN
+%<russian> %   RUSSIAN
+%<slovak> %   SLOVAK
+%<slovenian> %   SLOVENIAN
+%<slovene> %   SLOVENIAN
+%<spanish> %   SPANISH
+%<swedish> %   SWEDISH
+%<turkish> %   TURKISH
+%</exlang>
+%<*!html>
+%<*ay>
+ % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is
+ % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly.
+ % Such a package is    natbib.sty   by Patrick W. Daly
+%<*alk>
+ % or:                  apalike.sty  by Oren Patashnik
+ % The form of the \bibitem entries is
+ %   \bibitem[Jones et al., 1990]{key}...
+%</alk>
+%<*!(har|ast|alk|cay|nmd|cn)>
+ % The form of the \bibitem entries is
+ %   \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}...
+%<nat> %   \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}...
+ % The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists
+ % of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year
+ % in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening
+ % parenthesis!
+%<nat> % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year.
+ % In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is
+ % really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must
+ % be parentheses in the label.
+ % The \cite command functions as follows:
+ %   \citet{key} ==>>                Jones et al. (1990)
+%<nat> %   \citet*{key} ==>>               Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990)
+ %   \citep{key} ==>>                (Jones et al., 1990)
+%<nat> %   \citep*{key} ==>>               (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990)
+ %   \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>>       (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2)
+ %   \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>>        (e.g. Jones et al., 1990)
+ %   \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>>   (e.g. Jones et al., p. 32)
+ %   \citeauthor{key} ==>>           Jones et al.
+%<nat> %   \citeauthor*{key} ==>>          Jones, Baker, and Smith
+ %   \citeyear{key} ==>>             1990
+%</!(har|ast|alk|cay|nmd|cn)>
+%<*har>
+ % or:                  harvard.sty  by Peter Williams and Thorsten Schnier
+%<harnm> % (needs natbib v5.3  or  harvard v2.0.3)
+ % The form of the bibitem entries is
+ %   \harvarditem[Jones et al.]{Jones, Baker, and Smith}{1990}{key}...
+%</har>
+%<*cay>
+ % or:                  chicago.sty
+ % The form of the bibitem entries is
+ %   \bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Jones, Baker, and Smith}
+ %        {Jones et al.}{1990}{key}...
+%</cay>
+%<*nmd>
+ % or:                  named.sty
+ % The form of the bibitem entries is
+ %   \bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Jones et al.}{1990}]{key}...
+%</nmd>
+%<*ast>
+ % or:                  astron.sty
+ % The form of the bibitem entries is
+ %   \bibitem[\protect\astroncite{Jones et al.}{1990}]{key}...
+%</ast>
+%<*cn>
+ % or:                  authordate1-4.sty
+ % The form of the bibitem entries is
+ %   \bibitem[\protect\citename{Jones et al.}1990]{key}...
+%</cn>
+%</ay>
+%<*!ay>
+%<*!alph&!cite>
+ % This is a numerical citation style, and as such is standard LaTeX.
+%</!alph&!cite>
+%<*alph>
+ % This is a labelled citation style similar to the standard alpha.bst,
+ %   where labels are of the form Dal90 or DBK89.
+%</alph>
+%<*cite&!alph>
+ % This is a special pseudo-numerical bibliography style, intended to be
+ %   used to list all the entries in a bib database
+%</cite&!alph>
+ % It requires no extra package to interface to the main text.
+ % The form of the \bibitem entries is
+%<!alph&!cite> %   \bibitem{key}...
+%<alph> %   \bibitem[label]{key}...
+%<!alph&cite> %   \bibitem[key]{key}...
+%<*!cite|alph>
+ % Usage of \cite is as follows:
+%<*!alph&!cite>
+ %   \cite{key} ==>>          [#]
+ %   \cite[chap. 2]{key} ==>> [#, chap. 2]
+ % where # is a number determined by the ordering in the reference list.
+%</!alph&!cite>
+%<*alph>
+ %   \cite{key} ==>>          [label]
+ %   \cite[chap. 2]{key} ==>> [label, chap. 2]
+ % The order in the reference list is by label.
+%</alph>
+%<*seq-no&!alph>
+ % The order in the reference list is that by which the works were originally
+ %   cited in the text, or that in the database.
+%</seq-no&!alph>
+%<*!seq-no&!alph>
+ % The order in the reference list is alphabetical by authors.
+%</!seq-no&!alph>
+%</!cite|alph>
+%</!ay>
+%</!html>
+%<*html>
+ % This bibliographic style file produces HTML output instead of LaTeX.
+ % The LaTeX special characters are not translated, so that the output
+ % (which has the .bbl ending still) will have to be further massaged,
+ % and renamed with .html or .htm. The title and heading may also need
+ % to be revised.
+ %
+%<htlist&!htdes> % The output is a numbered list.
+%<htdes> % The output is an unnumbered list with the keys printed
+%<htdes> % before each entry.
+%<!htlist&!htdes> % The output is lists each entry as one paragraph.
+%</html>
+ %---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`ENTRY'}
+% \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add URL entry type for \texttt{harnm} option}
+%  The new \texttt{harvard.sty} of \LaTeXe{} includes an entry URL, or
+%  rather it is included in the new \texttt{.bst} files for it. Add it
+%  here too, but only for option \texttt{harnm}.
+%
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 1}{Add optional entries \texttt{isbn}}
+% Books normally have an ISBN number.
+% This entry is (optionally) included, modelled after that in
+% \texttt{xbtxbst.doc}.
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add the \texttt{revdata} data}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ENTRY
+  { address
+%<annote>    annote
+%<eprint>    archive
+    author
+    booktitle
+    chapter
+%<revdata>    collaboration
+%<doi>    doi
+    edition
+    editor
+    eid
+%<eprint>    eprint
+    howpublished
+    institution
+%<isbn>    isbn
+%<issn>    issn
+    journal
+    key
+%<lang>    language
+    month
+    note
+    number
+%<revdata>    numpages
+    organization
+    pages
+    publisher
+    school
+    series
+    title
+    type
+%<url|harnm|revdata>    url
+    volume
+    year
+  }
+  {}
+%<!ay&!alph>  { label }
+%<!ay&alph>  { label extra.label sort.label }
+%<ay>  { label extra.label sort.label short.list }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`init.state.consts'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {init.state.consts}
+{ #0 'before.all :=
+  #1 'mid.sentence :=
+  #2 'after.sentence :=
+  #3 'after.block :=
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% |s| and |t| are general-purpose scratch registers whose value does not persist
+% past the end of a function. They also do not appear to be used to communicate
+% between functions or to be clobbered within a sub-function call. Hopefully.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+STRINGS { s t}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`output.nonnull'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {output.nonnull}
+{ 's :=
+  output.state mid.sentence =
+%<!blk-com|(!com-semi&!com-blank)>    { ", " * write$ }
+%<blk-com&com-semi>    { "; " * write$ }
+%<blk-com&!com-semi&com-blank>    { " " * write$ }
+    { output.state after.block =
+        { add.period$ write$
+          newline$
+%<!html>          "\newblock " write$
+        }
+        { output.state before.all =
+            'write$
+            { add.period$ " " * write$ }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+      mid.sentence 'output.state :=
+    }
+  if$
+  s
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`output'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {output}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    'pop$
+    'output.nonnull
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`output.check'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {output.check}
+{ 't :=
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+    'output.nonnull
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`fin.entry'}
+% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Add annotation}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: make ``babel compatible''}
+% I have often been asked to add an annotation function. This suggestion is
+% from Soren Dayton; it inputs a file with the same name as the cite key, or
+% uses the text in the \texttt{annote} field. It will only work with \LaTeXe.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {fin.entry}
+%<*!fin-bare>
+{ add.period$
+  write$
+%</!fin-bare>
+%<*fin-bare>
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    'pop$
+    'write$
+  if$
+%</fin-bare>
+%<html&htdes>  "</dd>" write$
+%<html&!htdes&htlist>  "</li>" write$
+%<html&!htdes&!htlist>  "</p>" write$
+  newline$
+%<*annote>
+%<*!html>
+  annote missing$
+    { "\bibAnnoteFile{" cite$ * "}" * write$ newline$ }
+    { "\bibAnnote{" cite$ * "}{" * annote * "}" * write$ newline$
+    }
+  if$
+%</!html>
+%<*html>
+  "<blockquote><strong>Key:</strong> "
+  cite$ * write$
+  annote missing$
+    { newline$ }
+    { "<br><strong>Annotation:</strong>" write$ newline$
+      annote write$ newline$
+    }
+  if$
+  "</blockquote>" write$ newline$
+%</html>
+%</annote>
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`new.block'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {new.block}
+{ output.state before.all =
+    'skip$
+    { after.block 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`new.sentence'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {new.sentence}
+{ output.state after.block =
+    'skip$
+    { output.state before.all =
+        'skip$
+        { after.sentence 'output.state := }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`add.blank'}
+% \changes{1.5(2.3)b}{1995 Jan 10}{Add function}
+% When text is printed with \texttt{output} or
+% \texttt{output.check}, the \texttt{output.state} is set such that
+% a comma will precede the next output text. For special effects, we want to
+% suppress this comma, inserting a blank instead. Hence the
+% \texttt{output.state} is changed to \texttt{before.all}, meaning no
+% punctuation is to be inserted.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {add.blank}
+{  " " * before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`add.colon'}
+% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add macro}
+% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 5}{Simplify: just tack on colon}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*au-col|tit-col>
+FUNCTION {add.colon}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { ":" * add.blank }
+  if$
+}
+
+%</au-col|tit-col>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`no.blank.or.punct'}
+% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Add function}
+% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 30}{Present only for option \texttt{yrpp-xsp}}
+% Another frill is to suppresss both blanks and punctuation. The |\hspace|
+% permits a line break at this point.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*yrpp-xsp>
+FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct}
+%<*!html>
+{  "\hspace{0pt}" * before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+%</!html>
+%<html>{  before.all 'output.state := }
+
+%</yrpp-xsp>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`date.block'}
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 9}{Add function}
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 25}{Add option \texttt{yrp-per}}
+% The \texttt{date.block} function is used for special punctuating effects
+% after the date.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {date.block}
+{
+%<*!yrp-x>
+%<yrp-col>  ":" *
+%<*!yrp-col>
+%<yrp-semi>  ";" *
+%<*!yrp-semi>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&!yrp-per>  skip$
+%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&yrp-per>  new.sentence
+%</!yrp-semi>
+%</!yrp-col>
+%</!yrp-x>
+%<*yrp-x|yrp-col|yrp-semi>
+%<!yrpp-xsp>  add.blank
+%<yrpp-xsp>  no.blank.or.punct
+%</yrp-x|yrp-col|yrp-semi>
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`not'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {not}
+{   { #0 }
+    { #1 }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`and'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {and}
+{   'skip$
+    { pop$ #0 }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`or'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {or}
+{   { pop$ #1 }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`non.stop'}
+% \changes{1.4(2.2)a}{1994 Sep 8}{Add to test if last character
+%   is punctuation: . ! ?}
+% This function (my invention) tests if the last character in the string
+% on the stack is \texttt{. ! ?} by using \texttt{add.period\$}. It is to
+% be used for conditional italic correction or adding commas.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!tit-it&tit-qq>
+FUNCTION {non.stop}
+{ duplicate$
+   "}" * add.period$
+   #-1 #1 substring$ "." =
+}
+
+%</!tit-it&tit-qq>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`remove.dots'}
+% \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 8}{Add macro}
+% This macro removes any periods from the string on the stack. To be used
+% for undotting journal names, months, and juniors. Previously
+% \texttt{purify\$} was used for this, but that removes more than just
+% dots.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|mth-bare|jxper>
+STRINGS {z}
+FUNCTION {remove.dots}
+{ 'z :=
+  ""
+  { z empty$ not }
+  { z #1 #1 substring$
+    z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z :=
+    duplicate$ "." = 'pop$
+      { * }
+    if$
+  }
+  while$
+}
+%</nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|mth-bare|jxper>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`new.block.checka'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!ay>
+FUNCTION {new.block.checka}
+{ empty$
+    'skip$
+    'new.block
+  if$
+}
+%</!ay>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`new.block.checkb'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {new.block.checkb}
+{ empty$
+  swap$ empty$
+  and
+    'skip$
+    'new.block
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`new.sentence.checka'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!ay>
+FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka}
+{ empty$
+    'skip$
+    'new.sentence
+  if$
+}
+%</!ay>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`new.sentence.checkb'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!ay>
+FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb}
+{ empty$
+  swap$ empty$
+  and
+    'skip$
+    'new.sentence
+  if$
+}
+%</!ay>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`field.or.null'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {field.or.null}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`emphasize'}
+% Emphasis can be either italic or the alternating font. The font command
+% may be NFSS or regular \LaTeX~2.09 declarations.
+%\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Add \texttt{nfss} option}
+%\changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 20}{Add \texttt{em-ul} option}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {emphasize}
+%<*!em-x>
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+%<html>    { "<i>" swap$ * "</i>" * }
+%<*!html>
+%<em-ul>    { "\uline{" swap$ * "}" * }
+%<*!em-ul>
+%<*!nfss>
+%<!em-it>    { "{\em " swap$ * "\/}" * }
+%<em-it>    { "{\it " swap$ * "\/}" * }
+%</!nfss>
+%<*nfss>
+%<!em-it>    { "\emph{" swap$ * "}" * }
+%<em-it>    { "\textit{" swap$ * "}" * }
+%</nfss>
+%</!em-ul>
+%</!html>
+  if$
+}
+%</!em-x>
+%<em-x>{ skip$ }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`bolden'}
+% The bold font command may be NFSS or the regular \LaTeX~2.09 declaration.
+%\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Add \texttt{nfss} option}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*nmft-bf|vol-bf|vol-2bf|lab-bf|dtbf>
+FUNCTION {bolden}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+%<html>    { "<b>" swap$ * "</b>" * }
+%<*!html>
+%<!nfss>    { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * }
+%<nfss>    { "\textbf{" swap$ * "}" * }
+%</!html>
+  if$
+}
+%</nmft-bf|vol-bf|vol-2bf|lab-bf|dtbf>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`scaps'}
+% To put text into small caps.
+%\changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 3}{Add function}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*lab-sc|nmft-sc>
+FUNCTION {scaps}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "" }
+%<html>    { skip$ }
+%<*!html>
+%<!nfss>    { "{\sc " swap$ * "}" * }
+%<nfss>    { "\textsc{" swap$ * "}" * }
+%</!html>
+  if$
+}
+%</lab-sc|nmft-sc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`roman.list'}
+% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add function}
+% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Remove function}
+% \begin{macro}{`roman.cite'}
+% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 16}{Add function}
+% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Remove function}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`bib.name.font'}
+% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Add macro}
+% \begin{macro}{`bib.fname.font'}
+% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Add macro}
+% \begin{macro}{`cite.name.font'}
+% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 6}{Add macro}
+% Define functions for formatting the author/editor names, one for the
+% surnames (\texttt{bib.name.font}) and one for the first names
+% (\texttt{bib.fname.font}). These could be identical, or the latter is
+% deactivated if first names are not to be formatted, only the last names.
+%
+% For citations, we have \texttt{cite.name.font}. Here only surnames appear.
+%
+% It is also possible to have a user-defined font command for each, which the
+% user must define in his work. These are |\bibnamefont{}| and |\bibfnamefont{}|,
+% and some defaults are provided that simply repeat the arguments. Two commands
+% are needed if \texttt{nmft-def} and \texttt{fnm-def} are both given.
+%
+% If neither \texttt{fnm-def} nor \texttt{fnm-rm} are given, then the first names
+% are formatted the same as the surnames.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*nmft>
+FUNCTION {bib.name.font}
+%<nmft-it>{ emphasize }
+%<!nmft-it&nmft-bf>{ bolden }
+%<!nmft-it&!nmft-bf&nmft-sc>{ scaps }
+%<*!nmft-it&!nmft-bf&!nmft-sc&nmft-def>
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+  { pop$ "" }
+%<!html>  { "\bibnamefont{" swap$ * "}" * }
+%<html>  { skip$ }
+  if$
+}
+%</!nmft-it&!nmft-bf&!nmft-sc&nmft-def>
+FUNCTION {bib.fname.font}
+%<!fnm-rm&!fnm-def>{ bib.name.font }
+%<fnm-rm>{ skip$ }
+%<*!fnm-rm&fnm-def>
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+  { pop$ "" }
+%<!html>  { "\bibfnamefont{" swap$ * "}" * }
+%<html>  { skip$ }
+  if$
+}
+%</!fnm-rm&fnm-def>
+%</nmft>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*lab>
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font}
+%<lab-it>{ emphasize }
+%<!lab-it&lab-bf>{ bolden }
+%<!lab-it&!lab-bf&lab-sc>{ scaps }
+%<*!lab-it&!lab-bf&!lab-sc&lab-def>
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+  { pop$ "" }
+%<!html>  { "\citenamefont{" swap$ * "}" * }
+%<html>  { skip$ }
+  if$
+}
+%</!lab-it&!lab-bf&!lab-sc&lab-def>
+%</lab>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`tie.or.space.prefix'}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: replace \texttt{tie.or.space.connect} with
+%   more flexible function}
+% The function \texttt{tie.or.space.prefix} determines whether
+% the top item on the stack requires a tie character and
+% slips that (or a space character if not) ahead of it.
+% At this point a font switch or other function can be applied to
+% the top item on the stack, and the appropriate space found
+% just ahead of it on the stack.
+%
+% The sequence \texttt{tie.or.space.prefix} \texttt{*} \texttt{*} is a common idiom
+% for joining the top two stack objects with a tie or space
+% depending on the length of the top object.
+%
+% Another idiom is to apply \texttt{tie.or.space.prefix}, apply a font switch,
+% and then swap and join. In this case the tie or space follows the object.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}
+{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
+    { "~" }
+    { " " }
+  if$
+  swap$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`capitalize'}
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 7}{Add capitalizing function}
+% Capitalizing is easy for regular languages, but for \texttt{babel},
+% some trickery stuff is needed; definitions of |\capitalize| and
+% |\Capitalize| are written to the \texttt{.bbl} file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+
+FUNCTION {capitalize}
+%<!babel>{ "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$ }
+%<babel>{ "\capitalize" swap$ * }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`space.word'}
+% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to space out words; necessary
+%          for the multilingual functions.}
+% The function \texttt{space.word} adds a space before and after the word or
+% words currently on the stack. This was added for the \texttt{bbl.}$nnn$
+% functions, that contain only a word without spacing, but replace explicit
+% text in the originals that were spaced out. Its seems more flexible to
+% define the word functions to be without spacing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {space.word}
+{ " " swap$ * " " * }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words.
+ % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word.
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!exlang>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`bbl.xxx'}
+% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Replace all explicit words with functions
+%     of the form \texttt{bbl.xxx}.}
+% \changes{3.6}{1996 Jan 15}{Add option \texttt{varand}}
+% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{ednx}}
+% \changes{3.83}{1997 Jun 9}{Make \texttt{\char`\\BIBand} protected}
+% \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{bbl.etal}}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add \texttt{bbl.eidpp}}
+% These are the default English words. There is no default language
+% option: one of \texttt{english} or \texttt{babel} must be given.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!babel>
+ % The language selected here is ENGLISH
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+%<!varand|html>{ "and"}
+%<varand&!html>{ "\protect\BIBand{}"}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{ "et~al." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+%<!ed>{ "editors" }
+%<ed>{ "eds." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+%<!ed>{ "editor" }
+%<ed>{ "ed." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "edited by" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+%<!abr>{ "edition" }
+%<abr&!ednx>{ "edn." }
+%<abr&ednx>{ "ed." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+%<!abr>{ "volume" }
+%<abr>{ "vol." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "of" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+%<!abr>{ "number" }
+%<abr>{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "in" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "pages" }
+%<pp>{ "pp." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "page" }
+%<pp>{ "p." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+%<*revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "pages" }
+
+%</revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+%<!abr>{ "chapter" }
+%<abr>{ "chap." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+%<!abr>{ "Technical Report" }
+%<abr>{ "Tech. Rep." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Master's thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Ph.D. thesis" }
+
+%<*!xedn>
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+%<!ord>{ "First" }
+%<ord>{ "1st" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+%<!ord>{ "Second" }
+%<ord>{ "2nd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+%<!ord>{ "Third" }
+%<ord>{ "3rd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+%<!ord>{ "Fourth" }
+%<ord>{ "4th" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+%<!ord>{ "Fifth" }
+%<ord>{ "5th" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.st}
+{ "st" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
+{ "nd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
+{ "rd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "th" }
+
+%</!xedn>
+%<*!abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"January"}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"February"}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"March"}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"April"}
+
+MACRO {may} {"May"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"June"}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"July"}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"August"}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"September"}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"October"}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"November"}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"December"}
+
+%</!abr>
+%<*abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"May"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
+
+%</abr>
+%</!babel>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here are the definitions for \texttt{babel} option, i.e., explicit
+% translations are not used, but rather only \LaTeX{} macros that must be
+% defined in the file \texttt{babelbst.tex}. This could allow automatic
+% language selection.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*babel>
+ % The BABEL language selection is made here; definitions in babelbst.tex.
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{ "\bbland{}"}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{ "\bbletal{}"}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+%<!ed>{ "\bbleditors{}" }
+%<ed>{ "\bbleds{}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+%<!ed>{ "\bbleditor{}" }
+%<ed>{ "\bbled{}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "\bbledby{}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+%<!abr>{ "\bbledition{}" }
+%<abr>{ "\bbledn{}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+%<!abr>{ "\bblvolume{}" }
+%<abr>{ "\bblvol{}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "\bblof{}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+%<!abr>{ "\bblnumber{}" }
+%<abr>{ "\bblno{}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "\bblno{}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "\bblin{}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "\bblpages{}" }
+%<pp>{ "\bblpp{}" }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "\bblpage{}" }
+%<pp>{ "\bblp{}" }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+%<!abr>{ "\bblchapter{}" }
+%<abr>{ "\bblchap{}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+%<!abr>{ "\bbltechreport{}" }
+%<abr>{ "\bbltechrep{}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "\bblmthesis{}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "\bblphdthesis{}" }
+
+%<*revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "\bbleidpp{}" }
+
+%</revdata>
+%<*!xedn>
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+%<!ord>{ "\bblfirst{}" }
+%<ord>{ "\bblfirsto{}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+%<!ord>{ "\bblsecond{}" }
+%<ord>{ "\bblsecondo{}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+%<!ord>{ "\bblthird{}" }
+%<ord>{ "\bblthirdo{}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+%<!ord>{ "\bblfourth{}" }
+%<ord>{ "\bblfourtho{}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+%<!ord>{ "\bblfifth{}" }
+%<ord>{ "\bblfiftho{}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.st}
+{ "\bblst{}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
+{ "\bblnd{}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
+{ "\bblrd{}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "\bblth{}" }
+
+%</!xedn>
+MACRO {jan} {"\bbljan{}"}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"\bblfeb{}"}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"\bblmar{}"}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"\bblapr{}"}
+
+MACRO {may} {"\bblmay{}"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"\bbljun{}"}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"\bbljul{}"}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"\bblaug{}"}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"\bblsep{}"}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"\bbloct{}"}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"\bblnov{}"}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"\bbldec{}"}
+
+%</babel>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`eng.ord'}
+% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to format English ordinals.}
+% This function adds English endings for ordinals 1, 2, 3. However, if
+% the second last digit is 1, then the ending is `th' for all last digits.
+% So far, all other languages included do not have this problem, and it is
+% sufficient to add the \textsl{th} equivalent. This might change with further
+% languages.
+%
+% This function must be included with \texttt{babel} too, since that includes
+% English. This means that the language definition files must also provide
+% for |\bblst|, |\bblnd|, and |\bblrd|, setting them all equal to |\bblth|.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*(english|!exlang)&!xedn>
+FUNCTION {eng.ord}
+{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ *
+  #-2 #1 substring$ "1" =
+     { bbl.th * }
+     { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$
+       duplicate$ "1" =
+         { pop$ bbl.st * }
+         { duplicate$ "2" =
+             { pop$ bbl.nd * }
+             { "3" =
+                 { bbl.rd * }
+                 { bbl.th * }
+               if$
+             }
+           if$
+          }
+       if$
+     }
+   if$
+}
+
+%</(english|!exlang)&!xedn>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</!exlang>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</!tail>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!head>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!jabr>
+MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"}
+
+MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"}
+
+MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"}
+
+MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"}
+
+MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"}
+
+MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"}
+
+MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"}
+
+MACRO {ieeetcad}
+ {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"}
+
+MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"}
+
+MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"}
+
+MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"}
+
+MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"}
+
+MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"}
+
+MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"}
+
+MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"}
+
+MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"}
+
+MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"}
+
+MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"}
+
+MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"}
+
+MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"}
+%</!jabr>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 8}{Revise journal abbreviations}
+% Journal abbreviations have been revised from the original Patashnik
+% ones with help of Conrado Badenas and the IUA recommendations.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*jabr>
+MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."}
+
+MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."}
+
+MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"}
+
+MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."}
+
+MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."}
+
+MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetcad}
+ {"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."}
+
+MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."}
+
+MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"}
+
+MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."}
+
+MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."}
+
+MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."}
+
+MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"}
+
+MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."}
+
+%</jabr>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`bibinfo.check'}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO:
+%   add functions \texttt{bibinfo.check}, \texttt{bibinfo.warn},
+%   and \texttt{format.eprint}}
+%   Define functions that encapsulate the argument
+% in a \TeX\ macro that allows for further processing when the
+% bibliography is processed, or allows for a separate computer
+% program to parse the |\bibitem| contents.
+%
+% The following table summarizes how each of the \btx{} entries
+% is accessed for output; these are the points where
+% the \texttt{format.bibinfo} or \texttt{bibinfo.check} functions
+% are called.
+% \subsubsection*{Trapped via \texttt{format.bibinfo}}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[  \texttt{author}        ]\texttt{format.names}
+% \item[  \texttt{collaboration} ]\texttt{format.authors}
+% \item[  \texttt{doi}           ]\texttt{format.doi}
+% \item[  \texttt{editor}        ]\texttt{format.editors} (\texttt{book}, \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{proceedings}), \texttt{format.names.ed} (\texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle})
+% \item[  \texttt{eid}           ]\texttt{format.journal.eid} (\texttt{format.vol.num.pages}, article) checks the output from \texttt{format.journal.pages}
+% \item[  \texttt{isbn}          ]\texttt{format.isbn}
+% \item[  \texttt{issn}          ]\texttt{format.issn}
+% \item[  \texttt{journal}       ]\texttt{format.article.crossref}, article
+% \item[  \texttt{numpages}      ]\texttt{format.journal.eid}
+% \item[  \texttt{organization}  ]\texttt{format.organization.address} (\texttt{inproceedings}, \texttt{proceedings}), \texttt{manual}
+% \item[  \texttt{pages}         ]\texttt{format.book}.pages (\texttt{book}, \texttt{booklet}), \texttt{format.pages} (\texttt{format.journal.pages}, \texttt{format.chapter.pages}, \texttt{article}, \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{incollection}, \texttt{inproceedings})
+% \item[  \texttt{publisher}     ]\texttt{format.publisher.address} (like \texttt{output.check}, \texttt{inproceedings}, \texttt{proceedings})
+% \item[  \texttt{title}         ]\texttt{format.title}, \texttt{format.btitle}, \texttt{misc}, \texttt{presort}, \texttt{bib.sort.order}
+% \item[  \texttt{volume}        ]\texttt{format.bvolume}, \texttt{format.vol.num.pages}, \texttt{format.book.crossref}
+% \item[  \texttt{year}          ]in optional argument of \texttt{\char`\\bibitem}, \texttt{format.date} (as part of date), \texttt{format.year}, \texttt{format.org.or.pub}
+% \item[  \texttt{booktitle}     ]\texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle} (\texttt{incollection}, \texttt{inproceedings}), \texttt{format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
+% \item[  \texttt{howpublished}  ]\texttt{booklet}, \texttt{misc}
+% \item[  \texttt{edition}       ]\texttt{convert.edition.format.edition}
+% \item[  \texttt{institution}   ]\texttt{techreport}
+% \item[  \texttt{school}        ]\texttt{mastersthesis}, \texttt{phdthesis}
+% \item[  \texttt{address}       ]\texttt{format.org.or.pub}, \texttt{booklet}, \texttt{manual}, \texttt{mastersthesis}, \texttt{phdthesis}, \texttt{techreport}
+% \item[  \texttt{chapter}       ]\texttt{format.chapter.pages}
+% \item[  \texttt{number}        ]\texttt{format.number.series}, \texttt{format.vol.num.pages}, \texttt{format.tr.number}
+% \item[  \texttt{series}        ]\texttt{format.bvolume}, \texttt{format.number.series}, \texttt{format.book.crossref}
+% \item[  \texttt{type}          ]\texttt{format.chapter.pages}, \texttt{format.thesis.type}, \texttt{format.tr.number}
+% \item[  \texttt{month}         ]\texttt{format.date}
+% \item[  \texttt{note}          ]\texttt{format.note}
+% \item[  \texttt{annote}        ]\texttt{fin.entry}
+% \end{description}
+%
+% \subsubsection*{Encapsulated via \texttt{\char`\\url}}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[  \texttt{url}           ]\texttt{format.url} (\texttt{\char`\\harvardurl}, \texttt{\char`\\url}), \texttt{format.url} (\texttt{\char`\\url}), \texttt{format.note} (\texttt{\char`\\url})
+% \end{description}
+%
+% \subsubsection*{Encapsulated via \texttt{\char`\\eprint}}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[  \texttt{eprint}        ]\texttt{format.eprint}
+% \item[  \texttt{archive}       ]\texttt{format.eprint}
+% \end{description}
+%
+% \subsubsection*{Not encapsulated:}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[  \texttt{key}           ]cite key
+% \item[  \texttt{language}      ]operand of \texttt{\char`\\selectlanguage}
+% \end{description}
+%
+% \subsubsection*{\texttt{bibinfo} tag, but not a \btx{} field}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[  \texttt{date}          ]\texttt{format.date}
+% \end{description}
+%
+% Provides robust access to fields, checking against \texttt{missing\$}
+% and \texttt{empty\$}. A \dtx{} option allows giving
+% a warning if either is the case.
+%
+% If not, it encapsulates the argument in a \TeX\ macro |\bibinfo|.
+% The encapsulation is enabled by the \texttt{bibinfo} \dtx{} option:
+% if turned off, it simply pops the unneeded object.
+%
+% \texttt{field} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{encapsulated-field}
+%
+% \texttt{empty} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{empty}
+% Side effect: warning.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+%<bibinfo.warning>      swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
+%<!bibinfo.warning>      pop$ pop$
+      ""
+    }
+    { duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+%<bibinfo.warning>          swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
+%<!bibinfo.warning>          swap$ pop$
+        }
+        { swap$
+%<bibinfo>          "\bibinfo{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ * "}" *
+%<!bibinfo>          pop$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`bibinfo.warn'}
+% Replaces \texttt{output.check}
+% with \texttt{bibinfo.warn} followed by \texttt{output}.
+%
+% \texttt{field} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{encapsulated-field}
+%
+% \texttt{empty} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{empty}
+%
+% Side effect: warning if the field is empty.
+% Note: if the \dtx{} option \texttt{bibinfo} is not in effect,
+% then no encapsulation is done.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}
+{ swap$
+  duplicate$ missing$
+    {
+      swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
+      ""
+    }
+    { duplicate$ empty$
+        {
+          swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
+        }
+        { swap$
+%<bibinfo>          "\bibinfo{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ * "}" *
+%<!bibinfo>          pop$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.eprint'}
+% \changes{4.00}{2000 Jan 21}{Add optional archive field}
+% The access function for the \texttt{eprint} field.
+%
+% If the \texttt{bibinfo} \dtx{} option is selected, then this function
+% encapsulates the argument in a \TeX\ macro |\eprint|.
+%
+% \texttt{->} \texttt{encapsulated-URL}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*eprint>
+FUNCTION {format.eprint}
+{ eprint duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { "\eprint"
+      archive empty$
+        'skip$
+        { "[" * archive * "]" * }
+      if$
+      "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+%</eprint>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`write.url'}
+% \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add \texttt{write.url} for option
+%   \texttt{harnm}}
+% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Apply to non-Harvard styles}
+% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{Fix bug when both harnm and url-nl given}
+% This function taken over from \texttt{agsm.sty}, the main \texttt{harvard}
+% bib style. For non-Harvard styles that want to add the URL on a new line
+% after the reference, use this function too, but defined slightly
+% differently.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>
+FUNCTION {write.url}
+%<*!html>
+{ url empty$
+    { skip$ }
+%<harnm>    { "\newline\harvardurl{" url * "}" * write$ newline$ }
+%<!harnm&url-nl>    { "\newline\urlprefix\url{" url * "}" * write$ newline$ }
+  if$
+}
+%</!html>
+%<*html>
+{ url empty$
+    { skip$ }
+    {  "<br><a href=" quote$ * url * quote$
+      * ">" * url * "</a>" *  write$ newline$ }
+  if$
+}
+%</html>
+
+%</(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.url'}
+% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 22}{Add function for regular URLs}
+% A non-harvard version of URL is also made for regular styles.
+% This is used only if the URL text is added as a regular item to the
+% reference information, blocked if necessary. Alternatives are on a new line
+% (Harvard-like) or in the note.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*(url-blk&!harnm)|revdata>
+FUNCTION {format.url}
+{ url empty$
+    { "" }
+%<!html>    { "\urlprefix\url{" url * "}" * }
+%<html>    {  "<a href=" quote$ * url * quote$
+%<html>      * ">" * url * "</a>" * }
+  if$
+}
+
+%</(url-blk&!harnm)|revdata>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.names'}
+% \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add \texttt{harvard} command for `and' with
+%    new option \texttt{harnm}}
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 27}{Add option \texttt{nm-revf}}
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 15}{Add option \texttt{nm-rvx}}
+% \changes{3.2}{1995 Jun 7}{Add option \texttt{nm-rvv}}
+% \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 7}{Jr to go at end with \texttt{nm-rev1} (AGU style)}
+% \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 8}{Add option \texttt{nmand-rm}}
+% \changes{3.6}{1996 Jan 30}{Add option \texttt{etal-rm}}
+% \changes{3.7}{1996 Feb 5}{Add option \texttt{aunm-semi}}
+% \changes{3.82}{1996 Dec 16}{Add option \texttt{nm-revv1} (AGU style with full
+%      names)}
+% \changes{3.85}{1996 Feb 6}{Recode author font; allow first names different}
+% \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{aunm-sl}}
+% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 20}{Reset \texttt{t}; might still be ``others''
+%         from last format function}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate author name for later processing;
+%         trap empty author list;
+%         bring common braces to outer level for easier understanding of code.}
+% \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 7}{Add option \texttt{jnrlst} to put Jr. last}
+% \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{Add option \texttt{nm-rvcx}}
+% \changes{4.14}{2005 Oct 17}{Add option \texttt{nm-rvvc}}
+% \changes{4.14}{2005 Oct 17}{Add option \texttt{etal-xc}}
+% The \texttt{harvard} package now (version 2.0.3, for \LaTeXe) uses
+% |\harvardand| in place of the word \textsl{and} so that it can be changed
+% at run time. This is allowed for with the option \texttt{harnm}, which
+% need not be used only with the \texttt{har} option.
+% This seems like a useless feature for \texttt{.bst} files made from
+% this multilanguage source. However, it is included anyway, which means
+% if \texttt{harnm} option selected, one must redefine |\harvardand|
+% in the document for the language being used.
+%
+% The location of the junior part for reversed name is not obvious. Prior
+% to version 4.0, I always had it attached to the last name, as
+% Smith, Jr, John, put it probably is better as Smith, John, Jr. For the
+% AGU \texttt{nm-rev1} I always did it this way, probably because I had a
+% good AGU example to follow. Dilemma: do I just change them all or add an
+% option to do it? The option will maintain consistency with older
+% versions, but this could also be considered a bug fix rather than a new
+% feature. Solution: use the option, since I have found other \texttt{.bst}
+% files from Beebe and Harvard that put junior between surname and first
+% name.
+%
+% |bibinfo| is a variable used to store a string telling it whether the
+% names being formatted are authors or editors, since this function is called
+% for both purposes. Every call to this function must push the string onto the stack
+% just before the call.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+STRINGS  { bibinfo}
+INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Stack note: if the names argument is a non-nil list, this function returns
+% one object on the stack, the formatted list of names.
+%
+% \texttt{names`string} \texttt{bibinfo`string} \texttt{->} \texttt{author-list`string}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.names}
+{ 'bibinfo :=
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+  's :=
+  "" 't :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { s nameptr
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here is the author formatting when the names are not set in any special
+% font, or when the entire name set in a single special font.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!(nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
+%<*!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1>
+%<nm-init>      "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
+%<*!nm-init>
+%<nm-rev&!jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}"
+%<nm-rev&jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{, f.}{, jj}"
+%<*!nm-rev>
+%<nm-rv&!jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}{ f{~}}"
+%<nm-rv&jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{ f{~}}{ jj}"
+%<*!nm-rv>
+%<nm-rvx&!jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}{ f{}}"
+%<nm-rvx&jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{ f{}}{ jj}"
+%<*!nm-rvx>
+%<nm-rvcx&!jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f{}}"
+%<nm-rvcx&jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{, f{}}{, jj}"
+%<*!nm-rvcx>
+%<nm-rvv&!jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}{ f{.}.}"
+%<nm-rvv&jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{ f{.}.}{ jj}"
+%<*!nm-rvv>
+%<nm-rvvc&!jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f{.}.}"
+%<nm-rvvc&jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{, f{.}.}{, jj}"
+%<*!nm-rvvc>
+%<nm-revf&!jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, ff}"
+%<nm-revf&jnrlst>      "{vv~}{ll}{, ff}{, jj}"
+%<*!nm-revf>
+      "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
+%</!nm-revf>
+%</!nm-rvvc>
+%</!nm-rvv>
+%</!nm-rvcx>
+%</!nm-rvx>
+%</!nm-rv>
+%</!nm-rev>
+%</!nm-init>
+%</!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1>
+%<*nm-rev1>
+      duplicate$ #1 >
+        { "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" }
+%<!jnrlst>        { "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" }
+%<jnrlst>        { "{vv~}{ll}{, f.}{, jj}" }
+      if$
+%</nm-rev1>
+%<*!nm-rev1&nm-revv1>
+      duplicate$ #1 >
+        { "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" }
+%<!jnrlst>        { "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, ff}" }
+%<jnrlst>        { "{vv~}{ll}{, ff}{, jj}" }
+      if$
+%</!nm-rev1&nm-revv1>
+      format.name$
+%<nm-rv|nm-rvx>      remove.dots
+%<nmft&nmand-rm>      bib.name.font
+%</!(nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here is the author formatting when the first and last names are
+% set in (possibly different) special fonts.
+%
+% \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 7}{Junior part always in first name font}
+% The junior part is optionally between the reversed names, or after them.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
+%<*!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1>
+%<*nm-init>
+      "{f.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+      if$
+      s nameptr
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+      s nameptr
+      "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+      if$
+%</nm-init>
+%<*!nm-init>
+%<*nm-rev>
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+      s nameptr
+%<!jnrlst>      "{jj, }{f.}"
+%<jnrlst>      "{f.}{, jj}"
+      format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+      if$
+%</nm-rev>
+%<*!nm-rev>
+%<*nm-rv>
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+      s nameptr
+%<!jnrlst>      "{jj }{f{~}}"
+%<jnrlst>      "{f{~}}{ jj}"
+      format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+      if$
+%</nm-rv>
+%<*!nm-rv>
+%<*nm-rvx>
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+      s nameptr
+%<!jnrlst>      "{jj }{f{}}"
+%<jnrlst>      "{f{}}{ jj}"
+      format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+      if$
+%</nm-rvx>
+%<*!nm-rvx>
+%<*nm-rvcx>
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+      s nameptr
+%<!jnrlst>      "{jj, }{f{}}"
+%<jnrlst>      "{f{}}{, jj}"
+      format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { remove.dots bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+      if$
+%</nm-rvcx>
+%<*!nm-rvcx>
+%<*nm-rvv>
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+      s nameptr
+%<!jnrlst>      "{jj }{f{.}.}"
+%<jnrlst>      "{f{.}.}{ jj}"
+      format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+      if$
+%</nm-rvv>
+%<*!nm-rvv>
+%<*nm-rvvc>
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+      s nameptr
+%<!jnrlst>      "{jj, }{f{.}.}"
+%<jnrlst>      "{f{.}.}{, jj}"
+      format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+      if$
+%</nm-rvvc>
+%<*!nm-rvvc>
+%<*nm-revf>
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+      s nameptr
+%<!jnrlst>      "{jj, }{ff}"
+%<jnrlst>      "{ff}{, jj}"
+      format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+      if$
+%</nm-revf>
+%<*!nm-revf>
+      "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+      if$
+      s nameptr
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+      s nameptr
+      "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+      if$
+%</!nm-revf>
+%</!nm-rvvc>
+%</!nm-rvv>
+%</!nm-rvcx>
+%</!nm-rvx>
+%</!nm-rv>
+%</!nm-rev>
+%</!nm-init>
+%</!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1>
+%<*nm-rev1>
+      nameptr #1 >
+        { "{f.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+            { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+          if$
+          s nameptr
+          "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+          s nameptr
+          "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+            { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+          if$
+        }
+        { "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+          s nameptr
+%<!jnrlst>          "{jj, }{f.}"
+%<jnrlst>          "{f.}{, jj}"
+          format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+            { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+%</nm-rev1>
+%<*!nm-rev1&nm-revv1>
+      nameptr #1 >
+        { "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+            { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+          if$
+          s nameptr
+          "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+          s nameptr
+          "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+            { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+          if$
+        }
+        { "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+          s nameptr
+%<!jnrlst>          "{jj, }{ff}"
+%<jnrlst>          "{ff}{, jj}"
+          format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+            { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+%</!nm-rev1&nm-revv1>
+      *
+%</nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
+      bibinfo bibinfo.check
+      't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+%<*nmlm>
+%<m1>          nameptr #1
+%<m2>          nameptr #2
+%<m3>          nameptr #3
+%<m4>          nameptr #4
+%<m5>          nameptr #5
+%<m6>          nameptr #6
+%<m7>          nameptr #7
+%<m8>          nameptr #8
+%<m9>          nameptr #9
+%<m0>          nameptr #0
+%<m10>          #10 +
+%<m20>          #20 +
+%<m30>          #30 +
+%<m40>          #40 +
+%<m50>          #50 +
+%<m60>          #60 +
+%<m70>          #70 +
+%<m80>          #80 +
+%<m90>          #90 +
+          #1 + =
+%<x1>          numnames #1
+%<x2>          numnames #2
+%<x3>          numnames #3
+%<x4>          numnames #4
+%<x5>          numnames #5
+%<x6>          numnames #6
+%<x7>          numnames #7
+%<x8>          numnames #8
+%<x9>          numnames #9
+%<x0>          numnames #0
+%<x10>          #10 +
+%<x20>          #20 +
+%<x30>          #30 +
+%<x40>          #40 +
+%<x50>          #50 +
+%<x60>          #60 +
+%<x70>          #70 +
+%<x80>          #80 +
+%<x90>          #90 +
+          > and
+            { "others" 't :=
+              #1 'namesleft := }
+            'skip$
+          if$
+%</nmlm>
+          namesleft #1 >
+%<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl>            { ", " * t * }
+%<aunm-semi>            { "; " * t * }
+%<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi>            { "/ " * t * }
+            {
+              s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                { 't := }
+                { pop$ }
+              if$
+%<(and-com|xand)&!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl>              "," *
+%<(and-com|xand)&aunm-semi>              ";" *
+%<(and-com|xand)&aunm-sl&!aunm-semi>              "/" *
+%<*!and-xcom&!and-com&!xand>
+              numnames #2 >
+%<etal-xc>              t "others" = not and
+%<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl>                { "," * }
+%<aunm-semi>                { ";" * }
+%<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi>                { "/" * }
+                'skip$
+              if$
+%</!and-xcom&!and-com&!xand>
+              t "others" =
+                {
+%<nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&(etal-it|etal-rm)>                  bib.name.font
+%<*!etal-it>
+%<nmft&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def))&!etal-rm>                  " " * bbl.etal bib.name.font *
+%<!(nmft&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def)))|etal-rm>                  " " * bbl.etal *
+%</!etal-it>
+%<etal-it>                  " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
+%<nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&!(etal-it|etal-rm)>                  bib.name.font
+                }
+%<*!xand>
+                {
+%<*!harnm>
+%<!amper>                  bbl.and
+%<amper>                  "\&"
+%</!harnm>
+%<harnm>                  "\harvardand{}"
+%<nmft&!nmand-rm&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>                  bib.name.font
+                  space.word * t *
+                }
+%</!xand>
+%<xand>                { " " * t * }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        't
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+%<*nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
+  t "others" =
+    'skip$
+    { bib.name.font }
+  if$
+%</nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
+  } if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.names.ed'}
+% \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Add option \texttt{ed-rev} to allow editor
+%    to be formatted just like authors'}
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 27}{Option \texttt{nm-revf} to act just as default}
+% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{and-com-ed} to replace
+%     \texttt{and-com} for collection editors}
+% \changes{3.85}{1996 Feb 6}{Recode author font; allow first names different}
+% \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{ed-au}, synonomous with
+%    \texttt{ed-rev}}
+% \changes{3.88}{1999 Mar 18}{Bug fix: \texttt{and-com-ed} used correctly}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate editor for later processing;
+%    trap empty editor list}
+% When editors are used in place of authors to identify the work, the
+% names are always formatted just like authors'. However, in collections,
+% where ``edited by'' or ``\emph{names} (editors)'' are given, it is
+% normal not to reverse the names, even if the authors' are. The option
+% \texttt{ed-rev} sees to it that editor names are always formatted exactly
+% like those of authors, being reversed if necessary.
+%
+% The option \texttt{ed-au} is identical to \texttt{ed-rev}, but is more
+% logical. It means editors (in incollections) are formatted exactly like
+% authors, with all the font, reversing, and number limitations. This is
+% selected automatically with \texttt{nm-init} and \texttt{nm-} default to save
+% programming memory.
+%
+% The option \texttt{nm-revf} in this case acts the same as the default
+% when no \texttt{nm-} option given: full names with surname last. Therefore
+% it is not necessary to test for it at all, since it, like the default,
+% has the lowest priority: any other \texttt{nm-} option clobbers it.
+%
+% The options \texttt{aunm-semi} and \texttt{aunm-sl} will put a semi-colon or
+% slash between editor names, just as for authors, when \texttt{ed-rev} not
+% selected, in keeping with the idea that in this case both authors and editors
+% are to be formatted the same.
+%
+% This function either dispatches to \texttt{format.names} or executes code
+% which is similar. In the latter case, names are always presented first
+% followed by surname (``last name''); name limit processing (\texttt{nmlm}) is not executed;
+% and endgame processing differs in being qualified by \texttt{nmfted}.
+%
+% Stack note: if the names (second) argument is a non-nil list, this function returns
+% with one object on the stack, the formatted list of names.
+%
+% \texttt{names`string} \texttt{bibinfo`string} \texttt{->} \texttt{author-list`string}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed}
+{
+%<ed-rev|ed-au>  format.names
+%<*!ed-rev&!ed-au>
+  'bibinfo :=
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+  's :=
+  "" 't :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { s nameptr
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Editor name is handled as a single object, with no separation of first and last name.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
+%<nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1>      "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
+%<*!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1>
+%<nm-revv1>      "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
+%<*!nm-revv1>
+%<nm-rv>      "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"
+%<*!nm-rv>
+%<nm-rvx>      "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"
+%<*!nm-rvx>
+%<nm-rvcx>      "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"
+%<*!nm-rvcx>
+%<nm-rvv|nm-rvvc>      "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}"
+%<*!nm-rvv&!nm-rvvc>
+      "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
+%</!nm-rvv&!nm-rvvc>
+%</!nm-rvcx>
+%</!nm-rvx>
+%</!nm-rv>
+%</!nm-revv1>
+%</!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1>
+      format.name$
+%<nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx>      remove.dots
+%<nmft&nmfted&nmand-rm>    bib.name.font
+%</!(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Editor first and last name handled separately.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
+%<*nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1>
+      "{f.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+      if$
+      s nameptr
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+      s nameptr
+      "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+      if$
+%</nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1>
+%<*!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1>
+%<*nm-revv1>
+      "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+      if$
+      s nameptr
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+      s nameptr
+      "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+      if$
+%</nm-revv1>
+%<*!nm-revv1>
+%<*nm-rv>
+      "{f{~}}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+      if$
+      s nameptr
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+      s nameptr
+      "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+      if$
+%</nm-rv>
+%<*!nm-rv>
+%<*nm-rvx|nm-rvcx>
+      "{f{}}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+      if$
+      s nameptr
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+      s nameptr
+      "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+      if$
+%</nm-rvx|nm-rvcx>
+%<*!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx>
+%<*nm-rvv>
+      "{f{.}.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+      if$
+      s nameptr
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+      s nameptr
+      "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+      if$
+%</nm-rvv>
+%<*!nm-rvv>
+      "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+      if$
+      s nameptr
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+      s nameptr
+      "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+      if$
+%</!nm-rvv>
+%</!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx>
+%</!nm-rv>
+%</!nm-revv1>
+%</!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1>
+      *
+%</(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))>
+      bibinfo bibinfo.check
+      't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+          namesleft #1 >
+%<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl>            { ", " * t * }
+%<aunm-semi>            { "; " * t * }
+%<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi>            { "/ " * t * }
+            {
+              s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                { 't := }
+                { pop$ }
+              if$
+%<(and-com-ed|xand)&!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl>              "," *
+%<(and-com-ed|xand)&aunm-semi>              ";" *
+%<(and-com-ed|xand)&aunm-sl&!aunm-semi>              "/" *
+%<*!and-xcom&!and-com-ed&!xand>
+              numnames #2 >
+%<etal-xc>              t "others" = not and
+%<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl>                { "," * }
+%<aunm-semi>                { ";" * }
+%<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi>                { "/" * }
+                'skip$
+              if$
+%</!and-xcom&!and-com-ed&!xand>
+              t "others" =
+                {
+
+%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&(etal-it|etal-rm)>                  bib.name.font
+%<*!etal-it>
+%<nmft&nmfted&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def))&!etal-rm>                  " " * bbl.etal bib.name.font *
+%<!(nmft&nmfted&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def)))|etal-rm>                  " " * bbl.etal *
+%</!etal-it>
+%<etal-it>                  " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
+%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&!(etal-it|etal-rm)>                  bib.name.font
+                }
+%<*!xand>
+                {
+%<*!harnm>
+%<!amper>                  bbl.and
+%<amper>                  "\&"
+%</!harnm>
+%<harnm>                  "\harvardand{}"
+%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>                  bib.name.font
+                  space.word * t *
+                }
+%</!xand>
+%<xand>                { " " * t * }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        't
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+%<*nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
+  t "others" =
+    'skip$
+    { bib.name.font }
+  if$
+%</nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)>
+  } if$
+%</!ed-rev&!ed-au>
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.key'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ay>
+FUNCTION {format.key}
+{ empty$
+    { key field.or.null }
+    { "" }
+  if$
+}
+
+%</ay>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.authors'}
+%
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: Add code to emit collaboration.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.authors}
+{ author "author" format.names
+%<*revdata>
+    duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    { collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+        { " (" swap$ * ")" * }
+      if$
+      *
+    }
+  if$
+%</revdata>
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`get.bbl.editor'}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: access function for editor text entity}
+% Use this function universally when accessing the ``editor'' text entity.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}
+{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$ }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.editors'}
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 20}{Add option \texttt{edpar}}
+% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 4}{Add option \texttt{edparc}}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate editors for further processing.}
+% \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 6}{Add option \texttt{edparxc}}
+% The option \texttt{edpar} puts the word `editor' in parentheses.
+% In \texttt{genbst.mbs}, this occurred automatically with the option
+% \texttt{ed}, to abbreviate `editor' to `ed'. In \texttt{babel.mbs},
+% this was not the case, because of complications with the word functions.
+% Now this possibility is added as a special option, which means there is
+% some inconsistency with older \texttt{.dbj} files that called \texttt{ed}:
+% the abbreviated `ed' is not put in parentheses unless \texttt{edpar} is
+% also called.
+%
+% Note that the code here is very similar to code in \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle};
+% the two should be kept coordinated.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.editors}
+{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+%<!edpar&!edparxc>      "," *
+      " " *
+      get.bbl.editor
+%<bkedcap>      capitalize
+%<edpar|edparc|edparxc>   "(" swap$ * ")" *
+      *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.in.editors'}
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 20}{Add option \texttt{edpar}}
+% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 4}{Add option \texttt{edparc}}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: code subsumed into
+%     \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle}}
+% See the note about the option \texttt{edpar} above.
+%
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.book.pages'}
+% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Add function}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate pages for further processing.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*pg-bk>
+FUNCTION {format.book.pages}
+{ pages "pages" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    { " " * bbl.pages * }
+  if$
+}
+%</pg-bk>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.isbn'}
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 1}{Add function}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate isbn for further processing}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*isbn>
+FUNCTION {format.isbn}
+{ isbn "isbn" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      new.block
+      "ISBN " swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%</isbn>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.issn'}
+% \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Add function}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate issn for further processing}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*issn>
+FUNCTION {format.issn}
+{ issn "issn" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      new.block
+      "ISSN " swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%</issn>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.doi'}
+% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add function}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doi>
+FUNCTION {format.doi}
+{ doi "doi" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      new.block
+%<!html>      "\doi{" swap$ * "}" *
+%<html>      "doi:" swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+%</doi>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`select.language'}
+% \changes{3.87}{1998 Aug 17}{Add function}
+% The \texttt{language} field code has been provided by Bernd Feige, of the
+% University of Freiburg.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*lang>
+FUNCTION {select.language}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { language empty$
+        'skip$
+        { "{\selectlanguage{" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * }
+      if$
+    }
+    if$
+}
+
+%</lang>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.note'}
+% \changes{3.83}{1997 Apr 25}{Add macro}
+% \changes{3.83}{1997 May 26}{Fix so unmatched brace warning suppressed}
+% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Add option \texttt{url-nt}}
+% Notes should be entered as though they were a sentence on their own.
+% However, if they appear mid-sentence rather than after a block or sentence,
+% the first letter must be lowercase. Thus if a note begins with a proper
+% noun, it must be in braces. To avoid a warning about unmatched braces
+% with the \texttt{change.case\$} function, check first if the leading
+% character is an opening brace.
+%
+% With options \texttt{url,url-nt}, the URL text is treated as a note, and
+% added here. It is output directly, not prepended to the note text. This
+% means, if the note is to be a new sentence, the URL text starts that
+% sentence, and the regular note is added to that sentence, comma between.
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate note for further processing}
+% \changes{4.00}{1999 Sep 14}{PWD: remove url with \texttt{revdata}}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.note}
+{
+%<*url-nt&!revdata>
+  url empty$
+    'skip$
+%<!html>    { "\urlprefix\url{" url * "}" * output }
+%<html>    { "<a href=" quote$ * url * quote$
+%<html>      * ">" * url * "</a>" * output }
+  if$
+%</url-nt&!revdata>
+ note empty$
+    { "" }
+    { note #1 #1 substring$
+      duplicate$ "{" =
+        'skip$
+        { output.state mid.sentence =
+          { "l" }
+          { "u" }
+        if$
+        change.case$
+        }
+      if$
+      note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.title'}
+% \changes{1.4(2.2)a}{1994 Sep 7}{Add enquote function to put titles in quotes,
+%    such that punctuation is inside quotes.}
+% \changes{3.8}{1996 Apr 17}{Fix bug in quoted title and \texttt{blk-com}}
+% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 4}{Add \texttt{qx} option, for comma outside
+%        quotes}
+% For a quoted title, any punctuation in the title goes inside the quote.
+% Otherwise, the comma or period following the title also goes inside.
+% Exception is with \texttt{qx} option, in which case the comma goes
+% outside, even when punctuation present; for period (\texttt{!blk-com})
+% is added outside only when punctuation is absent.
+%
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate title for further processing.}
+% \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{Put \texttt{change.case\$} before \texttt{bibinfo.check}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.title}
+{ title
+%<*!atit-u>
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    { "t" change.case$ }
+  if$
+%</!atit-u>
+  "title" bibinfo.check
+%<*tit-it|tit-qq|lang>
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+%<tit-it>      emphasize
+%<*!tit-it&tit-qq>
+      "\enquote{" swap$ *
+%<*!qx>
+%<*blk-com>
+      non.stop
+%<!com-semi&!com-blank>        { ",} " * }
+%<com-semi>        { ";} " * }
+%<!com-semi&com-blank>        { "} " * }
+        { "} " * }
+      if$
+%</blk-com>
+%<!blk-com>      add.period$ "}" *
+%</!qx>
+%<*qx>
+%<*blk-com>
+%<!com-semi&!com-blank>      "}, " *
+%<com-semi>      "}; " *
+%<!com-semi&com-blank>      "} " *
+%</blk-com>
+%<!blk-com>      "}" *
+%</qx>
+%</!tit-it&tit-qq>
+%<lang>      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+%</tit-it|tit-qq|lang>
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`end.quote.title'}
+% \changes{3.82}{1996 Nov 15}{Add macro to finish off quoted titles}
+% For a quoted title, the punctuation appears in the quotes. For commas
+% between block, this means the inter-block punctuation is already present,
+% so it must be suppressed after every \texttt{format.title output}. This
+% is done by setting the \texttt{output.state} to \texttt{before.all}, but
+% only if there really was a title. Call this macro every time after
+% titles are output.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*blk-com&tit-qq>
+FUNCTION {end.quote.title}
+{ title empty$
+    'skip$
+    { before.all 'output.state := }
+  if$
+}
+%</blk-com&tit-qq>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`end.quote.btitle'}
+% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 31}{Add function}
+% Similar to |end.quote.title| except that it is only applied if titles of
+% proceedings and collections are quoted, and if
+% neither \texttt{edby}, \texttt{edby-par}, nor \texttt{edby-par} are selected
+% (this is the default case in the relevant menu of the \texttt{makebst.tex} run).
+% These options add text after the booktitle,
+% so additional punctuation need not be suppressed. Unless there is no editor!
+%
+% Note: this function is called after the result of \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle}
+% has been output, and attempts to predict what that output had been.
+% Would it not be better to call this function while that result is still
+% on the stack?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bt-qq>
+FUNCTION {end.quote.btitle}
+{ booktitle empty$
+    'skip$
+%<!edby&!edby-par&!edby-parc>    { before.all 'output.state := }
+%<*edby|edby-par|edby-parc>
+    { editor empty$
+        { before.all 'output.state := }
+        'skip$
+      if$
+    }
+%</edby|edby-par|edby-parc>
+  if$
+}
+%</bt-qq>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`make.full.names'}
+% \changes{1.1}{1993 Nov 12}{Add key labels to \texttt{calc.long.label} and
+%     get {\tt'author} and {\tt'editor} in right order when author
+%     missing.}
+% \changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 5}{Remove \texttt{calc.long.label} and
+%     \texttt{format.long.lab.names}, replacing them with
+%     \texttt{format.full.names}, \texttt{make.full.names}, and adding
+%     \texttt{author.editor.key}, \texttt{author.key}, and \texttt{editor.key}}
+% \changes{1.4(2.2)a}{1994 Sep 7}{Remove option \texttt{and-com} from
+%     \texttt{make.full.names}}
+% \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 15}{Add full names for \texttt{natbib} v5.3}
+% \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 8}{Suppress `and' in full list if suppressed in short}
+% \changes{3.6}{1995 Dec 8}{Font of `and' in lists same as in citations}
+% \changes{3.85}{1996 Feb 6}{Recode author font}
+% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 20}{Fix location of \texttt{and-xcom} code}
+% In versions before 2.2, there were two functions \texttt{calc.long.label}
+% and \texttt{format.long.lab.names} that made up the string
+% \texttt{long.label} for each entry. This contains the full author list.
+% However, there was a bug in the one routine, entered by mistake when an
+% earlier bug was removed, and more seriously, the string
+% \texttt{long.label} was limited to \texttt{entry.max\$} characters, 100 on
+% my system. Author lists were truncated.  Thus, \texttt{make.full.names}
+% is used instead to enter the full list of names directly in the
+% \texttt{output.bibitem} function, without an intermediate string. This
+% involves changing the order of some function definitions, especially
+% \texttt{output.bibitem} must come later.
+% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 20}{Reset \texttt{t}; might still be ``others''
+%         from last format function}
+% \changes{3.98}{1999 May 28}{Fix bug with \texttt{harnm}, missing brace}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*har|cay|nat>
+FUNCTION {format.full.names}
+{'s :=
+ "" 't :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { s nameptr
+      "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
+%<lab&and-rm>      cite.name.font
+      't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+%<*nmlm>
+%<m1>          nameptr #1
+%<m2>          nameptr #2
+%<m3>          nameptr #3
+%<m4>          nameptr #4
+%<m5>          nameptr #5
+%<m6>          nameptr #6
+%<m7>          nameptr #7
+%<m8>          nameptr #8
+%<m9>          nameptr #9
+%<m0>          nameptr #0
+%<m10>          #10 +
+%<m20>          #20 +
+%<m30>          #30 +
+%<m40>          #40 +
+%<m50>          #50 +
+%<m60>          #60 +
+%<m70>          #70 +
+%<m80>          #80 +
+%<m90>          #90 +
+          #1 + =
+%<x1>          numnames #1
+%<x2>          numnames #2
+%<x3>          numnames #3
+%<x4>          numnames #4
+%<x5>          numnames #5
+%<x6>          numnames #6
+%<x7>          numnames #7
+%<x8>          numnames #8
+%<x9>          numnames #9
+%<x0>          numnames #0
+%<x10>          #10 +
+%<x20>          #20 +
+%<x30>          #30 +
+%<x40>          #40 +
+%<x50>          #50 +
+%<x60>          #60 +
+%<x70>          #70 +
+%<x80>          #80 +
+%<x90>          #90 +
+          > and
+            { "others" 't :=
+              #1 'namesleft := }
+            'skip$
+          if$
+%</nmlm>
+          namesleft #1 >
+            { ", " * t * }
+            {
+              s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+                { 't := }
+                { pop$ }
+              if$
+              t "others" =
+                {
+%<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)>                  cite.name.font
+%<*!etal-it>
+%<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm>                  " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font *
+%<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm>                  " " * bbl.etal *
+%</!etal-it>
+%<etal-it>                  " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
+%<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)>                  cite.name.font
+                }
+                {
+%<*!harnm>
+%<*!and-xcom>
+                  numnames #2 >
+                    { "," * }
+                    'skip$
+                  if$
+%</!and-xcom>
+%<!amper>                  bbl.and
+%<amper>                  "\&"
+%</!harnm>
+%<harnm>                  "\harvardand{}"
+                  space.word * t *
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        't
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+%<*lab&!and-rm>
+  t "others" =
+    'skip$
+    { cite.name.font }
+  if$
+%</lab&!and-rm>
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.key.full}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        { key empty$
+            { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+            'key
+          if$
+        }
+        { editor format.full.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author format.full.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.key.full}
+{ author empty$
+    { key empty$
+         { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+          'key
+      if$
+    }
+    { author format.full.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.key.full}
+{ editor empty$
+    { key empty$
+         { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+          'key
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor format.full.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {make.full.names}
+{ type$ "book" =
+  type$ "inbook" =
+  or
+    'author.editor.key.full
+    { type$ "proceedings" =
+        'editor.key.full
+        'author.key.full
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%</har|cay|nat>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`output.bibitem'}
+%\changes{1.1}{1993 Nov 12}{Test for missing year, set to {\tt????}.}
+% The \texttt{output.bibitem} function formats the |\bibitem| entries.
+%\changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 5}{Move to later location, add
+%   \texttt{make.full.names} instead of inserting string \texttt{long.label}}
+%\changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add option \texttt{nat} for full author list
+%  for \texttt{natbib.sty} version~5.3}
+% \changes{3.84}{1997 Nov 18}{For \texttt{nat}, put label in braces}
+% A user has pointed out to me that if the label argument in square brackets
+% are put into braces (within the squares) it is then resistent to any
+% problems if square braces should appear within the label. Do this, but
+% only for the \texttt{nat} option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {output.bibitem}
+{ newline$
+%<*!html>
+%<*ay>
+%<!har&!nat>  "\bibitem[" write$
+%<!har&nat>  "\bibitem[{" write$
+%<har>  "\harvarditem" write$
+%<nmd>  "\protect\citeauthoryear{" write$
+%<ast>  "\protect\astroncite{" write$
+%<cay>  "\protect\citeauthoryear{" make.full.names * "}{" * write$
+%<cn>  "\protect\citename{" write$
+%<!har>  label write$
+%<har>  make.full.names duplicate$ label =
+%<har>    'skip$
+%<har>    { "[" label * "]" * write$ }
+%<har>  if$
+%<har>  "{" swap$ * "}{" * write$
+%<har>  year duplicate$ empty$
+%<cn>  ", }" year duplicate$ empty$
+%<cay|nmd|ast>  "}{" year duplicate$ empty$
+%<(har|cn|cay|nmd|ast)&blkyear>    { pop$ "" }
+%<(har|cn|cay|nmd|ast)&!blkyear>    { pop$ "????" }
+%<har|cn|cay|nmd|ast>    'skip$
+%<har|cn|cay|nmd|ast>  if$
+%<har>  extra.label * "}{" * write$
+%<cn>  * extra.label * "]{" * write$
+%<cay|nmd|ast>  * extra.label * "}]{" * write$
+%<alk>  "]{" write$
+%<!(har|cay|nmd|ast|alk|cn|nat)>  ")]{" write$
+%<nat>  ")" make.full.names duplicate$ short.list =
+%<nat>     { pop$ }
+%<nat>     { * }
+%<nat>   if$
+%<nat>  "}]{" * write$
+%</ay>
+%<!ay&!(cite|alph)>  "\bibitem{" write$
+%<!ay&(cite|alph)>  "\bibitem[" label * "]{" * write$
+  cite$ write$
+  "}" write$
+  newline$
+  ""
+%</!html>
+%<*html>
+%<*htdes>
+  "<dt><strong><tt>" write$
+  cite$ write$
+  "</tt></strong></dt>" write$ newline$
+  "<dd>"
+%</htdes>
+%<htlist&!htdes>  "<li>"
+%<!htlist&!htdes>  "<p>"
+%</html>
+  before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`if.digit'}
+% \changes{3.84}{1997 Sep 16}{Add macro}
+% Add \texttt{if.digit} and \texttt{n.separate} to convert large page numbers
+% to a separated number.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*pgsep-c|pgsep-s|pgsep-p>
+FUNCTION {if.digit}
+{ duplicate$ "0" =
+  swap$ duplicate$ "1" =
+  swap$ duplicate$ "2" =
+  swap$ duplicate$ "3" =
+  swap$ duplicate$ "4" =
+  swap$ duplicate$ "5" =
+  swap$ duplicate$ "6" =
+  swap$ duplicate$ "7" =
+  swap$ duplicate$ "8" =
+  swap$ "9" = or or or or or or or or or
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`n.separate'}
+% \changes{3.84}{1997 Sep 16}{Add macro for options \texttt{pgsep-c},
+%  \texttt{pgsep-s}, \texttt{pgsep-p}}
+% Large page numbers are to be separated in threes, with thin space, comma
+% or period. The number must be 5 digits before the separation occurs.
+% No provision is made for numbers of 7 or more digits.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {n.separate}
+{ 't :=
+  ""
+  #0 'numnames :=
+  { t empty$ not }
+  { t #-1 #1 substring$ if.digit
+      { numnames #1 + 'numnames := }
+      { #0 'numnames := }
+    if$
+    t #-1 #1 substring$ swap$ *
+    t #-2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+    numnames #5 =
+      { duplicate$ #1 #2 substring$ swap$
+        #3 global.max$ substring$
+%<pgsep-c>        "," swap$ * *
+%<pgsep-p>        "." swap$ * *
+%<pgsep-s&!html>        "\," swap$ * *
+%<pgsep-s&html>        " " swap$ * *
+      }
+      'skip$
+    if$
+  }
+  while$
+}
+%</pgsep-c|pgsep-s|pgsep-p>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`n.dashify'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {n.dashify}
+{
+%<pgsep-c|pgsep-s|pgsep-p>  n.separate
+  't :=
+  ""
+    { t empty$ not }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =
+        { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not
+            { "--" *
+              t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+            }
+            {   { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }
+                { "-" *
+                  t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+                }
+              while$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+        { t #1 #1 substring$ *
+          t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`word.in'}
+% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Function \texttt{word.in} constructed out of
+%        \texttt{bbl.in} or \texttt{bbl.iin}.}
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 16}{Use only \texttt{bbl.in} and capitalize it
+%         as necessary; remove \texttt{bbl.iin}}
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Add option \texttt{in-x} to suppress `in'}
+% \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{Add option \texttt{in-it} to italicize `in'}
+% The function \texttt{word.in} prints the word \textsl{in} for references
+% that are
+% contained in a larger work, or in conference proceedings. One may have a
+% colon after the word with the option \texttt{in-col}. If blocks of text are
+% to be separated with commas (option \texttt{blk-com}) then the word remains
+% in lower case, as it is defined in \texttt{bbl.in}; but if blocks act as
+% sentences, then it must be capitalized.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {word.in}
+%<in-x>{ "" }
+%<*!in-x>
+%<blk-com|blk-tita>{ bbl.in
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tita>{ bbl.in capitalize
+%<in-col>  ":" *
+%<in-it>  emphasize
+  " " * }
+%</!in-x>
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.date'}
+% \changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 6}{Add option \texttt{yr-per} to put period
+%    before date}
+% \changes{1.5(2.3)}{1994 Sep 16}{Add \texttt{harvard} bracket names to year
+%    with new option \texttt{harnm}}
+% \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{Add \texttt{yr-blk} for no punctuation before
+%    the date}
+% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Add \texttt{dtrev} option for year month}
+% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Add \texttt{mth-bare} for dotless abbreviation
+%    of months}
+% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add \texttt{volp-dt} for date after volume}
+% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 9}{Add brace pair after
+%      \texttt{\char`\\harvardyearright}}
+% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 16}{Add \texttt{aymth} option for months in dates}
+% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 19}{Add \texttt{vnum-dt} option}
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 12}{Add \texttt{yr-com} option}
+% \changes{3.82}{1996 Dec 12}{Fix bug that left off extra label for plain year}
+% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Replace \texttt{volp-dt} with \texttt{jdt-p}}
+% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Replace \texttt{vnum-dt} with \texttt{jdt-vs}}
+% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Add \texttt{jdt-v}}
+% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 10}{Do \texttt{yr-blk} right}
+% \changes{3.86}{1998 Feb 25}{Add \texttt{jdt-pc} to add comma after year}
+% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{Add \texttt{xmth} to suppress month for numericals}
+% \changes{3.87}{1998 Jul 23}{For \texttt{harnm}, suppress punctuation before date}
+% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 12}{Add \texttt{blkyear} option}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate the date for further processing}
+% The new \texttt{harvard.sty} allows variable brackets around the date
+% in the reference list. It uses |\harvardyearleft| and |\harvardyearright|
+% in the \texttt{.bst} files. Allow this with the option \texttt{harnm},
+% which could actually be used without the \texttt{har} option. Note that
+% this overrides the other year formatting options.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ay>
+FUNCTION {format.date}
+{ year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
+    {
+%<*!blkyear>
+      "empty year in " cite$ * "; set to ????" * warning$
+       pop$ "????"
+%</!blkyear>
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+%<*aymth>
+  month "month" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    {
+%<dtrev>      swap$
+      " " * swap$
+    }
+  if$
+  *
+%<mth-bare>  remove.dots
+%</aymth>
+%<dtbf>  bolden
+  extra.label *
+%<*!harnm>
+%<*yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-blk|yr-com|yr-per>
+  before.all 'output.state :=
+%<yr-par>  " (" swap$ * ")" *
+%<!yr-par&yr-brk>  " [" swap$ * "]" *
+%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&yr-col>  ": " swap$ *
+%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&yr-com>  ", " swap$ *
+%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&yr-per>  after.sentence 'output.state :=
+%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&!yr-per&yr-blk>  " " swap$ *
+%</yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-blk|yr-com|yr-per>
+%</!harnm>
+%<harnm>  before.all 'output.state :=
+%<harnm>  " \harvardyearleft " swap$ * "\harvardyearright{}" *
+}
+%</ay>
+%<*!ay>
+FUNCTION {format.date}
+{
+%<!xmth>  month "month" bibinfo.check
+%<xmth>  ""
+  duplicate$ empty$
+  year  "year"  bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
+    { swap$ 'skip$
+        { "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$ }
+      if$
+      *
+    }
+    { swap$ 'skip$
+        {
+%<showstack> month year
+%<!dtrev>          swap$
+          " " * swap$
+        }
+      if$
+      *
+%<mth-bare>      remove.dots
+    }
+  if$
+%<dtbf>  bolden
+%<*yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-com|yr-per|yr-blk>
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    {
+      before.all 'output.state :=
+%<yr-par>    " (" swap$ * ")" *
+%<!yr-par&yr-brk>    " [" swap$ * "]" *
+%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&yr-col>    ": " swap$ *
+%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&yr-com>    ", " swap$ *
+%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&yr-per>    after.sentence 'output.state :=
+%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&!yr-per&yr-blk>    " " swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+%</yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-com|yr-per|yr-blk>
+}
+%</!ay>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.year'}
+% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Add function}
+% For the options that put the year into the journal specifications, use a
+% special formatter separate from the regular date formatter.
+% The year is always in parentheses (except for appended to journal name).
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate year for further processing}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*jdt-p|jdt-pc|jdt-v|jdt-vs>
+FUNCTION{format.year}
+{ year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
+    {  "empty year in " cite$ *
+%<ay&!blkyear>       "; set to ????" *
+       warning$
+%<ay&!blkyear>       pop$ "????"
+    }
+    {
+%<!ay&jdt-vs>  " (" swap$ * ")" *
+%<!ay&!jdt-vs>  "(" swap$ * ")" *
+    }
+  if$
+%<*ay>
+  extra.label *
+%<jdt-vs>  " (" swap$ * ")" *
+%<!jdt-vs>  "(" swap$ * ")" *
+%</ay>
+}
+%</jdt-p|jdt-pc|jdt-v|jdt-vs>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.btitle'}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate title for further processing.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.btitle}
+{ title "title" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+%<!btit-rm>      emphasize
+%<lang>      select.language
+    }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`either.or.check'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {either.or.check}
+{ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.bvolume'}
+% \changes{4.11}{2003 Jun 23}{Add \texttt{ser-vol}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.bvolume}
+{ volume empty$
+    { "" }
+    { bbl.volume volume tie.or.space.prefix
+      "volume" bibinfo.check * *
+      series "series" bibinfo.check
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+%<*!ser-vol>
+        { swap$ bbl.of space.word * swap$
+          emphasize * }
+%</!ser-vol>
+%<ser-vol>        { emphasize ", " * swap$ * }
+      if$
+      "volume and number" number either.or.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.number.series'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.number.series}
+{ volume empty$
+    { number empty$
+        { series field.or.null }
+%<*num-xser>
+        { series empty$
+            { number "number" bibinfo.check }
+            { output.state mid.sentence =
+                { bbl.number }
+                { bbl.number capitalize }
+              if$
+              number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
+              bbl.in space.word *
+              series "series" bibinfo.check *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+%</num-xser>
+%<*!num-xser>
+        { output.state mid.sentence =
+            { bbl.number }
+            { bbl.number capitalize }
+          if$
+          number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
+          series empty$
+            { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ }
+            { bbl.in space.word *
+              series "series" bibinfo.check *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+%</!num-xser>
+      if$
+    }
+    { "" }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`is.num'}
+% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to test for digit.}
+% \changes{3.87h}{1998 Nov 27}{Option to suppress to save wiz-functions}
+% This function takes the single-character string on the stack and returns
+% 1 if it is a digit, else 0.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!xedn>
+FUNCTION {is.num}
+{ chr.to.int$
+  duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not
+  swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`extract.num'}
+% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to extract leading number from
+%        a literal string.}
+% \changes{3.87h}{1998 Nov 27}{Option to suppress to save wiz-functions}
+% This function tests the string on the stack to see if it begins with a
+% number. If so, that number is left on the stack; if the string contains
+% no numbers at the start, it is left unchanged. The idea is to convert
+% \textsl{1st} to \textsl{1} and leave \textsl{first} as is.
+% This is used by {\tt convert.edition}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {extract.num}
+{ duplicate$ 't :=
+  "" 's :=
+  { t empty$ not }
+  { t #1 #1 substring$
+    t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+    duplicate$ is.num
+      { s swap$ * 's := }
+      { pop$ "" 't := }
+    if$
+  }
+  while$
+  s empty$
+    'skip$
+    { pop$ s }
+  if$
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`convert.edition'}
+% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add function to convert \texttt{edition} entry
+%      text from word to a function}
+% \changes{3.87h}{1998 Nov 27}{Option to suppress to save wiz-functions}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: change calling sequence: arg on stack}
+% The function \texttt{convert.edition} takes the text in the field
+% \texttt{edition} and changes it to the language-specific equivalent. As
+% originally planned for \btx, this field should contain the words
+% \textsl{First}, \textsl{Second}, etc. Being so explicit,
+% it is not so easy to translate, nor to
+% convert to \textsl{1st}, \textsl{2nd}, etc., if one wanted.
+% This function carries out the translation, by changing
+% \textsl{first} or \textsl{1} to \texttt{bbl.first}, and so
+% on. The field is reduced to lower case to make it case insensitive. If no
+% translation is found, then the original text in \texttt{edition} is used
+% instead, as it stands. However, if the original is a number greater than
+% the maximum for which text is provided, then \texttt{bbl.th} is added to
+% it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {convert.edition}
+{ extract.num "l" change.case$ 's :=
+  s "first" = s "1" = or
+    { bbl.first 't := }
+    { s "second" = s "2" = or
+        { bbl.second 't := }
+        { s "third" = s "3" = or
+            { bbl.third 't := }
+            { s "fourth" = s "4" = or
+                { bbl.fourth 't := }
+                { s "fifth" = s "5" = or
+                    { bbl.fifth 't := }
+                    { s #1 #1 substring$ is.num
+%<!english&exlang>                        { s bbl.th * 't := }
+%<english|!exlang>                        { s eng.ord 't := }
+                        { edition 't := }
+                      if$
+                    }
+                  if$
+                }
+              if$
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  t
+}
+%</!xedn>
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.edition'}
+% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{Add call to \texttt{convert.edition}}
+% This function formats the text for the edition specification, such as
+% ``Second edition''. It combines the edition number with the word
+% \textsl{edition}.
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate edition for further processing.}
+% \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{Put \texttt{change.case\$} before \texttt{bibinfo.check}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.edition}
+{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+%<!xedn>      convert.edition
+      output.state mid.sentence =
+        { "l" }
+        { "t" }
+      if$ change.case$
+      "edition" bibinfo.check
+      " " * bbl.edition *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+INTEGERS { multiresult }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`multi.page.check'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {multi.page.check}
+{ 't :=
+  #0 'multiresult :=
+    { multiresult not
+      t empty$ not
+      and
+    }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$
+      duplicate$ "-" =
+      swap$ duplicate$ "," =
+      swap$ "+" =
+      or or
+        { #1 'multiresult := }
+        { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
+      if$
+    }
+  while$
+  multiresult
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.pages'}
+% \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 24}{Add option \texttt{bkpg-par}}
+% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Add option \texttt{bkpg-x}}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate pages for further processing.}
+% \changes{4.00}{1999 Dec 10}{Add \texttt{!ppx} test to avoid extra space}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    { duplicate$ multi.page.check
+        {
+%<!bkpg-x&!ppx>          bbl.pages swap$
+          n.dashify
+        }
+        {
+%<!bkpg-x&!ppx>          bbl.page swap$
+        }
+      if$
+%<!bkpg-x&!ppx>      tie.or.space.prefix
+      "pages" bibinfo.check
+%<!bkpg-x&!ppx>      * *
+%<bkpg-par>     "(" swap$ * ")" *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`first.page'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*jpg-1>
+FUNCTION {first.page}
+{ 't :=
+  ""
+    {  t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and }
+    { t #1 #1 substring$ *
+      t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+%</jpg-1>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.journal.pages'}
+% \changes{3.82}{1996 Nov 15}{Remove from \texttt{format.vol.num.pages} to
+%        be a separate function}
+% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Remove option \texttt{vnum-pg}}
+% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 30}{Replace \texttt{volp-dt} with \texttt{jdt-p}}
+%
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate pages for further processing.}
+%
+% Note: this function gets called with something on the stack.
+% It may be the volume and number.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.journal.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    { swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+        { pop$ pop$ format.pages }
+        {
+%<volp-sp>          ": " *
+%<*!volp-sp>
+%<volp-blk>          " " *
+%<*!volp-blk>
+%<volp-com>          ", " *
+%<*!volp-com>
+%<volp-semi>          "; " *
+%<!volp-semi>          ":" *
+%</!volp-com>
+%</!volp-blk>
+%</!volp-sp>
+%<!jdt-v&!jdt-vs&jdt-p>          format.year * " " *
+%<!jdt-v&!jdt-vs&!jdt-p&jdt-pc>          format.year * ", " *
+          swap$
+%<jpg-1>          first.page
+%<!jpg-1>          n.dashify
+%<*jwdpg>
+          pages multi.page.check
+            'bbl.pages
+            'bbl.page
+          if$
+          swap$ tie.or.space.prefix
+%</jwdpg>
+          "pages" bibinfo.check
+%<jwdpg>          * *
+          *
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.journal.eid'}
+%
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: add function to emit the eid information.}
+% This function is called with something on the stack (journal vol, number)
+% and appends \texttt{eid} and \texttt{numpages} if those field are non-empty.
+% Very similar to \texttt{format.journal.pages}.
+%
+% For the AGU style of including the DOI as part of the EID, the DOI number
+% is appended too.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.journal.eid}
+{ eid "eid" bibinfo.check
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+    { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+      {
+%<volp-sp>          ": " *
+%<*!volp-sp>
+%<volp-blk>          " " *
+%<*!volp-blk>
+%<volp-com>          ", " *
+%<*!volp-com>
+%<volp-semi>          "; " *
+%<!volp-semi>          ":" *
+%</!volp-com>
+%</!volp-blk>
+%</!volp-sp>
+      }
+      if$
+      swap$ *
+%<*revdata>
+      numpages empty$ 'skip$
+        { bbl.eidpp numpages tie.or.space.prefix
+          "numpages" bibinfo.check * *
+          " (" swap$ * ")" * *
+        }
+      if$
+%</revdata>
+    }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.vol.num.pages'}
+% \changes{1.4(2.2)}{1994 Sep 6}{Add option \texttt{volp-sp} to put space
+%    after colon in vol:~page.}
+% \changes{1.5(2.3)c}{1995 Jan 20}{Add options \texttt{vnum-h},
+%   \texttt{vnum-nr} and \texttt{vnum-x} for various formats of
+%   journal vol number}
+% \changes{1.7(2.5)}{1995 Feb 9}{Add options \texttt{vnum-sp} and
+%     \texttt{vnum-cm}}
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 17}{Add option \texttt{volp-semi}}
+% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Put \texttt{bolden} in right place for
+%    \texttt{vol-2bf} option}
+% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 19}{Put date between volume and number}
+% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 19}{Add possibilitity of `page' word}
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Activate \texttt{jwdpg} option properly}
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 19}{Add possibilitity of `volume' word}
+% \changes{3.82}{1996 Nov 15}{Add option \texttt{pp-last}}
+% Version 3.84, I have rationalized several options that placed the date in the
+% journal specifications. It was rather chaotic before, but now it should be
+% more systematic. This means some options have been removed, something that I
+% do not like to do.
+%
+% The option \texttt{pp-last} suppresses the pages in the formatting macros, and
+% sees to it that the pages are added just before any notes in those entries
+% that take pages. This applies to more than just \texttt{article}, but to
+% \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{incollection} as well.
+%
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate the volume and number for
+%   further processing.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages}
+{ volume field.or.null
+  duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+%<jwdvol>      bbl.volume swap$ tie.or.space.prefix
+      "volume" bibinfo.check
+%<jwdvol>      * *
+    }
+  if$
+%<vol-bf&!vol-2bf>  bolden
+%<!vol-bf&!vol-2bf&vol-it>  emphasize
+%<jdt-v|jdt-vs>  format.year *
+%<*!vnum-x>
+  number "number" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+      swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+        { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ }
+        'skip$
+      if$
+      swap$
+%<vnum-sp>      "~(" swap$ * ")" *
+%<!vnum-sp&vnum-cm>      ", " swap$ *
+%<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&vnum-nr>      ", " bbl.nr * number tie.or.space.prefix pop$ * swap$ *
+%<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&!vnum-nr&vnum-h>      ", \#" swap$ *
+%<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&!vnum-nr&!vnum-h&vnum-b>      " " swap$ *
+%<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&!vnum-nr&!vnum-h&!vnum-b>      "(" swap$ * ")" *
+    }
+  if$ *
+%<!vol-bf&vol-2bf>  bolden
+%</!vnum-x>
+%<*!pp-last>
+  eid empty$
+    { format.journal.pages }
+    { format.journal.eid }
+  if$
+%</!pp-last>
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.chapter.pages'}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate series and chapter for
+%   further processing.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages}
+{ chapter empty$
+%<!pp-last>    'format.pages
+%<pp-last>    { "" }
+    { type empty$
+        { bbl.chapter }
+        { type "l" change.case$
+          "type" bibinfo.check
+        }
+      if$
+      chapter tie.or.space.prefix
+      "chapter" bibinfo.check
+      * *
+%<*!pp-last>
+      pages empty$
+        'skip$
+        { ", " * format.pages * }
+      if$
+%</!pp-last>
+    }
+  if$
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`bt.enquote'}
+% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 31}{Add function}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: trap \texttt{empty\$} argument}
+% This is to place the booktitle for proceedings and collections into quotes.
+% If punctuation is to be included, then add a comma unless a stop already
+% exists, or add a period under the only circumstances that
+% |format.in.ed.booktitle| is followed by |new.sentence|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bt-qq>
+FUNCTION {bt.enquote}
+{ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+  { "\enquote{" swap$ *
+%<*!qx>
+    non.stop
+      { ",} " * }
+      { "}, " * }
+    if$
+%</!qx>
+%<*qx>
+    "}, " *
+%</qx>
+  }
+  if$
+}
+%</bt-qq>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.booktitle'}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: new function}
+% The function \texttt{format.booktitle} pushes one object
+% (the book title, suitably encapsulated) onto the stack.
+% It is currently used in \texttt{format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
+% and in \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle}, and should be used whenever accessing
+% the \texttt{booktitle} field for eventual output.
+%
+% If the book title is empty or missing, the function pushes an empty string.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.booktitle}
+{
+  booktitle "booktitle" bibinfo.check
+%<!bt-qq&!bt-rm>  emphasize
+%<bt-qq>  bt.enquote
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.in.ed.booktitle'}
+% \changes{1.5(2.3)b}{1995 Jan 18}{Add option \texttt{edby-par} to put editors
+%   in parentheses}
+% \changes{1.6(2.4)}{1995 Feb 2}{If \texttt{ed} and \texttt{edby} given
+%   together, abbreviate `edited by' to `ed(s).'}
+% \changes{3.1}{1995 May 2}{Add option \texttt{edbyx} to replace `edited by'
+%    by `ed(s).'}
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 26}{Add option \texttt{edcap}}
+% \changes{3.84}{1997 Oct 10}{Fix bug that added extra space sometimes}
+% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Book titles may also be roman}
+% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{New options \texttt{edby-parc} and \texttt{edbyw}}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: rewritten; encapsulates \texttt{booktitle} and
+%      \texttt{editor} for later processing}
+% \changes{4.00}{1999 Sept 17}{PWD: fix up several bugs}
+% Prior to version 3.81, the \textsl{Editor} or \textsl{Edited by} in
+% parentheses was meant to be capitalized, but this did not work properly.
+% Now the option \texttt{edcap} produces this, and default is not capitalized.
+%
+% Notes on \dtx{} options:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% The following combinations are available through the \texttt{makebst.tex} interface:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% (
+%  <default>
+%  |edby     (      |edbyx       |edbyy|edbyw[edcap])
+%  |edby-par (|edcap|edbyx[edcap]|edbyy             )
+%  |edby-parc(|edcap|edbyx                          )
+% )
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \item
+% \texttt{edby}, \texttt{edby-par}, and \texttt{edby-parc} are mutually exclusive
+% and, except for the default, exhaustive.
+% \item
+% \texttt{edbyx}, \texttt{edbyw}, and \texttt{edbyy} are mutually exclusive
+% and, except for the default, exhaustive.
+% \item
+% \texttt{edcap} is independent of the above two groups of options.
+% \item
+% When parentheses need to be applied, we make sure that the respective
+% \dtx{} guard expressions are mutually exclusive.
+% It makes no sense for \texttt{edbyw} to be in effect if either of
+% \texttt{edby-par} or \texttt{edby-parc} is in effect.
+% \item
+% \texttt{makebst.tex} only activates \texttt{edcap} in certain cases,
+% but we do no checking here, applying it consistently to the
+% ``editor'' text entity.
+% \item
+% The code between \texttt{<!edpar>} and \verb+<edpar\|edparc>+
+% \emph{must} match the corresponding code in \texttt{format.editors}.
+% This means that in the default case, formatting is controlled by
+% a \dtx{} mechanism entirely different from the other cases.
+% \item \texttt{ser-ed} has been added to suit AGU. Result of series plus
+% volume to go between booktitle and editors; must remove \texttt{format.bvolume}
+% from \texttt{incollection} and \texttt{inproceedings}.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle}
+{ format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+    {
+%<showstack>% btitle
+%<*ser-ed>
+      format.bvolume duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+        { ", " swap$ * * }
+      if$
+%</ser-ed>
+      editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+        {
+%<*!(edby|edby-par|edby-parc)>
+%<showstack>% btitle ednms
+%<!edpar&!edparxc>          "," *
+          " " *
+          get.bbl.editor
+%<bkedcap>          capitalize
+%<edpar>          "(" swap$ * "), " *
+%<!edpar&(edparc|edparxc)>          "(" swap$ * ") " *
+%<!edpar&!(edparc|edparxc)>          ", " *
+          * swap$
+%<showstack>% eds btitle
+%</!(edby|edby-par|edby-parc)>
+%<*edby|edby-par|edby-parc>
+%<showstack>% btitle ednms
+%<edbyx|edbyy|edbyw>          get.bbl.editor
+%<!(edbyx|edbyy|edbyw)>          bbl.edby
+%<edcap>          capitalize
+%<!(edby-par|edby-parc)&edbyw>          "(" swap$ * ")" *
+%<showstack>% btitle ednms ed
+%<(edby-par|edby)&edbyy>          swap$ "," *
+          " " * swap$ *
+%<showstack>% btitle ednms-ed
+%<(edby-par|edby-parc)&!edbyw>          "(" swap$ * ")" *
+          swap$
+%<edby|edby-parc>          "," *
+          " " * swap$
+%</edby|edby-par|edby-parc>
+%<showstack>% btitle ednms-ed (or ednms-ed btitle)
+          * }
+      if$
+%<showstack>% btitle-ednms-ed (or ednms-ed-btitle) (or btitle)
+      word.in swap$ *
+    }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`empty.misc.check'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!ay>
+FUNCTION {empty.misc.check}
+{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$
+  month empty$ year empty$ note empty$
+  and and and and and
+%<!seq-no|alph>  key empty$ not and
+    { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+%</!ay>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.thesis.type'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.thesis.type}
+{ type duplicate$ empty$
+    'pop$
+    { swap$ pop$
+      "t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check
+    }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.tr.number'}
+% \changes{4.01}{2000 May 4}{Encapsulate number}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
+{ number "number" bibinfo.check
+  type duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ bbl.techrep }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  "type" bibinfo.check
+  swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$ "t" change.case$ }
+    { tie.or.space.prefix * * }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.article.crossref'}
+%\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Emphasize \texttt{journal} with
+%   \texttt{emphasize}, not explicitly}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate journal for further processing.}
+% The \texttt{journal} field was emphasized emplicitly, but it should be
+% done by command.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.article.crossref}
+{
+%<*!ay>
+  key duplicate$ empty$
+    { pop$
+      journal duplicate$ empty$
+        { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * warning$ }
+        { "journal" bibinfo.check emphasize word.in swap$ * }
+      if$
+    }
+    { word.in swap$ * " " *}
+  if$
+%</!ay>
+%<ay>  word.in
+%<!html>  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+%<html>  " <tt>" * crossref * "</tt>" *
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.crossref.editor'}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: editor encapsulated for later processing}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: fixed typo: "etal_rm"->"etal-rm"}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!ay>
+FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor}
+{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
+%<nmft&nmfted&nmand-rm>  bib.name.font
+  "editor" bibinfo.check
+  editor num.names$ duplicate$
+  #2 >
+    { pop$
+%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)>      bib.name.font
+      "editor" bibinfo.check
+      " " * bbl.etal
+%<etal-it>      emphasize
+      *
+%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)>      bib.name.font
+%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)>      "others" 't :=
+    }
+    { #2 <
+        'skip$
+        { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" =
+            {
+%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)>              bib.name.font
+              "editor" bibinfo.check
+              " " * bbl.etal
+%<etal-it>              emphasize
+              *
+%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)>              bib.name.font
+%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)>              "others" 't :=
+            }
+            {
+%<*!harnm>
+%<!amper>             bbl.and space.word
+%<amper>              " \& "
+%</!harnm>
+%<harnm>              " \harvardand\ "
+              * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
+%<nmft&nmfted&nmand-rm>              bib.name.font
+              "editor" bibinfo.check
+              *
+            }
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+%<*nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm>
+  t "others" =
+    'skip$
+    { bib.name.font "editor" bibinfo.check }
+  if$
+%</nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm>
+}
+%</!ay>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.book.crossref'}
+%\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Emphasize \texttt{series} with
+%   \texttt{emphasize}, not explicitly}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate volume and series for
+%    further processing.}
+% The \texttt{series} field was emphasized emplicitly, but it should be
+% done by command.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.book.crossref}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+    { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$
+      pop$ word.in
+    }
+    { bbl.volume
+%<!(blk-com|blk-tita)>      capitalize
+      swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word *
+    }
+  if$
+%<*!ay>
+  editor empty$
+  editor field.or.null author field.or.null =
+  or
+    { key empty$
+        { series empty$
+            { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " *
+              crossref * warning$
+              "" *
+            }
+            { series emphasize * }
+          if$
+        }
+        { key * }
+      if$
+    }
+    { format.crossref.editor * }
+  if$
+%</!ay>
+%<!html>  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+%<html>  " <tt>" * crossref * "</tt>" *
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.incoll.inproc.crossref'}
+%\changes{1.3(2.1)}{1994 Jul 1}{Emphasize \texttt{booktitle} with
+%     \texttt{emphasize},  not explicitly}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.booktitle}}
+% The \texttt{booktitle} field was emphasized emplicitly, but it should be
+% done by command.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
+{
+%<*!ay>
+  editor empty$
+  editor field.or.null author field.or.null =
+  or
+    { key empty$
+        { format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$
+            { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " *
+              crossref * warning$
+            }
+            { word.in swap$ * }
+          if$
+        }
+        { word.in key * " " *}
+      if$
+    }
+    { word.in format.crossref.editor * " " *}
+  if$
+%</!ay>
+%<ay>  word.in
+%<!html>  " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+%<html>  " <tt>" * crossref * "</tt>" *
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.org.or.pub'}
+% \changes{3.3}{1995 Aug 7}{Add option \texttt{add-pub} which makes use
+%    of this function}
+% \changes{3.8}{1996 Mar 12}{Add option \texttt{pub-par} to put publisher
+%    in parentheses}
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 16}{Add option \texttt{pub-date} to put publisher
+%    and date in parentheses together}
+% \changes{3.82}{1996 Dec 16}{Add \texttt{add.blank} for \texttt{pub-par}}
+% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Add extra label with \texttt{pub-date}}
+% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 2}{Option \texttt{pub-nopar} to suppress parentheses
+%   with \texttt{pub-date}}
+% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 3}{Change to include organization if present}
+% \changes{4.02}{2000 June 27}{Include \texttt{dtbf} option with \texttt{pub-date}}
+% Psychology journals often want \textit{address}: \textit{publisher}.
+%
+% \textsl{Nature} wants publisher and date in parentheses, and when both
+% are there, they are merged into one set.
+%
+% Call function \texttt{add.blank} before parentheses so suppress preceding
+% punctuation, which looks strange when publisher in parentheses.
+%
+% MPG Jahrbuch wants publisher and year, but without parentheses. Add
+% \texttt{pub-nopar} to be used with \texttt{pub-date}.
+%
+% Have now (3.87.h) extended this function to include the organization, if
+% present. This is for \texttt{inproceedings} and \texttt{proceedings} where
+% the publisher is optional, and organization too. If the publisher is missing,
+% but the organization present, it is formatted like the publisher. This
+% complication comes from styles that want the publisher/organization to have
+% the date included, all in parentheses.
+%
+% This function is called by \texttt{format.publisher.address} and
+% \texttt{format.organization.address}, each putting the appropriate text
+% into the stack first.
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate address and year for
+%    further processing.}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub}
+{ 't :=
+  ""
+%<*pub-date&!ay>
+  year empty$
+    { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+%</pub-date&!ay>
+%<*!(pub-date&ay)>
+  address empty$ t empty$ and
+%<pub-date>  year empty$ and
+    'skip$
+    {
+%</!(pub-date&ay)>
+%<pub-par|(pub-date&!pub-xpar)>      add.blank "(" *
+%<*add-pub>
+      address "address" bibinfo.check *
+      t empty$
+        'skip$
+%</add-pub>
+%<*!add-pub>
+      t empty$
+        { address "address" bibinfo.check *
+        }
+        { t *
+          address empty$
+            'skip$
+            { ", " * address "address" bibinfo.check * }
+          if$
+        }
+%</!add-pub>
+%<*add-pub>
+        { address empty$
+            'skip$
+            { ": " * }
+          if$
+          t *
+        }
+%</add-pub>
+      if$
+%<*pub-date&!ay>
+      year empty$
+        'skip$
+        { t empty$ address empty$ and
+            'skip$
+            { ", " * }
+          if$
+          year "year" bibinfo.check
+%<dtbf>          bolden
+          *
+        }
+      if$
+%</pub-date&!ay>
+%<*pub-date&ay>
+      year duplicate$ empty$
+%<*!blkyear>
+        { "empty year in " cite$ * "; set to ????" * warning$
+           pop$ "????" }
+%</!blkyear>
+%<*blkyear>
+        { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$
+           pop$ "" }
+%</blkyear>
+%<!dtbf>        { "year" bibinfo.check extra.label * }
+%<dtbf>        { "year" bibinfo.check bolden extra.label * }
+      if$
+      t empty$ address empty$ and
+        { * }
+%<!pub-xc>        { ", " swap$ * * }
+%<pub-xc>        { " " swap$ * * }
+      if$
+%</pub-date&ay>
+%<pub-par|(pub-date&!pub-xpar)>      ")" *
+%<*!(pub-date&ay)>
+    }
+  if$
+%</!(pub-date&ay)>
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.publisher.address'}
+% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 3}{Add macro; works with \texttt{format.org.or.pub}}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: encapsulate \texttt{publisher}
+%    and \texttt{organization}}
+% \changes{4.00}{1999 Oct 28}{Check with \texttt{bibinfo.warn}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.publisher.address}
+{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.organization.address'}
+% \changes{3.88}{1998 Dec 3}{Add macro; works with \texttt{format.org.or.pub}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.organization.address}
+{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`name.or.dash'}
+% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 5}{Add function to replace repeated names by dash}
+% \changes{4.06}{2003 Apr 2}{Add double and triple dashes}
+% This function stores what is on the stack, compares it with previous value,
+% and replaces it with a long dash if they are equal. What is on the stack
+% should be author or editor names for the current entry.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*nmdash>
+STRINGS {oldname}
+
+FUNCTION {name.or.dash}
+{ 's :=
+   oldname empty$
+     { s 'oldname := s }
+     { s oldname =
+%<*!au-col>
+%<!nmd-2&!nmd-3>         { "---" }
+%<nmd-2&!nmd-3>         { "---{}---" }
+%<nmd-3>         { "---{}---{}---" }
+%</!au-col>
+%<*au-col>
+%<!nmd-2&!nmd-3>         { "---" add.blank }
+%<nmd-2&!nmd-3>         { "---{}---" add.blank }
+%<nmd-3>         { "---{}---{}---" add.blank }
+%</au-col>
+         { s 'oldname := s }
+       if$
+     }
+   if$
+}
+
+%</nmdash>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`article'}
+% \changes{1.5(2.3)b}{1995 Jan 18}{Add option \texttt{yrp-x} to suppress
+%    punctuation following date at beginning}
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 8}{Add option \texttt{yrp-col} to add colon after
+%    date at beginning}
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 20}{Add option \texttt{jxper} to remove periods
+%    from journal name}
+% \changes{3.2}{1995 May 19}{Add option \texttt{dt-jnl} to make date part of
+%    the journal specification, follows journal name.}
+% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 28}{Add option \texttt{au-col}}
+% \changes{3.6}{1995 Nov 23}{Add option \texttt{jttl-rm}}
+% \changes{3.7}{1996 Feb 5}{Put \texttt{purify\$} before \texttt{emphasize}}
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 26}{Add option \texttt{blk-tita} for article only}
+% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 5}{Add option \texttt{blknt} for period before notes}
+% \changes{3.88}{1999 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{injnl} for `in' with journal
+%              names}
+%
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.journal} and
+%   \texttt{format.journal.eid}; call \texttt{format.eprint}, and
+%    \texttt{format.url}.}
+% \changes{4.02}{2000 June 27}{Fix bug with texttt{injnl}}
+% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {article}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+%<ay>  author format.key output
+%<au-col>  add.colon
+%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
+%<*dt-beg&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
+  format.date "year" output.check
+  date.block
+%</dt-beg&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
+%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<*!jtit-x>
+  format.title "title" output.check
+%<blk-com&tit-qq>  end.quote.title
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<*blk-tit|blk-tita>
+%<!tit-col>  new.sentence
+%<tit-col>  add.colon
+%</blk-tit|blk-tita>
+%</!jtit-x>
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+      journal
+%<jxper>      remove.dots
+      "journal" bibinfo.check
+%<!jttl-rm>      emphasize
+%<injnl>      word.in swap$ *
+      "journal" output.check
+%<jnm-x>      add.blank
+%<*!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
+      format.date "year" output.check
+      date.block
+%</!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
+      format.vol.num.pages output
+%<doi&agu-doi>  format.doi output
+%<*!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
+      format.date "year" output.check
+%</!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
+    }
+    { format.article.crossref output.nonnull
+%<!pp-last>      format.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+%<*pp-last>
+  eid empty$
+    { format.journal.pages }
+    { format.journal.eid }
+  if$
+%</pp-last>
+%<issn>  format.issn output
+%<doi&!agu-doi>  format.doi output
+%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.url output
+%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
+  format.note output
+%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.date "year" output.check
+%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v>
+%<eprint>  format.eprint output
+%<*revdata>
+  format.url output
+%</revdata>
+  fin.entry
+%<harnm|url-nl>  write.url
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`book'}
+%\changes{2.0a}{1994 Aug 30}{Fix up \texttt{new.sentence} so not added with
+%        \texttt{blk-com}}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
+% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {book}
+{ output.bibitem
+  author empty$
+    { format.editors "author and editor" output.check
+%<ay>      editor format.key output
+%<!edpar&(edparc|edparxc)&!au-col>      add.blank
+%<au-col>      add.colon
+%<nmdash>      name.or.dash
+    }
+    { format.authors output.nonnull
+%<au-col>      add.colon
+%<nmdash>      name.or.dash
+      crossref missing$
+        { "author and editor" editor either.or.check }
+        'skip$
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+%<dt-beg&!pub-date>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<dt-beg&!pub-date>  date.block
+%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.btitle "title" output.check
+  crossref missing$
+    { format.bvolume output
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      new.block
+%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
+%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
+%<!numser>      format.number.series output
+%<pre-edn>      format.edition output
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      new.sentence
+%<numser>      format.number.series output
+%<pg-bk&pg-pre>      format.book.pages output
+      format.publisher.address output
+    }
+    {
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      new.block
+%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
+%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
+      format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&pub-date>      format.date "year" output.check
+    }
+  if$
+%<!pre-edn>  format.edition output
+%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!pub-date>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<isbn>  format.isbn output
+%<pg-bk&!pg-pre>  format.book.pages output
+%<doi>  format.doi output
+%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.url output
+%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
+  format.note output
+%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.date "year" output.check
+%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
+%<eprint>  format.eprint output
+%<revdata>  format.url output
+  fin.entry
+%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`booklet'}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
+% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {booklet}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+%<ay>  author format.key output
+%<au-col>  add.colon
+%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
+%<ay&dt-beg>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<!ay&dt-beg>  format.date output
+%<dt-beg>  date.block
+%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.title "title" output.check
+%<blk-com&tit-qq>  end.quote.title
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
+%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
+  howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+  address "address" bibinfo.check output
+%<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date output
+%<isbn>  format.isbn output
+%<pg-bk>  format.book.pages output
+%<doi>  format.doi output
+%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.url output
+%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
+  format.note output
+%<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.date "year" output.check
+%</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.date output
+%</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<eprint>  format.eprint output
+%<revdata>  format.url output
+  fin.entry
+%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`inbook'}
+% \changes{3.86}{1998 Feb 25}{Use \texttt{format.date} in place of
+%     \texttt{year} alone}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
+% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
+% The medical journals, with option \texttt{dt-jnl}, have the date as part of
+% the journal specification. For chapters in books, they want date and pages
+% to appear at the end, with a space between them. (For journals, there is to be
+% no space.) Suppress the chapter specification (for now).
+%
+% The \texttt{dt-jnl} option usually behaves as the default, except for some
+% special entries, like this one.
+%
+% \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{Restore chap specification with \texttt{dt-jnl} option.}
+% Restore the chapter specification (2004 Feb 9) after someone complained.
+% There are still some bugs here. If some date punctuation is specified, say
+%  with \texttt{yrp-semi) for a semi-colon after the year, this appears always,
+%  even if there is no text following. But then this to be an unlikely wish anyway,
+%  since such punctuation options are best suited for \texttt{dt-beg}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {inbook}
+{ output.bibitem
+  author empty$
+    { format.editors "author and editor" output.check
+%<ay>      editor format.key output
+%<au-col>      add.colon
+%<nmdash>      name.or.dash
+    }
+    { format.authors output.nonnull
+%<au-col>      add.colon
+%<nmdash>      name.or.dash
+      crossref missing$
+        { "author and editor" editor either.or.check }
+        'skip$
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+%<dt-beg&!pub-date>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<dt-beg&!pub-date>  date.block
+%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.btitle "title" output.check
+  crossref missing$
+    {
+%<pre-pub&numser>      format.number.series output
+%<pre-pub>      format.publisher.address output
+      format.bvolume output
+%<*dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a>
+      format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check
+%</dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      new.block
+%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
+%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
+%<!numser>      format.number.series output
+%<pre-edn>      format.edition output
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      new.sentence
+%<!pre-pub&numser>      format.number.series output
+%<!pre-pub>      format.publisher.address output
+    }
+    {
+%<*dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a>
+      format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check
+%</dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      new.block
+%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
+%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
+      format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&pub-date>      format.date "year" output.check
+    }
+  if$
+%<!pre-edn>  format.edition output
+%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!pub-date>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<*isbn>
+  crossref missing$
+    { format.isbn output }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+%</isbn>
+%<*(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date>
+  format.date "year" output.check
+  date.block
+%</(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date>
+%<pp-last>  format.pages "pages" output.check
+%<doi>  format.doi output
+%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.url output
+%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
+  format.note output
+%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.date "year" output.check
+%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
+%<eprint>  format.eprint output
+%<revdata>  format.url output
+  fin.entry
+%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`incollection'}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
+% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.13}{2004 Feb 9}{Restore chap specification with \texttt{dt-jnl} option.}
+FUNCTION {incollection}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+%<ay>  author format.key output
+%<au-col>  add.colon
+%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
+%<dt-beg&!pub-date>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<dt-beg&!pub-date>  date.block
+%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<*!jtit-x>
+  format.title "title" output.check
+%<blk-com&tit-qq>  end.quote.title
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
+%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
+%</!jtit-x>
+  crossref missing$
+    { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check
+%<bt-qq>      end.quote.btitle
+%<pre-pub&numser>      format.number.series output
+%<pre-pub>      format.publisher.address output
+%<!ser-ed>      format.bvolume output
+%<!numser>      format.number.series output
+%<pre-edn>      format.edition output
+      format.chapter.pages output
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      new.sentence
+%<!pre-pub&numser>      format.number.series output
+%<!pre-pub>      format.publisher.address output
+%<!pre-edn>      format.edition output
+%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!pub-date>      format.date "year" output.check
+%<isbn>      format.isbn output
+    }
+    { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+      format.chapter.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+%<*(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date>
+  format.date "year" output.check
+  date.block
+%</(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date>
+%<pp-last>  format.pages "pages" output.check
+%<doi>  format.doi output
+%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.url output
+%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
+  format.note output
+%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.date "year" output.check
+%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
+%<eprint>  format.eprint output
+%<revdata>  format.url output
+  fin.entry
+%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`inproceedings'}
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 13}{Reorganize organization/publisher}
+% \changes{3.85}{1998 Feb 5}{Fix extraneous page output without
+%        \texttt{pp-last}}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
+% \changes{4.05}{2002 Oct 21}{Fix bug with \texttt{pp-last} and \texttt{dt-beg}}
+% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {inproceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+%<ay>  author format.key output
+%<au-col>  add.colon
+%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
+%<dt-beg&!pub-date>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<dt-beg&!pub-date>  date.block
+%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<*!jtit-x>
+  format.title "title" output.check
+%<blk-com&tit-qq>  end.quote.title
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
+%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
+%</!jtit-x>
+  crossref missing$
+    { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check
+%<bt-qq>      end.quote.btitle
+%<*!pre-pub>
+%<!ser-ed>      format.bvolume output
+%<!numser>      format.number.series output
+%<(dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl)&!pp-last>      format.pages output
+%</!pre-pub>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      new.sentence
+%<numser>      format.number.series output
+      publisher empty$
+        { format.organization.address output }
+        { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+          format.publisher.address output
+        }
+      if$
+%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!pub-date>      format.date "year" output.check
+%<*pre-pub>
+      format.bvolume output
+%<!numser>      format.number.series output
+%<(dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl)&!pp-last>      format.pages output
+%</pre-pub>
+%<isbn>      format.isbn output
+%<issn>      format.issn output
+    }
+    { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+%<(dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl)&!pp-last>      format.pages output
+    }
+  if$
+%<*!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!pp-last>
+%<!pub-date>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<!pub-date>  date.block
+%<jdt-v|jdt-vs|jdt-p|!jdt-pc>  add.blank
+  format.pages "pages" output.check
+%</!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!pp-last>
+%<pp-last>  format.pages "pages" output.check
+%<doi>  format.doi output
+%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.url output
+%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
+  format.note output
+%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.date "year" output.check
+%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
+%<eprint>  format.eprint output
+%<revdata>  format.url output
+  fin.entry
+%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`conference'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`manual'}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
+% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ay>
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+  author format.key output
+%<au-col>  add.colon
+%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
+%<dt-beg>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<dt-beg>  date.block
+%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.btitle "title" output.check
+%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
+%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  organization address new.block.checkb
+  organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+  address "address" bibinfo.check output
+  format.edition output
+%<!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<doi>  format.doi output
+%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.url output
+%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
+  format.note output
+%<*!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.date "year" output.check
+%</!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<eprint>  format.eprint output
+%<revdata>  format.url output
+  fin.entry
+%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
+}
+
+%</ay>
+%<*!ay>
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ output.bibitem
+  author empty$
+    { organization "organization" bibinfo.check
+      duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+        { output
+          address "address" bibinfo.check output
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    { format.authors output.nonnull }
+  if$
+%<au-col>  add.colon
+%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
+%<ay&dt-beg>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<!ay&dt-beg>  format.date output
+%<dt-beg>  date.block
+%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.btitle "title" output.check
+%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
+%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
+  author empty$
+    { organization empty$
+        {
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>          address new.block.checka
+          address "address" bibinfo.check output
+        }
+        'skip$
+      if$
+    }
+    {
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>      organization address new.block.checkb
+      organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+      address "address" bibinfo.check output
+    }
+  if$
+  format.edition output
+%<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date output
+%<doi>  format.doi output
+%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.url output
+%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
+  format.note output
+%<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.date "year" output.check
+%</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.date output
+%</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<eprint>  format.eprint output
+%<revdata>  format.url output
+  fin.entry
+%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
+}
+
+%</!ay>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`mastersthesis'}
+% \changes{2.0}{1994 Feb 7}{Add \texttt{thtit-a} to format thesis titles like
+%         articles instead of books.}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: school via \texttt{bibinfo.warn}; call
+%     \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
+% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{Add \texttt{thtit-x}.}
+% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
+% To format a master's thesis.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+%<ay>  author format.key output
+%<au-col>  add.colon
+%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
+%<dt-beg>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<dt-beg>  date.block
+%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<*!thtit-x>
+%<!thtit-a>  format.btitle
+%<thtit-a>  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+%<thtit-a&blk-com&tit-qq>  end.quote.title
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
+%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
+%</!thtit-x>
+  bbl.mthesis format.thesis.type output.nonnull
+  school "school" bibinfo.warn output
+  address "address" bibinfo.check output
+%<!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<doi>  format.doi output
+%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.url output
+%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
+  format.note output
+%<*!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.date "year" output.check
+%</!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<eprint>  format.eprint output
+%<revdata>  format.url output
+  fin.entry
+%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`misc'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {misc}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors output
+%<ay>  author format.key output
+%<au-col>  add.colon
+%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
+%<ay&dt-beg>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<!ay&dt-beg>  format.date output
+%<*ay>
+%<dt-beg>  date.block
+%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.title output
+%<blk-com&tit-qq>  end.quote.title
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
+%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
+%</ay>
+%<*!ay>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  title howpublished new.block.checkb
+  format.title output
+%<blk-com&tit-qq>  end.quote.title
+%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
+%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  howpublished new.block.checka
+%</!ay>
+  howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+%<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date output
+%<doi>  format.doi output
+%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.url output
+%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
+  format.note output
+%<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.date "year" output.check
+%</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.date output
+%</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<eprint>  format.eprint output
+%<revdata>  format.url output
+  fin.entry
+%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
+%<!ay>  empty.misc.check
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`phdthesis'}
+% \changes{2.0}{1994 Feb 7}{Add \texttt{thtit-a} to format thesis titles like
+%         articles instead of books.}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: school via \texttt{bibinfo.warn}; call
+%     \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
+% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{Add \texttt{thtit-x}.}
+% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
+% To format a doctoral thesis.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {phdthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+%<ay>  author format.key output
+%<au-col>  add.colon
+%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
+%<dt-beg>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<dt-beg>  date.block
+%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<*!thtit-x>
+%<!thtit-a>  format.btitle
+%<thtit-a>  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+%<thtit-a&blk-com&tit-qq>  end.quote.title
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
+%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
+%</!thtit-x>
+  bbl.phdthesis format.thesis.type output.nonnull
+  school "school" bibinfo.warn output
+  address "address" bibinfo.check output
+%<!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<doi>  format.doi output
+%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.url output
+%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
+  format.note output
+%<*!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.date "year" output.check
+%</!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<eprint>  format.eprint output
+%<revdata>  format.url output
+  fin.entry
+%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`proceedings'}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
+% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ay>
+FUNCTION {proceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.editors output
+  editor format.key output
+%<au-col>  add.colon
+%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
+%<dt-beg>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<dt-beg>  date.block
+%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.btitle "title" output.check
+  format.bvolume output
+%<!numser>  format.number.series output
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.sentence
+%<numser>  format.number.series output
+  publisher empty$
+    { format.organization.address output }
+    { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+      format.publisher.address output
+    }
+  if$
+%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!pub-date>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<isbn>  format.isbn output
+%<issn>  format.issn output
+%<doi>  format.doi output
+%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.url output
+%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
+  format.note output
+%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.date "year" output.check
+%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date>
+%<eprint>  format.eprint output
+%<revdata>  format.url output
+  fin.entry
+%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
+}
+
+%</ay>
+%<*!ay>
+FUNCTION {proceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+  editor empty$
+    { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+    }
+    { format.editors output.nonnull }
+  if$
+%<au-col>  add.colon
+%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
+%<dt-beg>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<dt-beg>  date.block
+%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.btitle "title" output.check
+  format.bvolume output
+%<!numser>  format.number.series output
+  editor empty$
+    { publisher empty$
+        'skip$
+        {
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>          new.sentence
+%<numser>          format.number.series output
+          format.publisher.address output
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+    { publisher empty$
+        {
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>          new.sentence
+          format.organization.address output }
+        {
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>          new.sentence
+          organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+          format.publisher.address output
+        }
+      if$
+     }
+  if$
+%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!pub-date>      format.date "year" output.check
+%<isbn>  format.isbn output
+%<issn>  format.issn output
+%<doi>  format.doi output
+%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.url output
+%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
+  format.note output
+%<*!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.date "year" output.check
+%</!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<eprint>  format.eprint output
+%<revdata>  format.url output
+  fin.entry
+%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
+}
+
+%</!ay>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`techreport'}
+% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 4}{Add option \texttt{trtit-b}}
+% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 25}{Add option \texttt{trnum-it}}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: institution via \texttt{bibinfo.warn}; call
+%  \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
+% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {techreport}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+%<ay>  author format.key output
+%<au-col>  add.colon
+%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
+%<dt-beg>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<dt-beg>  date.block
+%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<trtit-b>  format.btitle
+%<!trtit-b>  format.title
+  "title" output.check
+%<!trtit-b&blk-com&tit-qq>  end.quote.title
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<blk-tit&!tit-col>  new.sentence
+%<blk-tit&tit-col>  add.colon
+%<!trnum-it>  format.tr.number output.nonnull
+%<trnum-it>  format.tr.number emphasize output.nonnull
+  institution "institution" bibinfo.warn output
+  address "address" bibinfo.check output
+%<!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<doi>  format.doi output
+%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.url output
+%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
+  format.note output
+%<*!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.date "year" output.check
+%</!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<eprint>  format.eprint output
+%<revdata>  format.url output
+  fin.entry
+%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`unpublished'}
+% \changes{3.85}{1997 Nov 25}{Fix date at normal end}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: call \texttt{format.eprint}, and \texttt{format.url}.}
+% \changes{4.10}{2003 May 28}{Add \texttt{format.doi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {unpublished}
+{ output.bibitem
+  format.authors "author" output.check
+%<ay>  author format.key output
+%<au-col>  add.colon
+%<nmdash>  name.or.dash
+%<ay&dt-beg>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<!ay&dt-beg>  format.date output
+%<dt-beg>  date.block
+%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.title "title" output.check
+%<blk-com&tit-qq>  end.quote.title
+%<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date "year" output.check
+%<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end>  format.date output
+%<doi>  format.doi output
+%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.url output
+%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt>  new.sentence
+  format.note "note" output.check
+%<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.date output
+%</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita>  new.block
+  format.date output
+%</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end>
+%<eprint>  format.eprint output
+%<revdata>  format.url output
+  fin.entry
+%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata>  write.url
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`default.type'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {default.type} { misc }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+READ
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ay|alph|!seq-no>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`sortify'}
+% \changes{3.8}{1996 Feb 29}{Do not allow unsorted alphas}
+% In \texttt{btxbst.doc}/\texttt{.mbs}, the \texttt{sortify} function is
+% left out for unsorted alpha-style citations. This leads to an error,
+% because it is still used. So leave it in here too. \emph{In fact, do away
+% with unsorted alpha style, since it is as useless as unsorted author--year
+% listings.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {sortify}
+{ purify$
+  "l" change.case$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+INTEGERS { len }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`chop.word'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {chop.word}
+{ 's :=
+  'len :=
+  s #1 len substring$ =
+    { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
+    's
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!ay&alph>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`format.lab.names'}
+% \changes{3.8}{1996 Feb 29}{Add option \texttt{alph} for \texttt{alpha.bst}
+%    style of labels}
+% \changes{3.84}{1997 Nov 4}{Add options \texttt{alf-1} and \texttt{alf-f}}
+% \changes{3.85}{1997 Dec 1}{Add option \texttt{jnrlab}}
+% \changes{3.85}{1996 Feb 6}{Recode author font}
+% The function \texttt{format.lab.names} formats by author--year or the
+% \texttt{alpha} style as in the original \texttt{alpha.bst}.
+% Only major difference is that there should be no unsorted (\texttt{seq-no})
+% versions of this. Patashnik was clearly very unhappy about accommodating
+% such an animal, and in fact, his unsorted alpha style crashes \btx.
+% I also provide the \texttt{vonx} option here to ignore the \textsl{von}
+% part of the name.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+INTEGERS { et.al.char.used }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {initialize.et.al.char.used}
+{ #0 'et.al.char.used :=
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+EXECUTE {initialize.et.al.char.used}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
+{ 's :=
+%<*alf-1>
+%<!vonx>  s #1 "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$
+%<vonx>  s #1 "{l{}}" format.name$
+  duplicate$ text.length$ #2 <
+    { pop$ s #1 "{ll}" format.name$ #3 text.prefix$ }
+      'skip$
+    if$
+%</alf-1>
+%<*!alf-1&alf-f>
+%<!vonx>  s #1 "{vv{}}{ll}" format.name$
+%<vonx>  s #1 "{ll}" format.name$
+%</!alf-1&alf-f>
+%<*!alf-1&!alf-f>
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames #1 >
+    { numnames #4 >
+        { #3 'namesleft := }
+        { numnames 'namesleft := }
+      if$
+      #1 'nameptr :=
+      ""
+        { namesleft #0 > }
+        { nameptr numnames =
+            { s nameptr "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" =
+                { "{\etalchar{+}}" *
+                  #1 'et.al.char.used :=
+                }
+%<!vonx>                { s nameptr "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ * }
+%<vonx>                { s nameptr "{l{}}" format.name$ * }
+              if$
+            }
+%<!vonx>            { s nameptr "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ * }
+%<vonx>            { s nameptr "{l{}}" format.name$ * }
+          if$
+          nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+          namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+        }
+      while$
+      numnames #4 >
+        { "{\etalchar{+}}" *
+          #1 'et.al.char.used :=
+        }
+        'skip$
+      if$
+    }
+%<!vonx>    { s #1 "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$
+%<vonx>    { s #1 "{l{}}" format.name$
+      duplicate$ text.length$ #2 <
+        { pop$ s #1 "{ll}" format.name$ #3 text.prefix$ }
+        'skip$
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+%</!alf-1&!alf-f>
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</!ay&alph>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 20}{Reset \texttt{t}; might still be ``others''
+%         from last format function}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ay>
+FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
+{ 's :=
+  "" 't :=
+%<!jnrlab>  s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
+%<*jnrlab>
+%<!nm-rv&!nm-rvv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx>  s #1 "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$
+%<nm-rv|nm-rvv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx>  s #1 "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" format.name$
+%</jnrlab>
+%<lab&and-rm>  cite.name.font
+  s num.names$ duplicate$
+  #2 >
+    { pop$
+%<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)>      cite.name.font
+%<*!etal-it>
+%<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm>      " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font *
+%<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm>      " " * bbl.etal *
+%</!etal-it>
+%<etal-it>      " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
+%<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)>      cite.name.font
+%<lab&!and-rm>      "others" 't :=
+    }
+    { #2 <
+        'skip$
+        { s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" =
+            {
+% %<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)>              cite.name.font
+%<*!etal-it>
+%<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm>              " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font *
+%<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm>              " " * bbl.etal *
+%</!etal-it>
+%<etal-it>              " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
+%<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)>              cite.name.font
+%<lab&!and-rm>              "others" 't :=
+            }
+%<*!harnm>
+%<*!amper>
+            { bbl.and space.word * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
+%<lab&and-rm>              cite.name.font
+              * }
+%</!amper>
+%<*amper>
+            { " \& " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
+%<lab&and-rm>              cite.name.font
+              * }
+%</amper>
+%</!harnm>
+%<*harnm>
+            { " \harvardand{} " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
+%<lab&and-rm>              cite.name.font
+              * }
+%</harnm>
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+%<*lab&!and-rm>
+  t "others" =
+    'skip$
+    { cite.name.font }
+  if$
+%</lab&!and-rm>
+}
+
+%</ay>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`author.key.label'}
+% \begin{macro}{`author.editor.key.label'}
+% \begin{macro}{`author.key.organization.label'}
+% \begin{macro}{`editor.key.organization.label'}
+% \begin{macro}{`editor.key.label'}
+% Have to be very careful with the options \texttt{ay}, \texttt{alph}, and
+% \texttt{seq-no} here. The first two are actually mutually exclusive, and
+% \texttt{ay} should dominate. The \texttt{seq-no} option only applies for
+% numerical (\texttt{!ay}) but not alphabetic (\texttt{alph}) selections.
+% This whole block of coding dealing with labels is only included for
+% author--year or alphabetic or ordered numerical.
+% That is, \texttt{ay} or \texttt{alph} or \texttt{!seq-no} is true.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ay|alph>
+FUNCTION {author.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+%<ay>        'key
+%<!ay>        { key #3 text.prefix$ }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        { key empty$
+            { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+%<ay>            'key
+%<!ay>            { key #3 text.prefix$ }
+          if$
+        }
+        { editor format.lab.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+%</ay|alph>
+%<*!ay&alph>
+FUNCTION {author.key.organization.label}
+{ author empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { organization empty$
+            { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+            { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ }
+          if$
+        }
+        { key #3 text.prefix$ }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.key.organization.label}
+{ editor empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { organization empty$
+            { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+            { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ }
+          if$
+        }
+        { key #3 text.prefix$ }
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+%</!ay&alph>
+%<*ay>
+FUNCTION {editor.key.label}
+{ editor empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+        'key
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor format.lab.names }
+  if$
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`calc.short.authors'}
+% \changes{3.3}{1995 Sep 4}{Add function to store short list of authors
+%     for later test}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {calc.short.authors}
+{ type$ "book" =
+  type$ "inbook" =
+  or
+    'author.editor.key.label
+    { type$ "proceedings" =
+        'editor.key.label
+        'author.key.label
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  'short.list :=
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`calc.label'}
+% \changes{1.5(2.3)a}{1994 Oct 11}{Add option \texttt{note-yr}}
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Mar 3}{Add options \texttt{lab-bf} and \texttt{lab-sc}}
+% \changes{3.3}{1995 Sep 4}{Use \texttt{calc.short.authors}}
+% \changes{3.8}{1996 Feb 29}{Add \texttt{calc.label} from \texttt{alpha.bst}}
+% \changes{3.89}{1999 May 12}{Add \texttt{keyxyr} option}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {calc.label}
+{ calc.short.authors
+  short.list
+%<!(har|ast|cay|nmd|alk|cn)>  "("
+%<har|ast|cay|nmd|alk|cn>  ", "
+  *
+  year duplicate$ empty$
+%<keyxyr>  short.list key field.or.null = or
+%<(blkyear|keyxyr)>     { pop$ "" }
+%<!(blkyear|keyxyr)>     { pop$ "????" }
+%<!note-yr>     { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ }
+%<note-yr>     'skip$
+  if$
+  *
+  'label :=
+}
+
+%</ay>
+%<*!ay&alph>
+FUNCTION {calc.label}
+{ type$ "book" =
+  type$ "inbook" =
+  or
+    'author.editor.key.label
+    { type$ "proceedings" =
+        'editor.key.organization.label
+        { type$ "manual" =
+            'author.key.organization.label
+            'author.key.label
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  duplicate$
+  year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #2 substring$
+  *
+  'label :=
+  year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$
+  *
+  sortify 'sort.label :=
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</!ay&alph>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ay>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*har|cay|nmd|ast|cn>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`calc.short.label'}
+% \changes{3.3}{1995 Sep 4}{Use \texttt{calc.short.authors}}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {calc.short.label}
+{ calc.short.authors short.list
+  'label :=
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</har|cay|nmd|ast|cn>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</ay>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`sort.format.names'}
+% \changes{1.7(2.5)}{1995 Feb 9}{Make ordering of `et al' works by year
+%    and authors and not just year}
+% \changes{3.0}{1995 Feb 27}{Option \texttt{nm-revf} to act just as default}
+% \changes{3.2}{1995 Jun 16}{Add option \texttt{vonx} so sorting ignores the
+%   \emph{von} part of the name}
+% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 24}{For limited authors, sort only on those present}
+% \changes{3.5}{1995 Oct 24}{`Et al' considered author before all others}
+% \changes{3.83}{1997 Feb 25}{`Et al' considered author after all others}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {sort.format.names}
+{ 's :=
+  #1 'nameptr :=
+  ""
+  s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+  numnames 'namesleft :=
+    { namesleft #0 > }
+    { s nameptr
+%<*!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1&!nm-rv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx&!nm-rvv>
+%<!vonx>      "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{  ff{ }}{  jj{ }}"
+%<vonx>      "{ll{ }}{  ff{ }}{  jj{ }}"
+%</!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1&!nm-rv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx&!nm-rvv>
+%<*nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1|nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|nm-rvv>
+%<!vonx>      "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{  f{ }}{  jj{ }}"
+%<vonx>      "{ll{ }}{  f{ }}{  jj{ }}"
+%</nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1|nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|nm-rvv>
+      format.name$ 't :=
+      nameptr #1 >
+        {
+%<*nmlm>
+%<m1>          nameptr #1
+%<m2>          nameptr #2
+%<m3>          nameptr #3
+%<m4>          nameptr #4
+%<m5>          nameptr #5
+%<m6>          nameptr #6
+%<m7>          nameptr #7
+%<m8>          nameptr #8
+%<m9>          nameptr #9
+%<m0>          nameptr #0
+%<m10>          #10 +
+%<m20>          #20 +
+%<m30>          #30 +
+%<m40>          #40 +
+%<m50>          #50 +
+%<m60>          #60 +
+%<m70>          #70 +
+%<m80>          #80 +
+%<m90>          #90 +
+          #1 + =
+%<x1>          numnames #1
+%<x2>          numnames #2
+%<x3>          numnames #3
+%<x4>          numnames #4
+%<x5>          numnames #5
+%<x6>          numnames #6
+%<x7>          numnames #7
+%<x8>          numnames #8
+%<x9>          numnames #9
+%<x0>          numnames #0
+%<x10>          #10 +
+%<x20>          #20 +
+%<x30>          #30 +
+%<x40>          #40 +
+%<x50>          #50 +
+%<x60>          #60 +
+%<x70>          #70 +
+%<x80>          #80 +
+%<x90>          #90 +
+          > and
+            { "others" 't :=
+              #1 'namesleft := }
+            'skip$
+          if$
+%</nmlm>
+          "   "  *
+          namesleft #1 = t "others" = and
+            { "zzzzz" * }
+%<*seq-lab|seq-key>
+            { numnames #2 > nameptr #2 = and
+                { "zz" * year field.or.null * "   " * }
+                'skip$
+              if$
+              t sortify *
+            }
+%</seq-lab|seq-key>
+%<!seq-lab&!seq-key>            { t sortify * }
+          if$
+        }
+        { t sortify * }
+      if$
+      nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+      namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+    }
+  while$
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`sort.format.title'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {sort.format.title}
+{ 't :=
+  "A " #2
+    "An " #3
+      "The " #4 t chop.word
+    chop.word
+  chop.word
+  sortify
+  #1 global.max$ substring$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`author.sort'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {author.sort}
+{ author empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$
+          ""
+        }
+        { key sortify }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`author.editor.sort'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {author.editor.sort}
+{ author empty$
+    { editor empty$
+        { key empty$
+            { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$
+              ""
+            }
+            { key sortify }
+          if$
+        }
+        { editor sort.format.names }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`negate.year'}
+% \changes{4.03}{2002 Jan 14}{Add function for ordering by descending years}
+% This function negates the year by substituting each digit by its
+% complement. That is, 0 $\rightarrow$ 9, 1 $\rightarrow$ 8, etc. This is used
+% to provide ordering by descending year (latest year first).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*seq-yrr&!seq-yr>
+FUNCTION {negate.year}
+{ year empty$
+    { "99999" }
+    { year #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$
+      year #2 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ *
+      year #3 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ *
+      year #4 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ *
+    }
+    if$
+}
+%</seq-yrr&!seq-yr>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ay>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`editor.sort'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {editor.sort}
+{ editor empty$
+    { key empty$
+        { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$
+          ""
+        }
+        { key sortify }
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*seq-no>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+INTEGERS { seq.num }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`init.seq'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {init.seq}
+{ #0 'seq.num :=}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+EXECUTE {init.seq}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`int.to.fix'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {int.to.fix}
+{ "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ *
+  #-1 #10 substring$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</seq-no>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`presort'}
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Sep 16}{Add option \texttt{seq-no} to author--year}
+% For unsorted author--year, make up the final sorting order in
+% \texttt{sort.label} with the original sequence number, for unsorting later.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {presort}
+{ calc.label
+  label sortify
+  "    "
+  *
+%<*!seq-no>
+  type$ "book" =
+  type$ "inbook" =
+  or
+    'author.editor.sort
+    { type$ "proceedings" =
+        'editor.sort
+        'author.sort
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+%</!seq-no>
+%<*seq-no>
+  seq.num #1 + 'seq.num :=
+  seq.num  int.to.fix
+%</seq-no>
+  'sort.label :=
+  sort.label
+  *
+  "    "
+  *
+%<seq-yr>  "    " * year field.or.null *
+%<seq-yrr&!seq-yr>  "    " * negate.year field.or.null *
+%<*!seq-key&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr>
+  title field.or.null
+  sort.format.title
+%</!seq-key&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr>
+%<seq-key|seq-yr|seq-yrr>  cite$
+  *
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</ay>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!ay>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`author.organization.sort'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {author.organization.sort}
+{ author empty$
+    { organization empty$
+        { key empty$
+            { "to sort, need author, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$
+              ""
+            }
+            { key sortify }
+          if$
+        }
+        { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify }
+      if$
+    }
+    { author sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`editor.organization.sort'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {editor.organization.sort}
+{ editor empty$
+    { organization empty$
+        { key empty$
+            { "to sort, need editor, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$
+              ""
+            }
+            { key sortify }
+          if$
+        }
+        { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify }
+      if$
+    }
+    { editor sort.format.names }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`presort'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {presort}
+%<*alph>
+{ calc.label
+  sort.label
+  "    "
+  *
+  type$ "book" =
+%</alph>
+%<!alph>{ type$ "book" =
+  type$ "inbook" =
+  or
+    'author.editor.sort
+    { type$ "proceedings" =
+        'editor.organization.sort
+        { type$ "manual" =
+            'author.organization.sort
+            'author.sort
+          if$
+        }
+      if$
+    }
+  if$
+%<alph>  *
+  "    "
+  *
+%<seq-yrr>  negate.year field.or.null sortify
+%<!seq-yrr>  year field.or.null sortify
+%<!(seq-yr|seq-yrr)|alph>  *
+  "    "
+  *
+%<(seq-yr|seq-yrr)&!alph>  swap$ *
+  title field.or.null
+  sort.format.title
+  *
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.key$ :=
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</!ay>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ITERATE {presort}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+SORT
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</ay|alph|!seq-no>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{`forward.pass'}
+% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 5}{Include number of references in argument to
+%     \texttt{thebibliography} environment}
+% With version~6.0 of \texttt{natbib}, the author-year styles can also be
+% used for numerical citations; then the \texttt{thebibliography} environment
+% must have an argument indicating the length of the longest label.
+% Simply count the references and add this number as the argument.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ay>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+STRINGS { last.label next.extra }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+INTEGERS { last.extra.num number.label }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`initialize.extra.label.stuff'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label :=
+  "" 'next.extra :=
+  #0 'last.extra.num :=
+  #0 'number.label :=
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`forward.pass'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {forward.pass}
+{ last.label label =
+    { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
+      last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
+    }
+    { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
+      "" 'extra.label :=
+      label 'last.label :=
+    }
+  if$
+  number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</ay>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!ay&alph>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+STRINGS { longest.label last.sort.label next.extra }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+INTEGERS { longest.label.width last.extra.num }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`initialize.longest.label'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label}
+{ "" 'longest.label :=
+  #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.sort.label :=
+  "" 'next.extra :=
+  #0 'longest.label.width :=
+  #0 'last.extra.num :=
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`forward.pass'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {forward.pass}
+{ last.sort.label sort.label =
+    { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
+      last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
+    }
+    { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
+      "" 'extra.label :=
+      sort.label 'last.sort.label :=
+    }
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</!ay&alph>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`reverse.pass'}
+% \changes{3.3}{1995 Aug 7}{Put extra label in braces}
+% The extra label is added in braces so that natbib can treat it as one unit.
+% This allows extra labels to be more than one letter long. For non-NFSS
+% emphasizing, this is no problem, since labels go in |{\em a}|, but for
+% non-emphasizing and for NFSS, it caused troubles without the braces.
+% The trouble arises with multiple citations in one |\cite| in which
+% authors and years are the same, and only the extra label is given for
+% the next one. Note: |\emph{a}| is more than one letter long in this sense,
+% so it is not just a problem for more than 26 papers with same authors and
+% year.
+%
+% \changes{3.81}{1996 Jun 17}{Add \texttt{\char`\\natexlab}}
+% The command |\natexlab| now encloses the extra label for \texttt{natbib}
+% styles. This command normally just prints its argument, but for numerical
+% citation mode, it swallows its argument. This allows the extra labels to
+% be suppressed for numerical citations where they are superfluous.
+% The enclosing braces mentioned above must be included here to make the
+% entire extra label text a single token for \texttt{natbib}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ay>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
+{ next.extra "b" =
+    { "a" 'extra.label := }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  extra.label 'next.extra :=
+  extra.label
+%<xlab-it>  emphasize
+%<*!html>
+  duplicate$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * }
+  if$
+%</!html>
+  'extra.label :=
+%<!(har|ast|cay|nmd|cn)>  label extra.label * 'label :=
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</ay>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!ay&alph>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
+{ next.extra "b" =
+    { "a" 'extra.label := }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  label extra.label * 'label :=
+  label width$ longest.label.width >
+    { label 'longest.label :=
+      label width$ 'longest.label.width :=
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  extra.label 'next.extra :=
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</!ay&alph>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<ay>EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+%<!ay&alph>EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ay|alph>
+ITERATE {forward.pass}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+REVERSE {reverse.pass}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</ay|alph>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ay>
+FUNCTION {bib.sort.order}
+{ sort.label
+  "    "
+  *
+%<seq-yrr>  negate.year field.or.null sortify
+%<!seq-yrr>  year field.or.null sortify
+%<(seq-yr|seq-yrr)&!(seq-lab|seq-key)>  swap$
+  *
+  "    "
+  *
+%<*!seq-key&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr>
+  title field.or.null
+  sort.format.title
+%</!seq-key&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr>
+%<seq-key|seq-yr|seq-yrr>  cite$
+  *
+  #1 entry.max$ substring$
+  'sort.key$ :=
+%<har|cay|nmd|cn|ast>  calc.short.label
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ITERATE {bib.sort.order}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+SORT
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</ay>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!ay&!alph>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+STRINGS { longest.label }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label}
+{ "" 'longest.label :=
+  #1 'number.label :=
+  #0 'longest.label.width :=
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {longest.label.pass}
+%<*!cite>
+{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label :=
+  number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
+%</!cite>
+%<cite>{ cite$ 'label :=
+  label width$ longest.label.width >
+    { label 'longest.label :=
+      label width$ 'longest.label.width :=
+    }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ITERATE {longest.label.pass}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</!ay&!alph>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`begin.bib'}
+% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{For \texttt{german}, add the definition of
+%    {\tt\protect\bslash qq} to replace double-quote character.}
+% \changes{2.0}{1994 Jan 31}{For \texttt{babel}, read in file
+% \texttt{babelbst.tex} in \texttt{thebibliography} to define the word
+%  commands.}
+% \changes{3.4}{1995 Sep 5}{Add number of references as argument}
+% \changes{3.89d1}{1999 July 20}{AO: provide default meanings for procedures used.}
+% The function \texttt{begin.bib} writes  the initial text to the \texttt{.bbl}
+% file. The most important matter here is that the \texttt{thebibliography}
+% environment is invoked.
+%
+% Note: the French quotation marks are called `guillimets'; Adobe erroneously
+% named the symbols `guillimot', which is an arctic bird. The error has so
+% propagated, that it can no longer be corrected. \LaTeX\ took it over.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {begin.bib}
+%<*!html>
+%<*!ay&alph>
+{ et.al.char.used
+    { "\newcommand{\etalchar}[1]{$^{#1}$}" write$ newline$ }
+    'skip$
+  if$
+  preamble$ empty$
+%</!ay&alph>
+%<ay|!alph>{ preamble$ empty$
+    'skip$
+    { preamble$ write$ newline$ }
+  if$
+%<ay>  "\begin{thebibliography}{" number.label int.to.str$ * "}" *
+%<!ay>  "\begin{thebibliography}{"  longest.label  * "}" *
+  write$ newline$
+%<*(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))>
+ "\typeout{**********************************}" write$ newline$
+ "\typeout{WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING}" write$ newline$
+ "\typeout{The bst file has been generated with inconsistent options}"
+   write$ newline$
+ "\typeout{Read the warning message at the start of the bst file}"
+   write$ newline$
+ "\typeout{**********************************}" write$ newline$
+%</(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))>
+%<*!plntx>
+%<!tit-it&tit-qq&qt-s>  "\newcommand{\enquote}[1]{`#1'}"
+%<!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&!qt-g>  "\newcommand{\enquote}[1]{``#1''}"
+%</!plntx>
+%<*plntx>
+%<!tit-it&tit-qq&qt-s>  "\def\enquote#1{`#1'}"
+%<!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&!qt-g>  "\def\enquote#1{``#1''}"
+%</plntx>
+%<*!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&qt-g>
+%<!plntx>  "\ProvideTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{OT1}{%"
+%<plntx>  "\def\guillemotleft{%"
+  write$ newline$
+  "  \leavevmode\raise .27ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\ll$}}"
+  write$ newline$
+%<!plntx>  "\ProvideTextCommand{\guillemotright}{OT1}{%"
+%<plntx>  "\def\guillemotright{%"
+  write$ newline$
+  "  \leavevmode\raise .27ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\gg$}}"
+  write$ newline$
+%<!plntx>  "\newcommand{\enquote}[1]{\guillemotleft#1\guillemotright}"
+%<plntx>  "\def\enquote#1{\guillemotleft#1\guillemotright}"
+%</!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&qt-g>
+%<!tit-it&tit-qq>  write$ newline$
+%<umlaut>  "\let\qq=\" quote$ * write$ newline$
+%<em-ul>  "\expandafter\ifx\csname uline\endcsname\relax\let\uline\underline\fi"
+%<em-ul>   write$ newline$
+%<*ay>
+%<!plntx>  "\providecommand{\natexlab}[1]{#1}"
+%<plntx>  "\expandafter\ifx\csname natexlab\endcsname\relax\def\natexlab#1{#1}\fi"
+  write$ newline$
+%<*har>
+  "{\catcode`\|=0\catcode`\#=12\catcode`\@=11\catcode`\\=12" write$ newline$
+  "|immediate|write|@auxout{\expandafter\ifx\csname natexlab\endcsname\relax\gdef\natexlab#1{#1}\fi}}"
+  write$ newline$
+%</har>
+%</ay>
+%<*nmft&nmft-def>
+%<!plntx>  "\providecommand{\bibnamefont}[1]{#1}"
+%<plntx>  "\expandafter\ifx\csname bibnamefont\endcsname\relax"
+%<plntx>  write$ newline$
+%<plntx>  "  \def\bibnamefont#1{#1}\fi"
+  write$ newline$
+%</nmft&nmft-def>
+%<*nmft&fnm-def>
+%<!plntx>  "\providecommand{\bibfnamefont}[1]{#1}"
+%<plntx>  "\expandafter\ifx\csname bibfnamefont\endcsname\relax"
+%<plntx>  write$ newline$
+%<plntx>  "  \def\bibfnamefont#1{#1}\fi"
+  write$ newline$
+%</nmft&fnm-def>
+%<*lab&lab-def>
+%<!plntx>  "\providecommand{\citenamefont}[1]{#1}"
+%<plntx>  "\expandafter\ifx\csname citenamefont\endcsname\relax"
+%<plntx>  write$ newline$
+%<plntx>  "  \def\citenamefont#1{#1}\fi"
+  write$ newline$
+%</lab&lab-def>
+%<*(url&!harnm)|eprint>
+%<*!plntx>
+%<nfss>  "\providecommand{\url}[1]{\texttt{#1}}"
+%<!nfss>  "\providecommand{\url}[1]{{\tt #1}}"
+  write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand{\urlprefix}{URL }"
+  write$ newline$
+%</!plntx>
+%<*plntx>
+  "\expandafter\ifx\csname url\endcsname\relax"
+  write$ newline$
+%<nfss>  "  \def\url#1{\texttt{#1}}\fi"
+%<!nfss>  "  \def\url#1{{\tt #1}}\fi"
+  write$ newline$
+  "\expandafter\ifx\csname urlprefix\endcsname\relax\def\urlprefix{URL }\fi"
+  write$ newline$
+%</plntx>
+%</(url&!harnm)|eprint>
+%<*doi>
+  "\expandafter\ifx\csname urlstyle\endcsname\relax"
+  write$ newline$
+%<*!plntx>
+  "  \providecommand{\doi}[1]{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}#1}\else"
+  write$ newline$
+  "  \providecommand{\doi}{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}\begingroup \urlstyle{rm}\Url}\fi"
+  write$ newline$
+%</!plntx>
+%<*plntx>
+  "  \expandafter\ifx\csname doi\endcsname\relax"
+  write$ newline$
+  "  \def\doi#1{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}#1}\fi \else"
+  write$ newline$
+  "  \expandafter\ifx\csname doi\endcsname\relax"
+  write$ newline$
+  "  \def\doi{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}\begingroup \urlstyle{rm}\Url}\fi \fi"
+  write$ newline$
+%</plntx>
+%</doi>
+%<*lang>
+%<!plntx>  "\providecommand{\selectlanguage}[1]{\relax}"
+%<*plntx>
+  "\expandafter\ifx\csname selectlanguage\endcsname\relax"
+  write$ newline$
+  "  \def\selectlanguage#1{}\fi"
+%</plntx>
+  write$ newline$
+%</lang>
+%<*!plntx>
+%<*babel>
+  "\input{babelbst.tex}" write$ newline$
+  "\newcommand{\Capitalize}[1]{\uppercase{#1}}" write$ newline$
+  "\newcommand{\capitalize}[1]{\expandafter\Capitalize#1}" write$ newline$
+%</babel>
+%<*annote>
+  "\providecommand{\bibAnnoteFile}[1]{%"
+  write$ newline$
+  "  \IfFileExists{#1}{\begin{quotation}\noindent\textsc{Key:} #1\\"
+  write$ newline$
+  "  \textsc{Annotation:}\ \input{#1}\end{quotation}}{}}"
+  write$ newline$
+  "\providecommand{\bibAnnote}[2]{%"
+  write$ newline$
+  "  \begin{quotation}\noindent\textsc{Key:} #1\\"
+  write$ newline$
+  "  \textsc{Annotation:}\ #2\end{quotation}}"
+  write$ newline$
+%</annote>
+%</!plntx>
+%<*bibinfo>
+%<!plntx>  "\providecommand{\bibinfo}[2]{#2}"
+%<plntx>  "\expandafter\ifx\csname bibinfo\endcsname\relax\def\bibinfo#1#2{#2}\fi"
+  write$ newline$
+%</bibinfo>
+%<*eprint>
+%<!plntx>  "\providecommand{\eprint}[2][]{\url{#2}}"
+%<plntx>  "\expandafter\ifx\csname eprint\endcsname\relax\def\eprint#1{\url{#1}}\fi"
+  write$ newline$
+%</eprint>
+}
+%</!html>
+%<*html>
+{
+"<html><head><title>Bibliography Listing</title></head>" write$ newline$
+"<body>" write$ newline$
+"<h2>Bibliography</h2>" write$ newline$
+%<htdes>"<dl>" write$ newline$
+%<!htdes&htlist>"<ol>" write$ newline$
+}
+%</html>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+EXECUTE {begin.bib}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+EXECUTE {init.state.consts}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ITERATE {call.type$}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{`end.bib'}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+FUNCTION {end.bib}
+{ newline$
+%<!html>  "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$
+%<html>  "</dl></body></html>" write$ newline$
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+EXECUTE {end.bib}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</!head>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</!options&!driver&!bblbst>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The File \texttt{babelbst.tex} for English}
+% The following contains the definitions for the \texttt{babel} language
+% selection as they apply to English. This file may be extracted with
+% \dtx{} and the option \texttt{bblbst}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bblbst>
+ % This is babelbst.tex for English.
+ % It should serve as a model for other languages.
+ % Alternatively, store it under a different name (e.g. englbst.tex)
+ % and then \input it with a command in babelbst.tex.
+\def\bbland{and}                \def\bbletal{et~al.}
+\def\bbleditors{editors}        \def\bbleds{eds.}
+\def\bbleditor{editor}          \def\bbled{ed.}
+\def\bbledby{edited by}
+\def\bbledition{edition}        \def\bbledn{edn.}
+\def\bblvolume{volume}          \def\bblvol{vol.}
+\def\bblof{of}
+\def\bblnumber{number}          \def\bblno{no.}
+\def\bblin{in}
+\def\bblpages{pages}            \def\bblpp{pp.}
+\def\bblpage{page}              \def\bblp{p.}
+\def\bbleidpp{pages}
+\def\bblchapter{chapter}        \def\bblchap{chap.}
+\def\bbltechreport{Technical Report}
+\def\bbltechrep{Tech. Rep.}
+\def\bblmthesis{Master's thesis}
+\def\bblphdthesis{Ph.D. thesis}
+\def\bblfirst{First}            \def\bblfirsto{1st}
+\def\bblsecond{Second}          \def\bblsecondo{2nd}
+\def\bblthird{Third}            \def\bblthirdo{3rd}
+\def\bblfourth{Fourth}          \def\bblfourtho{4th}
+\def\bblfifth{Fifth}            \def\bblfiftho{5th}
+\def\bblst{st}  \def\bblnd{nd}  \def\bblrd{rd}
+\def\bblth{th}
+\def\bbljan{January}  \def\bblfeb{February}  \def\bblmar{March}
+\def\bblapr{April}    \def\bblmay{May}       \def\bbljun{June}
+\def\bbljul{July}     \def\bblaug{August}    \def\bblsep{September}
+\def\bbloct{October}  \def\bblnov{November}  \def\bbldec{December}
+%</bblbst>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/norsk.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/norsk.mbs
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c7fe487283e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/norsk.mbs
@@ -0,0 +1,316 @@
+%\iffalse         THIS IS A META COMMENT
+% File: norsk.mbs
+% Copyright 1995-1999 Patrick W Daly
+% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Aeronomie
+% Max-Planck-Str. 2
+% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
+% Germany
+% E-mail: daly@linmpi.mpg.de
+%
+% Copyright 1995, Rolf Lindgren, OPERATOR
+% Universitetes Senter for Informasjonsteknologi
+% Pb 1059 Blindern
+% 0316 OSLO
+% E-mail: rolf.lindgren@usit.uio.no
+%
+% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+%
+% It is part of the custom-bib collection,
+%   a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
+%====================================================================
+%       A Language Definition File:  NORWEGIAN
+%     to be included with other master bibliography style files
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%   (See version and date in the \ProvidesFile command below)
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%    This file is self-documenting: simply LaTeX it!
+%====================================================================
+%
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+%\fi
+ % \ProvidesFile{norsk.mbs}[2005/06/03 4.2b (RL/PWD)]
+%\iffalse
+%<*a&!a>
+% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
+% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
+\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
+  \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
+%</a&!a>
+%<*driver>
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
+   \documentclass[a4paper,10pt,twoside]{article}%
+   \usepackage{doc}%
+   \raggedbottom
+   \CodelineNumbered
+   \RecordChanges
+ %  Comment out next line to print coding
+   \OnlyDescription
+   \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.5\paperwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5\textwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+   \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
+
+\begin{document}
+   \DocInput{norsk.mbs}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%                   END OF META COMMENT   \fi
+% \CharacterTable
+%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm}
+%
+% \changes{1.1}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{bbl.etal}}
+% \changes{1.2}{1999 Feb 1}{Add option \texttt{xedn}}
+% \changes{1.2}{1999 Feb 24}{Update copyright notice}
+% \changes{4.0}{1999 Oct 11}{For merlin 4.0}
+% \changes{4.0a}{2002 Oct 18}{Fix bug in page number suppression}
+% \changes{4.2}{2003 Nov 6}{Fix comma separator, consistent with \texttt{makebst} 4.1}
+% \changes{4.2a}{2004 May 6}{Add missing backslash in a menu text}
+% \changes{4.2b}{2005 Jun 3}{Change spelling errors, contrib by Svend Tollak Munkejord}
+%
+% \markboth{Rolf Lindgren}{Norwegian bibliographies}
+%
+% \title{{\bfseries Norwegian Language Definition File}\\
+%      for master bibliographic style files}
+%
+% \author{Patrick W. Daly and Rolf Lindgren}
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{norsk.mbs}
+% \date{This paper describes file \texttt{\filename},\\
+%  version \fileversion{} from \filedate}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \parskip=1ex \parindent=0pt
+%
+% \newcommand{\btx}{{\sc Bib}\TeX}
+% \newcommand{\dtx}{\textsf{docstrip}}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+% This file is to be used as a language definition file with master
+% bibliographic files. The language it defines is
+% \begin{quote}\bfseries Norsk\end{quote}
+%
+% This is not a self-sufficient \texttt{.mbs} file, but rather may
+% be used together with one that contains language support via
+% external definition files.
+%
+% See the documentation for \texttt{makebst} for formatting details.
+%
+% \section{The Menu Information}
+%
+% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
+% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
+% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between |%<*!options&!driver>|
+% \dots\ |%</!options&!driver>| in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
+% extract only the menu information or the documentation driver.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+\mes{^^JOptions for NORSK}
+\wr{\spsp\spsp norsk,\pc: Norwegian language}
+
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`Sider(ne)'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{pp}{`Side' abbreviated}{as s. or ss.}
+\optdef{x}{ppx}{`Side' omitted}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`Redakt{\string\o}r(er)'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{ed}{`Redakt{\string\o}r' abbreviated}{as red.}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of bind, utgave, kapittel, osv.}
+\optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory}
+\optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as f{\string\o}rste, annen, tredje, osv}
+\optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1., 2., 3., osv}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptions
+%</options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
+%
+% \section{The Coding}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!options&!driver>
+
+ % The language selected here is NORSK
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{ "og"}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{ "et~al." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+%<!ed>{ "redakt{\o}rer" }
+%<ed>{ "red." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+%<!ed>{ "redakt{\o}r" }
+%<ed>{ "red." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "redigert av" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+%<!abr>{ "utgave" }
+%<abr>{ "utg." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+%<!abr>{ "bind" }
+%<abr>{ "bd." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "av" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+%<!abr>{ "nummer" }
+%<abr>{ "nr." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "nr." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "i" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "sider" }
+%<pp>{ "ss." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "side" }
+%<pp>{ "s." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+%<*revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "sider" }
+
+%</revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+%<!abr>{ "kapittel" }
+%<abr>{ "kap." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+%<!abr>{ "Teknisk rapport" }
+%<abr>{ "Tekn. rap." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Hovedoppgave" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Doktorgradsavhandling" }
+
+%<*!xedn>
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+%<!ord>{ "F{\o}rste" }
+%<ord>{ "1." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+%<!ord>{ "Annen" }
+%<ord>{ "2." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+%<!ord>{ "Tredje" }
+%<ord>{ "3." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+%<!ord>{ "Fjerde" }
+%<ord>{ "4." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+%<!ord>{ "Femte" }
+%<ord>{ "5." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "." }
+
+%</!xedn>
+%<*!abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"Januar"}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Februar"}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Mars"}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"April"}
+
+MACRO {may} {"Mai"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Juni"}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Juli"}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"August"}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"September"}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Oktober"}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"November"}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Desember"}
+
+%</!abr>
+%<*abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"Mai"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Okt."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Des."}
+
+%</abr>
+%</!options&!driver>
+ % End module: norsk.mbs
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/photjour.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/photjour.mbs
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4cdb4561744
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/photjour.mbs
@@ -0,0 +1,227 @@
+%\iffalse         THIS IS A META COMMENT
+% File: photjour.mbs
+% Copyright 1997-1999 Patrick W Daly
+% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Aeronomie
+% Max-Planck-Str. 2
+% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
+% Germany
+% E-mail: daly@linmpi.mpg.de
+% 
+% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+%
+% It is part of the custom-bib collection, 
+%   a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
+%==================================================================== 
+%       A Journal Definition File for Photonics journals
+%     to be included with other master bibliography style files
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%   (See version and date in the \ProvidesFile command below)
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%    This file is self-documenting: simply LaTeX it!
+%==================================================================== 
+%
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+%\fi
+ % \ProvidesFile{photjour.mbs}[1999/02/24 2.0b (PWD)]
+%\iffalse
+%<*a&!a>
+% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
+% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
+\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
+  \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
+%</a&!a>
+%<*driver>
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
+   \documentclass[a4paper,10pt,twoside]{article}%
+   \usepackage{doc}%
+   \raggedbottom
+   \CodelineNumbered
+   \RecordChanges
+ %  Comment out next line to print coding
+   \OnlyDescription
+   \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.5\paperwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5\textwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+   \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
+
+\begin{document}
+   \DocInput{photjour.mbs}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%                   END OF META COMMENT   \fi
+% \CharacterTable
+%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm}
+%
+% \changes{1.0}{1995 Oct 11}{Initial contributed version}
+% \changes{2.0}{1996 Jun 26}{Reorganize with \texttt{geojour} and
+%         \texttt{physjour}}
+% \changes{2.0a}{1997 Sep 15}{Replace umlaut with Raichle trick}
+% \changes{2.0b}{1999 Feb 24}{Update copyright notice}
+%
+% \pagestyle{myheadings}
+% \markboth{P. W. Daly}{Optics Journal Names}
+%
+% \title{{\bfseries Optics Journal Definition File}\\
+%      for master bibliographic style files}
+%    
+% \author{Patrick W. Daly and Zhenya Sorokin}
+%         
+% \GetFileInfo{photjour.mbs}
+% \date{This paper describes file \texttt{\filename},\\
+%  version \fileversion{} from \filedate}
+% 
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+% 
+% \parskip=1ex \parindent=0pt
+%
+% \newcommand{\btx}{{\sc Bib}\TeX}
+% \newcommand{\dtx}{\textsf{docstrip}}
+% 
+% \section{Introduction}
+% 
+% This file adds a list of preprogrammed optics journal names to
+% bibliographic style files, in both full and abbreviated versions.
+% These defined journal names will be added to those in the main master
+% bibliography style file.
+% 
+% This is not a self-sufficient \texttt{.mbs} file, but rather may
+% be used together with one that contains support for
+% external definition files.
+% 
+% This file was contributed by 
+% \begin{quote}
+% Zhenya Sorokin, email \texttt{sorokin@ps1.iaee.tuwien.ac.at}.
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% Version 2.0: I go through all journal names, checking for conflicts and
+% duplications with \texttt{physjour.mbs} and \texttt{geojour.mbs}.
+% Optical and physical journals removed; geophysical journals included
+% from the others. Where one journal exists with multiple shorthands, 
+% all versions are kept.
+%
+% Version 2.0a: Fixes a problem with umlauts acting as string terminator.
+%
+% Version 2.0b: revise copyright notice to LPPL standard.
+%
+% See the documentation for \texttt{makebst} for formatting details.
+% 
+% \section{The Menu Information}
+% 
+% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
+% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
+% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between |%<*!options>|
+% \dots\ |%</!options>| in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
+% extract only the menu information.
+% 
+% A journal-names files should contain at most only one option, \texttt{jabr}.
+% This is because \texttt{merlin} version~3.5 can now handle several
+% journal-name files, but does not look into them for the options, but
+% rather asks for \texttt{jabr} from the main file. For compatibility with
+% older versions, the option menu must be kept here.
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+\mes{^^JOPTICS JOURNAL NAMES:}
+\optdef{*}{}{Full optics journal names}{}
+\optdef{a}{jabr}{Abbreviate optics names}{for journals}
+\getans
+\endoptions
+%</options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
+%
+% \section{The Coding}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!options>
+%<*jabr>
+
+MACRO {appopt} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {bell} {"Bell Syst. Tech. J."}
+MACRO {ell} {"Electron. Lett."}
+MACRO {jasp} {"J. Appl. Spectr."}
+MACRO {jqe} {"IEEE J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {jlwt} {"J. Lightwave Technol."}
+MACRO {jmo} {"J. Mod. Opt."}
+MACRO {josa} {"J. Opt. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {josaa} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~A"}
+MACRO {josab} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~B"}
+MACRO {jdp} {"J. Phys. (Paris)"}
+MACRO {oc} {"Opt. Commun."}
+MACRO {ol} {"Opt. Lett."}
+MACRO {phtl} {"IEEE Photon. Technol. Lett."}
+MACRO {pspie} {"Proc. Soc. Photo-Opt. Instrum. Eng."}
+MACRO {sse} {"Solid-State Electron."}
+MACRO {sjot} {"Sov. J. Opt. Technol."}
+MACRO {sjqe} {"Sov. J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {sleb} {"Sov. Phys.--Leb. Inst. Rep."}
+MACRO {stph} {"Sov. Phys.--Techn. Phys."}
+MACRO {stphl} {"Sov. Techn. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {vr} {"Vision Res."}
+MACRO {zph} {"Z. f. Physik"}
+MACRO {zphb} {"Z. f. Physik~B"}
+MACRO {zphd} {"Z. f. Physik~D"}
+
+MACRO {CLEO} {"CLEO"}
+MACRO {ASSL} {"Adv. Sol.-State Lasers"}
+MACRO {OSA}  {"OSA"}
+%</jabr>
+%<*!jabr>
+
+MACRO {appopt} {"Applied Optics"}
+MACRO {bell} {"Bell Systems Technical Journal"}
+MACRO {ell} {"Electronics Letters"}
+MACRO {jasp} {"Journal of Applied Spectroscopy"}
+MACRO {jqe} {"IEEE Journal of Quantum Electronics"}
+MACRO {jlwt} {"Journal of Lightwave Technology"}
+MACRO {jmo} {"Journal of Modern Optics"}
+MACRO {josa} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America"}
+MACRO {josaa} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America~A"}
+MACRO {josab} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America~B"}
+MACRO {jdp} {"Journal de Physique"}
+MACRO {oc} {"Optics Communications"}
+MACRO {ol} {"Optics Letters"}
+MACRO {phtl} {"IEEE Photonics Technology Letters"}
+MACRO {pspie} {"Proceedings of the Society for Photo-Optical Instruments Engineers"}
+MACRO {sse} {"Solid-State Electronics"}
+MACRO {sjot} {"Soviet Journal of Optical Technology"}
+MACRO {sjqe} {"Soviet Journal of Quantum Electronics"}
+MACRO {sleb} {"Soviet Physics--Lebedev Institute Reports"}
+MACRO {stph} {"Soviet Physics--Technical Physics"}
+MACRO {stphl} {"Soviet Technical Physics Letters"}
+MACRO {vr} {"Vision Research"}
+MACRO {zph} {"Zeitschrift f\^^b{u}r Physik"}
+MACRO {zphb} {"Zeitschrift f\^^b{u}r Physik~B"}
+MACRO {zphd} {"Zeitschrift f\^^b{u}r Physik~D"}
+
+MACRO {CLEO} {"Conf. on Lasers and Electro-Optics"}
+MACRO {ASSL} {"Advanced Solid State Lasers"}
+MACRO {OSA}  {"Optical Society of America"}
+%</!jabr>
+%</!options>
+ % End module: photjour.mbs 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/physjour.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/physjour.mbs
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2285527f9f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/physjour.mbs
@@ -0,0 +1,398 @@
+%\iffalse         THIS IS A META COMMENT
+% File: physjour.mbs
+% Copyright 1994-2002 Patrick W Daly
+% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Aeronomie
+% Max-Planck-Str. 2
+% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
+% Germany
+% E-mail: daly@linmpi.mpg.de
+%
+% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+%
+% It is part of the custom-bib collection,
+%   a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
+%====================================================================
+%       A Journal Definition File for Physics journals
+%     to be included with other master bibliography style files
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%   (See version and date in the \ProvidesFile command below)
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%    This file is self-documenting: simply LaTeX it!
+%====================================================================
+%
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+%\fi
+ % \ProvidesFile{physjour.mbs}[2002/01/14 2.2 (PWD)]
+%\iffalse
+%<*a&!a>
+% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
+% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
+\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
+  \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
+%</a&!a>
+%<*driver>
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
+   \documentclass[a4paper,10pt,twoside]{article}%
+   \usepackage{doc}%
+   \raggedbottom
+   \CodelineNumbered
+   \RecordChanges
+ %  Comment out next line to print coding
+   \OnlyDescription
+   \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.5\paperwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5\textwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+   \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
+
+\begin{document}
+   \DocInput{physjour.mbs}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%                   END OF META COMMENT   \fi
+% \CharacterTable
+%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm}
+%
+% \changes{1.0}{1995 Mar 15}{Initial version}
+% \changes{1.1}{1995 Sep 4}{Additional journals contributed}
+% \changes{1.2}{1995 Sep 29}{Abbreviation for `applied' to `appl.'}
+% \changes{1.21}{1996 Jun 25}{Add JOSA}
+% \changes{2.0}{1996 Jun 26}{Reorganize with \texttt{geojour} and
+%         \texttt{photjour}}
+% \changes{2.0a}{1996 Dec 3}{\emph{Nuovo Cimento} correctly spelled}
+% \changes{2.0b}{1997 Jul 8}{Add Astronomy and Astrophysics}
+% \changes{2.0c}{1998 Jul 23}{Add Nucl. Phys. B (Proc. Suppl.)}
+% \changes{2.0d}{1999 Feb 10}{Add Astronomy and Astrophysics, Suppl. Ser.}
+% \changes{2.0d}{1999 Feb 17}{Add Astrophys. J., Suppl. Ser.}
+% \changes{2.0d}{1999 Feb 17}{Correct pp to be Physics of Plasmas, not Plasma Physics}
+% \changes{2.0d}{1999 Feb 24}{Update copyright notice}
+% \changes{2.1}{1999 Oct 5}{Add more astronomy journals, and shorthand option}
+% \changes{2.2}{2002 Jan 14}{Correct a typo}
+%
+% \pagestyle{myheadings}
+% \markboth{P. W. Daly}{Physics Journal Names}
+%
+% \title{{\bfseries Physics Journal Definition File}\\
+%      for master bibliographic style files}
+%
+% \author{Patrick W. Daly}
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{physjour.mbs}
+% \date{This paper describes file \texttt{\filename},\\
+%  version \fileversion{} from \filedate}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \parskip=1ex \parindent=0pt
+%
+% \newcommand{\btx}{{\sc Bib}\TeX}
+% \newcommand{\dtx}{\textsf{docstrip}}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% This file adds a list of preprogrammed physics journal names to
+% bibliographic style files, in both full and abbreviated versions.
+% These defined journal names will be added to those in the main master
+% bibliography style file.
+%
+% This is not a self-sufficient \texttt{.mbs} file, but rather may
+% be used together with one that contains support for
+% external definition files.
+%
+% I have taken this list from a number of physics \texttt{.bst} files.
+%
+% Version 1.1: a number of additions have been contributed by `Harald', email
+% \texttt{soleng@surya11.cern.ch}:
+% \begin{quote}\begin{tabular}{lllll}
+% \texttt{ajm} & \texttt{ap} & \texttt{adp} & \texttt{app} & \texttt{cqg}\\
+% \texttt{cra} & \texttt{cmp} & \texttt{cpc} & \texttt{grg} & \texttt{inc}\\
+% \texttt{np} & \texttt{npb} & \texttt{plb} & \texttt{prep} & \texttt{pra}\\
+% \texttt{prb} & \texttt{prc} & \texttt{prd} & \texttt{pre}
+%\end{tabular}\end{quote}
+% whereby \texttt{pra} (\textsl{Phys.\ Rev.\ A}) was not added, rather the
+% text was changed slightly.
+%
+% I have also added \texttt{ag} (\textsl{Annales Geophysic\ae}) and
+% \texttt{npg} (\textsl{Nonlinear Processes in Geophysics}).
+%
+% Version 1.2: Zhenya Sorokin, email \texttt{sorokin@ps1.iaee.tuwien.ac.at},
+% makes abbreviation for `applied' to `appl.'
+%
+% Version 1.21: Ralf Fassel, email \texttt{ralf@natlab.research.philips.com},
+% adds \textsl{Journal of the Acoustical Society of America}.
+%
+% Version 2.0: I go through all journal names, checking for conflicts and
+% duplications with \texttt{geojour.mbs} and \texttt{photjour.mbs}.
+% Optical and geophysical journals removed; physical journals included
+% from the others. Where one journal exists with multiple shorthands,
+% all versions are kept.
+%
+% Versions 2.0a,b,c: add more journals.
+%
+% Version 2.0d: revise copyright notice to LPPL standard.
+%
+% Version 2.1: add more astronomy journals and also an option
+% \texttt{jaa} to produce the shorthands used in astronomy journals, such
+% as A\&A for Astronomy and Astrophyics.
+%
+% See the documentation for \texttt{makebst} for formatting details.
+%
+% \section{The Menu Information}
+%
+% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
+% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
+% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between |%<*!options>|
+% \dots\ |%</!options>| in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
+% extract only the menu information.
+%
+% A journal-names files should contain at most only two options, \texttt{jabr}
+% and \texttt{jaa}.
+% This is because \texttt{merlin} version~3.5 can now handle several
+% journal-name files, but does not look into them for the options, but
+% rather asks for \texttt{jabr} from the main file. For compatibility with
+% older versions, the option menu must be kept here.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+\mes{^^JPHYSICS JOURNAL NAMES:}
+\optdef{*}{}{Full physics journal names}{}
+\optdef{a}{jabr}{Abbreviate physics names}{for journals}
+\optdef{s}{jabr,jaa}{With astronomy shorthands}{like ApJ and AJ}
+\getans
+\endoptions
+%</options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
+%
+% \section{The Coding}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!options>
+%<*jabr>
+%<!jaa>MACRO {aa}{"Astron. \& Astrophys."}
+%<jaa>MACRO {aa}{"A\&A"}
+%<!jaa>MACRO {aasup}{"Astron. \& Astrophys. Suppl. Ser."}
+%<jaa>MACRO {aasup}{"A\&AS"}
+%<!jaa>MACRO {aj} {"Astron. J."}
+%<jaa>MACRO {aj} {"AJ"}
+MACRO {aph} {"Acta Phys."}
+MACRO {advp} {"Adv. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajp} {"Amer. J. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajm} {"Amer. J. Math."}
+MACRO {amsci} {"Amer. Sci."}
+MACRO {anofd} {"Ann. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {am} {"Ann. Math."}
+MACRO {ap} {"Ann. Phys. (NY)"}
+MACRO {adp} {"Ann. Phys. (Leipzig)"}
+MACRO {ao} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {apl} {"Appl. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {app} {"Astroparticle Phys."}
+%<!jaa>MACRO {apj} {"Astrophys. J."}
+%<jaa>MACRO {apj} {"ApJ"}
+%<!jaa>MACRO {apjsup} {"Astrophys. J. Suppl."}
+%<jaa>MACRO {apjsup} {"ApJS"}
+%<!jaa>MACRO {apss} {"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+%<jaa>MACRO {apss} {"Ap\&SS"}
+%<!jaa>MACRO {araa} {"Ann. Rev. Astron. Astrophys."}
+%<jaa>MACRO {araa} {"ARA\&A"}
+%<!jaa>MACRO {baas} {"Bull. Amer. Astron. Soc."}
+%<jaa>MACRO {baas} {"BAAS"}
+MACRO {baps} {"Bull. Amer. Phys. Soc."}
+MACRO {cmp} {"Comm. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {cpam} {"Commun. Pure Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {cppcf} {"Comm. Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {cpc} {"Comp. Phys. Comm."}
+MACRO {cqg} {"Class. Quant. Grav."}
+MACRO {cra} {"C. R. Acad. Sci. A"}
+MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Eng. \& Design"}
+MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Tech."}
+MACRO {grg} {"Gen. Relativ. Gravit."}
+MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Trans. Nucl. Sci."}
+MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Trans. Plasma Sci."}
+MACRO {ijimw} {"Interntl. J. Infrared \& Millimeter Waves"}
+MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {irp} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {jap} {"J. Appl. Phys."}
+MACRO {jasa} {"J. Acoust. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {jcp} {"J. Comp. Phys."}
+MACRO {jetp} {"Sov. Phys.--JETP"}
+MACRO {jfe} {"J. Fusion Energy"}
+MACRO {jfm} {"J. Fluid Mech."}
+MACRO {jmp} {"J. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {jne} {"J. Nucl. Energy"}
+MACRO {jnec} {"J. Nucl. Energy, C: Plasma Phys., Accelerators, Thermonucl. Res."}
+MACRO {jnm} {"J. Nucl. Mat."}
+MACRO {jpc} {"J. Phys. Chem."}
+MACRO {jpp} {"J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {jpsj} {"J. Phys. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jsi} {"J. Sci. Instrum."}
+MACRO {jvst} {"J. Vac. Sci. \& Tech."}
+%<!jaa>MACRO {nat} {"Nature"}
+%<!jaa>MACRO {nature} {"Nature"}
+%<jaa>MACRO {nat} {"Nat"}
+%<jaa>MACRO {nature} {"Nat"}
+MACRO {nedf} {"Nucl. Eng. \& Design/Fusion"}
+MACRO {nf} {"Nucl. Fusion"}
+MACRO {nim} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth."}
+MACRO {nimpr} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth. in Phys. Res."}
+MACRO {np} {"Nucl. Phys."}
+MACRO {npb} {"Nucl. Phys. B"}
+MACRO {nt/f} {"Nucl. Tech./Fusion"}
+MACRO {npbpc} {"Nucl. Phys. B (Proc. Suppl.)"}
+MACRO {inc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {nc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {pf} {"Phys. Fluids"}
+MACRO {pfa} {"Phys. Fluids A: Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {pfb} {"Phys. Fluids B: Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {pl} {"Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {pla} {"Phys. Lett. A"}
+MACRO {plb} {"Phys. Lett. B"}
+MACRO {prep} {"Phys. Rep."}
+MACRO {pnas} {"Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA"}
+MACRO {pp} {"Phys. Plasmas"}
+MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {phitrsl} {"Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {prl} {"Phys. Rev. Lett."}
+MACRO {pr} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {physrev} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {pra} {"Phys. Rev. A"}
+MACRO {prb} {"Phys. Rev. B"}
+MACRO {prc} {"Phys. Rev. C"}
+MACRO {prd} {"Phys. Rev. D"}
+MACRO {pre} {"Phys. Rev. E"}
+MACRO {ps} {"Phys. Scripta"}
+MACRO {procrsl} {"Proc. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {rmp} {"Rev. Mod. Phys."}
+MACRO {rsi} {"Rev. Sci. Inst."}
+%<!jaa>MACRO {science} {"Science"}
+%<jaa>MACRO {science} {"Sci"}
+MACRO {sciam} {"Sci. Am."}
+MACRO {sam} {"Stud. Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {sjpp} {"Sov. J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {spd} {"Sov. Phys.--Doklady"}
+MACRO {sptp} {"Sov. Phys.--Tech. Phys."}
+MACRO {spu} {"Sov. Phys.--Uspeki"}
+%<!jaa>MACRO {st} {"Sky and Telesc."}
+%<jaa>MACRO {st} {"S\&T"}
+%</jabr>
+%<*!jabr>
+MACRO {aa}{"Astronomy and Astrophysics"}
+MACRO {aasup}{"Astronomy and Astrophysics, Supplement Series"}
+MACRO {aj}{"Astronomical Journal"}
+MACRO {aph} {"Acta Physica"}
+MACRO {advp} {"Advances in Physics"}
+MACRO {ajp} {"American Journal of Physics"}
+MACRO {ajm} {"American Journal of Mathematics"}
+MACRO {amsci} {"American Scientist"}
+MACRO {anofd} {"Annals of Fluid Dynamics"}
+MACRO {am} {"Annals of Mathematics"}
+MACRO {ap} {"Annals of Physics"}
+MACRO {adp} {"Annalen der Physik"}
+MACRO {ao} {"Applied Optics"}
+MACRO {apl} {"Applied Physics Letters"}
+MACRO {app} {"Astroparticle Physics"}
+MACRO {apj} {"Astrophysical Journal"}
+MACRO {apjsup} {"Astrophysical Journal Supplement"}
+MACRO {apss} {"Astrophysics and Space Science"}
+MACRO {araa} {"Annual Review of Astronomy and Astrophysics"}
+MACRO {baas} {"Bulletin of the American Astronomical Society"}
+MACRO {baps} {"Bulletin of the American Physical Society"}
+MACRO {cmp} {"Communications in Mathematical Physics"}
+MACRO {cpam} {"Communications on Pure and Applied Mathematics"}
+MACRO {cppcf} {"Comments on Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {cpc} {"Computer Physics Communications"}
+MACRO {cqg} {"Classical and Quantum Gravity"}
+MACRO {cra} {"Comptes Rendus des S{\'e}ances de l'Acad{\'e}mie des Sciences A"}
+MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Engineering and Design"}
+MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Technology"}
+MACRO {grg} {"General Relativity and Gravitation"}
+MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science"}
+MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Transactions on Plasma Science"}
+MACRO {ijimw} {"International Journal of Infrared and Millimeter Waves"}
+MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Physics"}
+MACRO {irp} {"Infrared Physics"}
+MACRO {jap} {"Journal of Applied Physics"}
+MACRO {jasa} {"Journal of the Acoustical Society of America"}
+MACRO {jcp} {"Journal of Computational Physics"}
+MACRO {jetp} {"Soviet Physics--JETP"}
+MACRO {jfe} {"Journal of Fusion Energy"}
+MACRO {jfm} {"Journal of Fluid Mechanics"}
+MACRO {jmp} {"Journal of Mathematical Physics"}
+MACRO {jne} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy"}
+MACRO {jnec} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy, Part C: Plasma Physics, Accelerators, Thermonuclear Research"}
+MACRO {jnm} {"Journal of Nuclear Materials"}
+MACRO {jpc} {"Journal of Physical Chemistry"}
+MACRO {jpp} {"Journal of Plasma Physics"}
+MACRO {jpsj} {"Journal of the Physical Society of Japan"}
+MACRO {jsi} {"Journal of Scientific Instruments"}
+MACRO {jvst} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology"}
+MACRO {nat} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nature} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nedf} {"Nuclear Engineering and Design/Fusion"}
+MACRO {nf} {"Nuclear Fusion"}
+MACRO {nim} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods"}
+MACRO {nimpr} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research"}
+MACRO {np} {"Nuclear Physics"}
+MACRO {npb} {"Nuclear Physics B"}
+MACRO {nt/f} {"Nuclear Technology/Fusion"}
+MACRO {npbpc} {"Nuclear Physics B (Proceedings Supplements)"}
+MACRO {inc} {"Il Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {nc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {pf} {"Physics of Fluids"}
+MACRO {pfa} {"Physics of Fluids A: Fluid Dynamics"}
+MACRO {pfb} {"Physics of Fluids B: Plasma Physics"}
+MACRO {pl} {"Physics Letters"}
+MACRO {pla} {"Physics Letters A"}
+MACRO {plb} {"Physics Letters B"}
+MACRO {prep} {"Physics Reports"}
+MACRO {pnas} {"Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the USA"}
+MACRO {pp} {"Physics of Plasmas"}
+MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {phitrsl} {"Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London"}
+MACRO {prl} {"Physical Review Letters"}
+MACRO {pr} {"Physical Review"}
+MACRO {physrev} {"Physical Review"}
+MACRO {pra} {"Physical Review A"}
+MACRO {prb} {"Physical Review B"}
+MACRO {prc} {"Physical Review C"}
+MACRO {prd} {"Physical Review D"}
+MACRO {pre} {"Physical Review E"}
+MACRO {ps} {"Physica Scripta"}
+MACRO {procrsl} {"Proceedings of the Royal Society of London"}
+MACRO {rmp} {"Reviews of Modern Physics"}
+MACRO {rsi} {"Review of Scientific Instruments"}
+MACRO {science} {"Science"}
+MACRO {sciam} {"Scientific American"}
+MACRO {sam} {"Studies in Applied Mathematics"}
+MACRO {sjpp} {"Soviet Journal of Plasma Physics"}
+MACRO {spd} {"Soviet Physics--Doklady"}
+MACRO {sptp} {"Soviet Physics--Technical Physics"}
+MACRO {spu} {"Soviet Physics--Uspeki"}
+MACRO {st} {"Sky and Telescope"}
+%</!jabr>
+%</!options>
+ % End module: physjour.mbs
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/polski.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/polski.mbs
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9c6f40a01a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/polski.mbs
@@ -0,0 +1,348 @@
+%\iffalse         THIS IS A META COMMENT
+% File: polski.mbs
+% Copyright 1995-2000 Patrick W Daly
+% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Aeronomie
+% Max-Planck-Str. 2
+% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
+% Germany
+% E-mail: daly@linmpi.mpg.de
+%
+% Copyright (C) 2000, Andrzej M. Borzyszkowski
+% Instytut Podstaw Informatyki Polskiej Akademii Nauk
+% adres: ul. Abrahama 18, 81-825 Sopot, Poland
+% e-mail: a.borzyszkowski@ipipan.gda.pl
+%
+% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+%
+% It is part of the custom-bib collection,
+%   a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
+%====================================================================
+%       A Language Definition File:  POLSKI
+%     to be included with other master bibliography style files
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%   (See version and date in the \ProvidesFile command below)
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%    This file is self-documenting: simply LaTeX it!
+%====================================================================
+%
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+%\fi
+ % \ProvidesFile{polski.mbs}[2003/11/06 4.2 (AMB/PWD)]
+%\iffalse
+%<*a&!a>
+% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
+% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
+\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
+  \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
+%</a&!a>
+%<*driver>
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
+   \documentclass[a4paper,10pt,twoside]{article}%
+   \usepackage{doc}%
+   \raggedbottom
+   \CodelineNumbered
+   \RecordChanges
+ %  Comment out next line to print coding
+   \OnlyDescription
+   \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.5\paperwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5\textwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+   \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
+
+\begin{document}
+   \DocInput{polski.mbs}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%                   END OF META COMMENT   \fi
+% \CharacterTable
+%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm}
+%
+% \changes{4.0}{2000. February 21}{Submitted to PWD by AMB}
+% \changes{4.0a}{2002 Oct 18}{Fix bug in page number suppression}
+% \changes{4.2}{2003 Nov 6}{Fix comma separator, consistent with \texttt{makebst} 4.1}
+%
+% \pagestyle{myheadings}
+% \markboth{A.\ M.\ Borzyszkowski}{Polish Bibliographies}
+%
+% \title{{\bfseries Polish Language Definition File}\\
+%      for master bibliographic style files}
+%
+% \author{Andrzej M.\ Borzyszkowski}
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{polski.mbs}
+% \date{This paper describes file \texttt{\filename},\\
+%  version \fileversion{} from \filedate}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \parskip=1ex \parindent=0pt
+%
+% \newcommand{\btx}{{\sc Bib}\TeX}
+% \newcommand{\dtx}{\textsf{docstrip}}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+% This file is to be used as a language definition file with master
+% bibliographic files. The language it defines is
+% \begin{quote}\bfseries Polish\end{quote}
+%
+% This is not a self-sufficient \texttt{.mbs} file, but rather may
+% be used together with one that contains language support via
+% external definition files.
+%
+% See the documentation for \texttt{makebst} for formatting details.
+%
+% \section{The Menu Information}
+%
+% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
+% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
+% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between |%<*!options&!driver>|
+% \dots\ |%</!options&!driver>| in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
+% extract only the menu information or the documentation driver.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+\mes{^^JOptions for POLISH}
+\wr{\spsp\spsp polski,\pc: Polish language}
+
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `STRONY':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`Strony'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{pp}{`Strony' abbreviated}{as str.}
+\optdef{x}{ppx}{`Strony' omitted}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `REDAKTOR':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`Redaktor'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{ed}{`Redaktor' abbreviated}{as Red.}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of wydanie, rozdzia\string\l, itd.}
+\optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory}
+\optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as pierwsze, drugie, trzecie, itd.}
+\optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1. 2. 3. itd.}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{MONTHS IN ROMAN:}{}
+\optdef{*}{roman}{Months written in roman numerals}{as I, II, III, itd.}
+\optdef{x}{}{Months written in words}{as stycze\string\'n, luty, itd.}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptions
+%</options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
+%
+% \section{The Coding}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!options&!driver>
+
+ % The language selected here is POLSKI
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{ "i" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{ "et~al." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+%<!ed>{ "redaktorzy" }
+%<ed>{ "red." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+%<!ed>{ "redaktor" }
+%<ed>{ "red." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "pod redakcj{\k a}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+%<!abr>{ "wydanie" }
+%<abr>{ "wyd." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+%<!abr>{ "tom" }
+%<abr>{ "tom" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "z serii" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+%<!abr>{ "numer" }
+%<abr>{ "nr" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "nr" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "w" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "strony" }
+%<pp>{ "str." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "strona" }
+%<pp>{ "str." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+%<*revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "strony" }
+
+%</revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+%<!abr>{ "rozdzia{\l}" }
+%<abr>{ "rozdz." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+%<!abr>{ "Raport techniczny" }
+%<abr>{ "Rap. tech." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Praca magisterska" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Rozprawa doktorska" }
+
+%<*!xedn>
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+%<!ord>{ "pierwsze" }
+%<ord>{ "1." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+%<!ord>{ "drugie" }
+%<ord>{ "2." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+%<!ord>{ "trzecie" }
+%<ord>{ "3." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+%<!ord>{ "czwarte" }
+%<ord>{ "4." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+%<!ord>{ "pi{\k a}te" }
+%<ord>{ "5." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.st}
+{ "." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
+{ "." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
+{ "." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "." }
+%</!xedn>
+%<*!roman>
+%<*!abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"stycze\'n"}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"luty"}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"marzec"}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"kwiecie\'n"}
+
+MACRO {may} {"maj"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"czerwiec"}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"lipiec"}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"sierpie\'n"}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"wrzesie\'n"}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"pa\'zdziernik"}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"listopad"}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"grudzie\'n"}
+%</!abr>
+%<*abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"stycz."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"luty"}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"marz."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"kwiec."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"maj"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"czer."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"lip."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"sier."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"wrz."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"pa\'zdz."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"list."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"grudz."}
+%</abr>
+%</!roman>
+%<*roman>
+MACRO {jan} {"I"}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"II"}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"III"}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"IV"}
+
+MACRO {may} {"V"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"VI"}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"VII"}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"VIII"}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"IX"}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"X"}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"XI"}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"XII"}
+%</roman>
+%</!options&!driver>
+ % End module: polski.mbs
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/portuges.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/portuges.mbs
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..692115d1d9c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/portuges.mbs
@@ -0,0 +1,317 @@
+%\iffalse         THIS IS A META COMMENT
+% File: portuges.mbs
+% Copyright 1997-1999 Patrick W Daly
+% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Aeronomie
+% Max-Planck-Str. 2
+% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
+% Germany
+% E-mail: daly@linmpi.mpg.de
+%
+% Copyright 1997 Rui Ara\'ujo
+% Instituto de Sistemas e Rob\'otica, e
+% Departamento de Engenharia Electrot\'ecnica
+% Universidade de Coimbra
+% P\'olo II; Pinhal de Marrocos
+% P-3030 Coimbra, Portugal
+% E-mail: rui@isr.uc.pt, rui@dee.uc.pt
+%
+% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+%
+% It is part of the custom-bib collection,
+%   a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
+%====================================================================
+%       A Language Definition File:  PORTUGUESE
+%     to be included with other master bibliography style files
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%   (See version and date in the \ProvidesFile command below)
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%    This file is self-documenting: simply LaTeX it!
+%====================================================================
+%
+%\fi
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{portuges.mbs}[2003/11/06 4.2 (PWD/RA)]
+%\iffalse
+%<*a&!a>
+% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
+% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
+\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
+  \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
+%</a&!a>
+%<*driver>
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
+   \documentclass[a4paper,10pt,twoside]{article}%
+   \usepackage{doc}%
+   \raggedbottom
+   \CodelineNumbered
+   \RecordChanges
+ %  Comment out next line to print coding
+   \OnlyDescription
+   \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.5\paperwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5\textwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+   \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
+
+\begin{document}
+   \DocInput{portuges.mbs}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%                   END OF META COMMENT   \fi
+% \CharacterTable
+%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm}
+%
+% \changes{1.1}{1997 October 09}{Initial version}
+% \changes{1.2}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{bbl.etal}}
+% \changes{1.3}{1999 Feb 1}{Add option \texttt{xedn}}
+% \changes{1.3}{1999 Feb 24}{Update copyright notice}
+% \changes{4.0}{1999 Oct 11}{For merlin 4.0}
+% \changes{4.0a}{2002 Oct 18}{Fix bug in page number suppression}
+% \changes{4.2}{2003 Nov 6}{Fix comma separator, consistent with \texttt{makebst} 4.1}
+%
+% \pagestyle{myheadings}
+% \markboth{R. Ara\'ujo}{Portuguese Bibliographies}
+%
+% \title{{\bfseries Portuguese Language Definition File}\\
+%      for master bibliographic style files}
+%
+% \author{Rui Ara\'ujo}
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{portuges.mbs}
+% \date{This paper describes file \texttt{\filename},\\
+%  version \fileversion{} from \filedate}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \parskip=1ex \parindent=0pt
+%
+% \newcommand{\btx}{{\sc Bib}\TeX}
+% \newcommand{\dtx}{\textsf{docstrip}}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+% This file is to be used as a language definition file with master
+% bibliographic files. The language it defines is
+% \begin{quote}\bfseries Portuguese\end{quote}
+%
+% This is not a self-sufficient \texttt{.mbs} file, but rather may
+% be used together with one that contains language support via
+% external definition files.
+%
+% See the documentation for \texttt{makebst} for formatting details.
+%
+% \section{The Menu Information}
+%
+% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
+% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
+% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between |%<*!options&!driver>|
+% \dots\ |%</!options&!driver>| in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
+% extract only the menu information or the documentation driver.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+\mes{^^JOptions for PORTUGUESE}
+\wr{\spsp\spsp portuguese,\pc: Portuguese language}
+
+
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `P\string\'AGINAS':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`P\string\'agina(s)'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{pp}{`P\string\'agina' abbreviated}{as p\string\'ag. or p\string\'ags.}
+\optdef{x}{ppx}{`P\string\'agina' omitted}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITOR':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`Editor(es)'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{ed}{`Editor' abbreviated}{as ed. or eds.}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of Volume, Edicao, Cap\string\'itulo}
+\optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory}
+\optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as Primeira, Segunda, Terceira, etc}
+\optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1a, 2a, 3a, etc}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptions
+%</options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
+%
+% \section{The Coding}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!options&!driver>
+
+ % The language selected here is PORTUGUESE
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{ "e"}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{ "et~al." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+%<!ed>{ "editores" }
+%<ed>{ "eds." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+%<!ed>{ "editor" }
+%<ed>{ "ed." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "editado por" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+%<!abr>{ "edi\c{c}\~ao" }
+%<abr>{ "ed." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+{ "volume" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "de" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+%<!abr>{ "n\'umero" }
+%<abr>{ "n\raise1ex\hbox{\underbar{\scriptsize o}}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "n\raise1ex\hbox{\underbar{\scriptsize o}}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "in" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "p\'aginas" }
+%<pp>{ "p\'ags." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "p\'agina" }
+%<pp>{ "p\'ag." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+%<*revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "p\'aginas" }
+
+%</revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+%<!abr>{ "cap\'{\i}tulo" }
+%<abr>{ "cap." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+%<!abr>{ "Relat\'orio T\'ecnico" }
+%<abr>{ "Rel.\ T\'ec." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Tese de Mestrado" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Tese de Doutoramento" }
+
+%<*!xedn>
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+%<!ord>{ "primeira" }
+%<ord>{ "1\raise1ex\hbox{\underbar{\scriptsize a}}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+%<!ord>{ "segunda" }
+%<ord>{ "2\raise1ex\hbox{\underbar{\scriptsize a}}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+%<!ord>{ "terceira" }
+%<ord>{ "3\raise1ex\hbox{\underbar{\scriptsize a}}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+%<!ord>{ "quarta" }
+%<ord>{ "4\raise1ex\hbox{\underbar{\scriptsize a}}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+%<!ord>{ "quinta" }
+%<ord>{ "5\raise1ex\hbox{\underbar{\scriptsize a}}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "\raise1ex\hbox{\underbar{\scriptsize a}}" }
+
+%</!xedn>
+%<*!abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"janeiro"}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"fevereiro"}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"mar\c{c}o"}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"abril"}
+
+MACRO {may} {"maio"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"junho"}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"julho"}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"agosto"}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"setembro"}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"outubro"}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"novembro"}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"dezembro"}
+
+%</!abr>
+%<*abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"fev."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"abr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"maio"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"ago."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"set."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"out."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"dez."}
+
+%</abr>
+%</!options&!driver>
+ % End module: portuges.mbs
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/shorthnd.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/shorthnd.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0dbe61cdd14
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/shorthnd.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,415 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `shorthnd.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% shorthnd.ins  (with options: `head')
+%% physjour.mbs 
+%% geojour.mbs 
+%% photjour.mbs 
+%% suppjour.mbs 
+%% shorthnd.ins  (with options: `tail')
+%% ===============================================
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE
+%% See below for the copyright and distribution conditions.
+%% 
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% It may be distributed without the source files listed above.
+%% ===============================================
+%% Copyright 1998, 1999 Patrick W. Daly
+%%
+%% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+%% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+%% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+%% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{longtable}
+
+\def\ACRO{\begingroup\catcode`\M=11\relax\catcode`\"=9\relax\acro}
+\def\acro#1#2{\endgroup\ttfamily#1 & \raggedright #2 \tabularnewline}
+\def\PF#1[#2]{\\\hline\multicolumn{2}{c}{File: \texttt{#1}, version: #2
+              \rule[-.75em]{0pt}{2em}}\\\hline\\[-1ex]}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\setlength{\parskip}{1ex}
+
+\pagestyle{myheadings}
+\markright{List of Journal Shorthands}
+\begin{document}
+
+\title
+  {List of the Shorthands for Journal Names in Various \texttt{.mbs} Files}
+
+\author{Patrick W. Daly}
+
+\date{This is part of the \texttt{makebst} or \texttt{custom-bib} bundle}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\newcommand{\btx}{\textsc{Bib}\TeX}
+
+The shorthands here may be used in \btx\ database (\texttt{.bib}) files in
+place of the full journal name. For example, instead of
+\begin{verbatim}
+journal = "Phys. Rev.",
+\end{verbatim}
+it is sufficient to give
+\begin{verbatim}
+journal = pr,
+\end{verbatim}
+The advantage of this is not only the convenience of typing a shorter form,
+but also the automatic switching between the abbreviated (here ``Phys.\
+Rev.'')\ and full forms (``Physical Review'') depending on the bibliographic
+style file. Thus the one database entry is reformatted automatically.
+
+There is a set of standard shorthands for computing science included in the
+original \texttt{plain.bst}, \texttt{abbrv.bst}, \texttt{unsrt.bst}, and
+\texttt{alpha.bst} files. These are built into \texttt{merlin.mbs} and are
+always present in every \texttt{.bst} file generated from it.
+
+Whether or not the shorthand is present in your \texttt{.bst} file depends on
+the inclusion of the proper \texttt{.mbs} source file during its creation with
+the \texttt{makebst} program. Check the heading to the \texttt{.bst} file
+to find out what source files went into its generation.
+
+You may make up your own list of journal names, abbreviated and full, by using
+one of the existing \texttt{.mbs} files as a model. Include its name in
+\texttt{shorthnd.ins} to obtain a listing of its shorthands too.
+
+\newpage
+
+\begingroup
+\centering
+\def\PC#1{\ifx#1\ProvidesFile \let\next=#1\else\let\next=\skipline\fi\next}
+\def\skipline{\begingroup\catcode`\^^M=12 \SKPLNE}
+{\catcode`\^^M=12 \endlinechar=-1 \gdef\SKPLNE#1^^M{\endgroup}}
+\let\ProvidesFile=\PF
+\catcode`\%=\active
+\let%=\PC
+\catcode`\M=0
+\begin{longtable}{lp{6cm}}
+ \PF{merlin.mbs}[(all)]
+MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"}
+MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"}
+MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"}
+MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"}
+MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"}
+MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"}
+MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"}
+MACRO {ieeetcad}
+  {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"}
+MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"}
+MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"}
+MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"}
+MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"}
+MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"}
+MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"}
+MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"}
+MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"}
+MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"}
+MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"}
+MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"}
+MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"}
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{physjour.mbs}[2002/01/14 2.2 (PWD)]
+MACRO {aa}{"Astronomy and Astrophysics"}
+MACRO {aasup}{"Astronomy and Astrophysics, Supplement Series"}
+MACRO {aj}{"Astronomical Journal"}
+MACRO {aph} {"Acta Physica"}
+MACRO {advp} {"Advances in Physics"}
+MACRO {ajp} {"American Journal of Physics"}
+MACRO {ajm} {"American Journal of Mathematics"}
+MACRO {amsci} {"American Scientist"}
+MACRO {anofd} {"Annals of Fluid Dynamics"}
+MACRO {am} {"Annals of Mathematics"}
+MACRO {ap} {"Annals of Physics"}
+MACRO {adp} {"Annalen der Physik"}
+MACRO {ao} {"Applied Optics"}
+MACRO {apl} {"Applied Physics Letters"}
+MACRO {app} {"Astroparticle Physics"}
+MACRO {apj} {"Astrophysical Journal"}
+MACRO {apjsup} {"Astrophysical Journal Supplement"}
+MACRO {apss} {"Astrophysics and Space Science"}
+MACRO {araa} {"Annual Review of Astronomy and Astrophysics"}
+MACRO {baas} {"Bulletin of the American Astronomical Society"}
+MACRO {baps} {"Bulletin of the American Physical Society"}
+MACRO {cmp} {"Communications in Mathematical Physics"}
+MACRO {cpam} {"Communications on Pure and Applied Mathematics"}
+MACRO {cppcf} {"Comments on Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {cpc} {"Computer Physics Communications"}
+MACRO {cqg} {"Classical and Quantum Gravity"}
+MACRO {cra} {"Comptes Rendus des S{\'e}ances de l'Acad{\'e}mie des Sciences A"}
+MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Engineering and Design"}
+MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Technology"}
+MACRO {grg} {"General Relativity and Gravitation"}
+MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science"}
+MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Transactions on Plasma Science"}
+MACRO {ijimw} {"International Journal of Infrared and Millimeter Waves"}
+MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Physics"}
+MACRO {irp} {"Infrared Physics"}
+MACRO {jap} {"Journal of Applied Physics"}
+MACRO {jasa} {"Journal of the Acoustical Society of America"}
+MACRO {jcp} {"Journal of Computational Physics"}
+MACRO {jetp} {"Soviet Physics--JETP"}
+MACRO {jfe} {"Journal of Fusion Energy"}
+MACRO {jfm} {"Journal of Fluid Mechanics"}
+MACRO {jmp} {"Journal of Mathematical Physics"}
+MACRO {jne} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy"}
+MACRO {jnec} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy, Part C: Plasma Physics, Accelerators, Thermonuclear Research"}
+MACRO {jnm} {"Journal of Nuclear Materials"}
+MACRO {jpc} {"Journal of Physical Chemistry"}
+MACRO {jpp} {"Journal of Plasma Physics"}
+MACRO {jpsj} {"Journal of the Physical Society of Japan"}
+MACRO {jsi} {"Journal of Scientific Instruments"}
+MACRO {jvst} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology"}
+MACRO {nat} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nature} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nedf} {"Nuclear Engineering and Design/Fusion"}
+MACRO {nf} {"Nuclear Fusion"}
+MACRO {nim} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods"}
+MACRO {nimpr} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research"}
+MACRO {np} {"Nuclear Physics"}
+MACRO {npb} {"Nuclear Physics B"}
+MACRO {nt/f} {"Nuclear Technology/Fusion"}
+MACRO {npbpc} {"Nuclear Physics B (Proceedings Supplements)"}
+MACRO {inc} {"Il Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {nc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {pf} {"Physics of Fluids"}
+MACRO {pfa} {"Physics of Fluids A: Fluid Dynamics"}
+MACRO {pfb} {"Physics of Fluids B: Plasma Physics"}
+MACRO {pl} {"Physics Letters"}
+MACRO {pla} {"Physics Letters A"}
+MACRO {plb} {"Physics Letters B"}
+MACRO {prep} {"Physics Reports"}
+MACRO {pnas} {"Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the USA"}
+MACRO {pp} {"Physics of Plasmas"}
+MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {phitrsl} {"Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London"}
+MACRO {prl} {"Physical Review Letters"}
+MACRO {pr} {"Physical Review"}
+MACRO {physrev} {"Physical Review"}
+MACRO {pra} {"Physical Review A"}
+MACRO {prb} {"Physical Review B"}
+MACRO {prc} {"Physical Review C"}
+MACRO {prd} {"Physical Review D"}
+MACRO {pre} {"Physical Review E"}
+MACRO {ps} {"Physica Scripta"}
+MACRO {procrsl} {"Proceedings of the Royal Society of London"}
+MACRO {rmp} {"Reviews of Modern Physics"}
+MACRO {rsi} {"Review of Scientific Instruments"}
+MACRO {science} {"Science"}
+MACRO {sciam} {"Scientific American"}
+MACRO {sam} {"Studies in Applied Mathematics"}
+MACRO {sjpp} {"Soviet Journal of Plasma Physics"}
+MACRO {spd} {"Soviet Physics--Doklady"}
+MACRO {sptp} {"Soviet Physics--Technical Physics"}
+MACRO {spu} {"Soviet Physics--Uspeki"}
+MACRO {st} {"Sky and Telescope"}
+ % End module: physjour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{geojour.mbs}[2002/07/10 2.0h (PWD)]
+MACRO {aisr} {"Advances in Space Research"}
+MACRO {ag} {"Annales Geophysic\ae"}
+MACRO {anigeo} {"Annali di Geofisica"}
+MACRO {angl} {"Annals of Glaciology"}
+MACRO {andmet} {"Annalen der Meteorologie"}
+MACRO {andgeo} {"Annales de Geophysique"}
+MACRO {andphy} {"Annales de Physique"}
+MACRO {afmgb} {"Archiv f\^^b{u}r Meteorologie, Geophysik und Bioklimatologie"}
+MACRO {ass}{"Astrophysics and Space Science"}
+MACRO {atph} {"Atm\'osphera"}
+MACRO {aao} {"Atmosphere-Ocean"}
+MACRO {atenv} {"Atmospheric Environment"}
+MACRO {aujag} {"Australian Journal of Agricultural Research"}
+MACRO {aumet} {"Australian Meteorological Magazine"}
+MACRO {blmet} {"Boundary-Layer Meteorology"}
+MACRO {bams} {"Bulletin of the American Meteorological Society"}
+MACRO {cch} {"Climatic Change"}
+MACRO {cdyn} {"Climate Dynamics"}
+MACRO {cbul} {"Climatological Bulletin"}
+MACRO {cap} {"Contributions to Atmospheric Physics"}
+MACRO {dsr} {"Deep-Sea Research"}
+MACRO {dhz} {"Deutsche Hydrographische Zeitschrift"}
+MACRO {dao} {"Dynamics of Atmospheres and Oceans"}
+MACRO {eco} {"Ecology"}
+MACRO {empl}{"Earth, Moon and Planets"}
+MACRO {envres} {"Environmental Research"}
+MACRO {envst} {"Environmental Science and Technology"}
+MACRO {ecms} {"Estuarine and Coastal Marine Science"}
+MACRO {expa}{"Experimental Astronomy"}
+MACRO {geoint} {"Geofisica Internationale"}
+MACRO {geopub} {"Geofysiske Publikasjoner"}
+MACRO {geogeo} {"Geologiya i Geofizika"}
+MACRO {gafd} {"Geophysical and Astrophysical Fluid Dynamics"}
+MACRO {gfd} {"Geophysical Fluid Dynamics"}
+MACRO {geomag} {"Geophysical Magazine"}
+MACRO {georl} {"Geophysical Research Letters"}
+MACRO {grl} {"Geophysical Research Letters"}
+MACRO {ga} {"Geophysica"}
+MACRO {gs} {"Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ieeetap} {"IEEE Transactions on Antennas and Propagation"}
+MACRO {ijawp} {"International Journal of Air and Water Pollution"}
+MACRO {ijc} {"International Journal of Climatology"}
+MACRO {ijrs} {"International Journal of Remote Sensing"}
+MACRO {jam} {"Journal of Applied Meteorology"}
+MACRO {jaot} {"Journal of Atmospheric and Oceanic Technology"}
+MACRO {jatp} {"Journal of Atmospheric and Terrestrial Physics"}
+MACRO {jastp} {"Journal of Atmospheric and Solar-Terrestrial Physics"}
+MACRO {jce} {"Journal of Climate"}
+MACRO {jcam} {"Journal of Climate and Applied Meteorology"}
+MACRO {jcm} {"Journal of Climate Meteorology"}
+MACRO {jcy} {"journal of Climatology"}
+MACRO {jgr} {"Journal of Geophysical Research"}
+MACRO {jga} {"Journal of Glaciology"}
+MACRO {jh} {"Journal of Hydrology"}
+MACRO {jmr} {"Journal of Marine Research"}
+MACRO {jmrj} {"Journal of Meteorological Research, Japan"}
+MACRO {jm} {"Journal of Meteorology"}
+MACRO {jpo} {"Journal of Physical Oceanography"}
+MACRO {jra} {"Journal de Recherches Atmospheriques"}
+MACRO {jaes} {"Journal of the Aeronautical Sciences"}
+MACRO {japca} {"Journal of the Air Pollution Control Association"}
+MACRO {jas} {"Journal of the Atmospheric Sciences"}
+MACRO {jmts} {"Journal of the Marine Technology Society"}
+MACRO {jmsj} {"Journal of Meteorological Society of Japan"}
+MACRO {josj} {"Journal of the Oceanographical Society of Japan"}
+MACRO {jwm} {"Journal of Weather Modification"}
+MACRO {lao} {"Limnology and Oceanography"}
+MACRO {mwl} {"Mariners Weather Log"}
+MACRO {mau} {"Mausam"}
+MACRO {meteor} {"``Meteor'' Forschungsergebnisse"}
+MACRO {map} {"Meteorology and Atmospheric Physics"}
+MACRO {metmag} {"Meteorological Magazine"}
+MACRO {metmon} {"Meteorological Monographs"}
+MACRO {metrun} {"Meteorologische Rundschau"}
+MACRO {metzeit} {"Meteorologische Zeitschrift"}
+MACRO {metgid} {"Meteorologiya i Gidrologiya"}
+MACRO {mwr} {"Monthly Weather Review"}
+MACRO {nwd} {"National Weather Digest"}
+MACRO {nzjmfr} {"New Zealand Journal of Marine and Freshwater Research"}
+MACRO {npg} {"Nonlinear Processes in Geophysics"}
+MACRO {om} {"Oceanography and Meteorology"}
+MACRO {ocac} {"Oceanologica Acta"}
+MACRO {oceanus} {"Oceanus"}
+MACRO {paleoc} {"Paleoceanography"}
+MACRO {pce} {"Physics and Chemistry of the Earth"}
+MACRO {pmg} {"Papers in Meteorology and Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ppom} {"Papers in Physical Oceanography and Meteorology"}
+MACRO {physzeit} {"Physikalische Zeitschrift"}
+MACRO {pps} {"Planetary and Space Science"}
+MACRO {pss} {"Planetary and Space Science"}
+MACRO {pag} {"Pure and Applied Geophysics"}
+MACRO {qjrms} {"Quarterly Journal of the Royal Meteorological Society"}
+MACRO {quatres} {"Quaternary Research"}
+MACRO {rsci} {"Radio Science"}
+MACRO {rse} {"Remote Sensing of the Environment"}
+MACRO {rgeo} {"Reviews of Geophysics"}
+MACRO {rgsp} {"Reviews of Geophysics and Space Physics"}
+MACRO {rdgeo} {"Revista de Geofisica"}
+MACRO {revmeta} {"Revista Meteorologica"}
+MACRO {sgp}{"Surveys in Geophysics"}
+MACRO {sp} {"Solar Phys."}
+MACRO {ssr} {"Space Science Review"}
+MACRO {tellus} {"Tellus"}
+MACRO {tac} {"Theoretical and Applied Climatology"}
+MACRO {tagu} {"Transactions, American Geophysical Union (EOS)"}
+MACRO {wrr} {"Water Resources Research"}
+MACRO {weather} {"Weather"}
+MACRO {wafc} {"Weather and Forecasting"}
+MACRO {ww} {"Weatherwise"}
+MACRO {wmob} {"World Meteorological Organization Bulletin"}
+MACRO {zeitmet} {"Zeitschrift f\^^b{u}r Meteorologie"}
+ % End module: geojour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{photjour.mbs}[1999/02/24 2.0b (PWD)]
+
+MACRO {appopt} {"Applied Optics"}
+MACRO {bell} {"Bell Systems Technical Journal"}
+MACRO {ell} {"Electronics Letters"}
+MACRO {jasp} {"Journal of Applied Spectroscopy"}
+MACRO {jqe} {"IEEE Journal of Quantum Electronics"}
+MACRO {jlwt} {"Journal of Lightwave Technology"}
+MACRO {jmo} {"Journal of Modern Optics"}
+MACRO {josa} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America"}
+MACRO {josaa} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America~A"}
+MACRO {josab} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America~B"}
+MACRO {jdp} {"Journal de Physique"}
+MACRO {oc} {"Optics Communications"}
+MACRO {ol} {"Optics Letters"}
+MACRO {phtl} {"IEEE Photonics Technology Letters"}
+MACRO {pspie} {"Proceedings of the Society for Photo-Optical Instruments Engineers"}
+MACRO {sse} {"Solid-State Electronics"}
+MACRO {sjot} {"Soviet Journal of Optical Technology"}
+MACRO {sjqe} {"Soviet Journal of Quantum Electronics"}
+MACRO {sleb} {"Soviet Physics--Lebedev Institute Reports"}
+MACRO {stph} {"Soviet Physics--Technical Physics"}
+MACRO {stphl} {"Soviet Technical Physics Letters"}
+MACRO {vr} {"Vision Research"}
+MACRO {zph} {"Zeitschrift f\^^b{u}r Physik"}
+MACRO {zphb} {"Zeitschrift f\^^b{u}r Physik~B"}
+MACRO {zphd} {"Zeitschrift f\^^b{u}r Physik~D"}
+
+MACRO {CLEO} {"Conf. on Lasers and Electro-Optics"}
+MACRO {ASSL} {"Advanced Solid State Lasers"}
+MACRO {OSA}  {"Optical Society of America"}
+ % End module: photjour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{suppjour.mbs}[1999/02/24 1.1]
+MACRO {cjp} {"Czechoslovak Journal of Physics"}
+MACRO {el} {"Europhysics Letters"}
+MACRO {en} {"Europhysics News"}
+MACRO {fujitsustj} {"FUJITSU Scientific {\&} Technical Journal"}
+MACRO {ieeeed} {"IEEE Transactions on Electron Devices"}
+MACRO {ieeeim} {"IEEE Transactions on Instrumentation and Measurement"}
+MACRO {ieeejqe} {"IEEE Journal of Quantum Electronics"}
+MACRO {ieeem} {"IEEE Transactions on Magnetics"}
+MACRO {ieeeptl} {"IEEE Photonics Technology Letters"}
+MACRO {ieeeuffc} {"IEEE Transactions on Ultrasonics, Ferroelectrics and Frequency Control"}
+MACRO {jem} {"Journal of Electronic Materials"}
+MACRO {jes} {"Journal of the Electrochemical Society"}
+MACRO {jetplett} {"JETP Letters"}
+MACRO {jjap} {"Japanese Journal of Applied Physics"}
+MACRO {jpha} {"Journal of Physics A: Mathematical and General"}
+MACRO {jphb} {"Journal of Physics B: Atomic, Molecular and Optical Physics"}
+MACRO {jphbold} {"Journal of Physics B: Atomic and Molecular Physics"}
+MACRO {jphc} {"Journal of Physics: Condensed Matter"}
+MACRO {jphcold} {"Journal of Physics C: Solid State Physics"}
+MACRO {jphd} {"Journal of Physics D: Applied Physics"}
+MACRO {jvsta} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology A"}
+MACRO {jvstb} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology B"}
+MACRO {me} {"Microelectronic Engineering"}
+MACRO {necrd} {"NEC Research {\&} Development"}
+MACRO {pa} {"Physica A"}
+MACRO {pb} {"Physica B"}
+MACRO {pc} {"Physica C"}
+MACRO {pd} {"Physica D"}
+MACRO {procieee} {"Proceedings of the IEEE"}
+MACRO {procspie} {"Proceedings of the SPIE"}
+MACRO {pssa} {"Physica Status Solidi A"}
+MACRO {pssb} {"Physica Status Solidi B"}
+MACRO {rpp} {"Reports on Progress in Physics"}
+MACRO {sm} {"Synthetic Metals"}
+MACRO {sost} {"Solid State Technology"}
+MACRO {ss} {"Surface Science"}
+MACRO {ssc} {"Solid State Communications"}
+MACRO {sst} {"Semiconductor Science and Technology"}
+MACRO {suplatt} {"Superlattices and Microstructures"}
+MACRO {sust} {"Superconductor Science and Technology"}
+MACRO {znat} {"Zeitschrift f\^^b{u}r Naturforschung"}
+ % End module: suppjour.mbs
+%% Copyright 1998, 1999 Patrick W. Daly
+%%
+%% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+%% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+%% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+%% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+\end{longtable}
+\endgroup
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `shorthnd.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/slovene.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/slovene.mbs
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7eb459620b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/slovene.mbs
@@ -0,0 +1,304 @@
+%\iffalse         THIS IS A META COMMENT
+% File: slovene.mbs
+% Copyright 2002 Primo\v z Peterlin
+% Univerza v Ljubljani
+% Medicinska fakulteta
+% In\v stitut za biofiziko
+% Lipi\v ceva 2
+% SI-1000 Ljubljana
+% Slovenia
+% E-mail: primoz.peterlin@biofiz.mf.uni-lj.si
+% 
+% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+%
+% It is part of the custom-bib collection, 
+%   a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
+%==================================================================== 
+%       A Language Definition File:  SLOVENE
+%     to be included with other master bibliography style files
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%   (See version and date in the \ProvidesFile command below)
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%    This file is self-documenting: simply LaTeX it!
+%==================================================================== 
+%
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+%\fi
+ % \ProvidesFile{slovene.mbs}[2003/11/06 4.2 (PP/PWD)]
+%\iffalse
+%<*a&!a>
+% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
+% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
+\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
+  \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
+%</a&!a>
+%<*driver>
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
+   \documentclass[a4paper,10pt,twoside]{article}%
+   \usepackage{doc}%
+   \raggedbottom
+   \CodelineNumbered
+   \RecordChanges
+ %  Comment out next line to print coding
+   \OnlyDescription
+   \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.5\paperwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5\textwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+   \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
+
+\begin{document}
+   \DocInput{slovene.mbs}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%                   END OF META COMMENT   \fi
+% \CharacterTable
+%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm}
+%
+% \changes{1.0}{2002 Aug 29}{Initial version}
+% \changes{4.0a}{2002 Oct 18}{Add number suppression}
+% \changes{4.2}{2003 Nov 6}{Fix comma separator, consistent with \texttt{makebst} 4.1}
+%
+% \pagestyle{myheadings}
+% \markboth{P. Peterlin}{Slovenian Bibliographies}
+%
+% \title{{\bfseries Slovene Language Definition File}\\
+%      for master bibliographic style files}
+%    
+% \author{Primo\v z Peterlin}
+%         
+% \GetFileInfo{slovene.mbs}
+% \date{This paper describes file \texttt{\filename},\\
+%  version \fileversion{} from \filedate}
+% 
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+% 
+% \parskip=1ex \parindent=0pt
+%
+% \newcommand{\btx}{{\sc Bib}\TeX}
+% \newcommand{\dtx}{\textsf{docstrip}}
+% 
+% \section{Introduction}
+% This file is to be used as a language definition file with master
+% bibliographic files. The language it defines is
+% \begin{quote}\bfseries Slovene\end{quote}
+% 
+% This is not a self-sufficient \texttt{.mbs} file, but rather may
+% be used together with one that contains language support via
+% external definition files.
+% 
+% See the documentation for \texttt{makebst} for formatting details.
+%
+% \section{The Menu Information}
+% 
+% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
+% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
+% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between |%<*!options&!driver>|
+% \dots\ |%</!options&!driver>| in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
+% extract only the menu information or the documentation driver.
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+\mes{^^JOptions for SLOVENE}
+\wr{\spsp\spsp slovene,\pc: Slovene language}
+
+
+\mes{^^JABBREVIATE WORD `STRANI':}
+\optdef{*}{}{`Stran(i)'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{pp}{`Strani abbreviated}{as str.}
+\optdef{x}{ppx}{`Strani omitted}{}
+\getans
+
+\mes{^^JOTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}
+\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of zvezek, izdaja, poglavje}
+\optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words}
+\getans
+
+\mes{^^JEDITION NUMBERS:}
+\optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory}
+\optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as prva, druga, tretja, etc}
+\optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1., 2., 3., etc}
+\getans
+
+\mes{^^JALTERNATIVE FOR PHD THESIS:}
+\optdef{*}{sl-phd}{PhD as `Doktorsko delo'}{}
+\optdef{d}{}{PhD as `Disertacija'}{}
+\getans
+
+\endoptions
+%</options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
+%
+% \section{The Coding}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!options&!driver>
+
+ % The language selected here is SLOVENE
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{ "in"}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{ "in~sod." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+%<!ed>{ "Uredniki" }
+%<ed>{ "ur." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+%<!ed>{ "Urednik" }
+%<ed>{ "ur." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "uredil" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+%<!abr>{ "izdaja" }
+%<abr>{ "izd." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+%<!abr>{ "zvezek" }
+%<abr>{ "zv." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "od" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+%<!abr>{ "\v{s}tevilka" }
+%<abr>{ "\v{s}t." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "\v{s}t." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "v" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "strani" }
+%<pp>{ "str." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "stran" }
+%<pp>{ "str." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+%<!abr>{ "poglavje" }
+%<abr>{ "pogl." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+%<!abr>{ "{Tehni\v cno poro\v cilo}" }
+%<abr>{ "{Tehn.\ por.}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "{Magistrsko delo}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+%<sl-phd>{ "{Doktorsko delo}" }
+%<!sl-phd>{ "Disertacija" }
+
+%<*!xedn>
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+%<!ord>{ "prva" }
+%<ord>{ "1." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+%<!ord>{ "druga" }
+%<ord>{ "2." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+%<!ord>{ "tretja" }
+%<ord>{ "3." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+%<!ord>{ "\v{c}etrta" }
+%<ord>{ "4." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+%<!ord>{ "peta" }
+%<ord>{ "5." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "." }
+
+%</!xedn>
+%<*!abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"januar"}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"februar"}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"marec"}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"april"}
+
+MACRO {may} {"maj"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"junij"}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"julij"}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"avgust"}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"september"}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"oktober"}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"november"}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"december"}
+
+%</!abr>
+%<*abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"maj"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"avg."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"okt."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"dec."}
+
+%</abr>
+%</!options&!driver>
+ % End module: slovene.mbs 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/spanish.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/spanish.mbs
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2e9b7c8dfc1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/spanish.mbs
@@ -0,0 +1,317 @@
+%\iffalse         THIS IS A META COMMENT
+% File: spanish.mbs
+% Copyright 1995-1999 Patrick W Daly
+% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Aeronomie
+% Max-Planck-Str. 2
+% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
+% Germany
+% E-mail: daly@linmpi.mpg.de
+%
+% Copyright 1995 Tom\'as Bautista
+% Divisi\'on de CAD del Centro de Microelectr\'onica Aplicada
+% Campus Universitario de Tafira, pab.\ A
+% E-35017 Las Palmas de Gran Canaria
+% Canary Islands
+% E-mail: bautista@cma.ulpgc.es
+%
+% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+%
+% It is part of the custom-bib collection,
+%   a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
+%====================================================================
+%       A Language Definition File:  SPANISH
+%     to be included with other master bibliography style files
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%   (See version and date in the \ProvidesFile command below)
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%    This file is self-documenting: simply LaTeX it!
+%====================================================================
+%
+%\fi
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{spanish.mbs}[2003/11/06 4.2 (PWD/TB)]
+%\iffalse
+%<*a&!a>
+% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
+% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
+\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
+  \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
+%</a&!a>
+%<*driver>
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
+   \documentclass[a4paper,10pt,twoside]{article}%
+   \usepackage{doc}%
+   \raggedbottom
+   \CodelineNumbered
+   \RecordChanges
+ %  Comment out next line to print coding
+   \OnlyDescription
+   \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.5\paperwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5\textwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+   \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
+
+\begin{document}
+   \DocInput{spanish.mbs}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%                   END OF META COMMENT   \fi
+% \CharacterTable
+%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm}
+%
+% \changes{1.0}{1995 June 01}{Initial version}
+% \changes{1.1}{1998 Aug 17}{Add \texttt{bbl.etal}}
+% \changes{1.2}{1999 Feb 1}{Add option \texttt{xedn}}
+% \changes{1.2}{1999 Feb 24}{Update copyright notice}
+% \changes{1.2a}{1999 May 20}{Fix menu text slightly}
+% \changes{4.0}{1999 Oct 11}{For merlin 4.0}
+% \changes{4.0a}{2002 Oct 18}{Fix bug in page number suppression}
+% \changes{4.2}{2003 Nov 6}{Fix comma separator, consistent with \texttt{makebst} 4.1}
+%
+% \pagestyle{myheadings}
+% \markboth{T. Bautista}{Spanish Bibliographies}
+%
+% \title{{\bfseries Spanish Language Definition File}\\
+%      for master bibliographic style files}
+%
+% \author{Patrick W. Daly and Tom\'as Bautista}
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{spanish.mbs}
+% \date{This paper describes file \texttt{\filename},\\
+%  version \fileversion{} from \filedate}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \parskip=1ex \parindent=0pt
+%
+% \newcommand{\btx}{{\sc Bib}\TeX}
+% \newcommand{\dtx}{\textsf{docstrip}}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+% This file is to be used as a language definition file with master
+% bibliographic files. The language it defines is
+% \begin{quote}\bfseries Spanish\end{quote}
+%
+% This is not a self-sufficient \texttt{.mbs} file, but rather may
+% be used together with one that contains language support via
+% external definition files.
+%
+% See the documentation for \texttt{makebst} for formatting details.
+%
+% \section{The Menu Information}
+%
+% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
+% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
+% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between |%<*!options&!driver>|
+% \dots\ |%</!options&!driver>| in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
+% extract only the menu information or the documentation driver.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+\mes{^^JOptions for SPANISH}
+\wr{\spsp\spsp spanish,\pc: Spanish language}
+
+
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGINAS':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`P\string\'agina(s)'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{pp}{`P\string\'agina' abbreviated}{as p\string\'ag.}
+\optdef{x}{ppx}{`P\string\'agina' omitted}{}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITOR':}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{`Editor(es)'}{(no abbreviation)}
+\optdef{a}{ed}{`Editor' abbreviated}{as Ed.}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of Tomo, \string Edici\string\'on, Cap\string\'{\string\i}tulo}
+\optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{}
+\optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory}
+\optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as primera, segunda, tercera, etc}
+\optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1a, 2a, 3a, etc}
+\getans
+\endoptiongroup
+\endoptions
+%</options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
+%
+% \section{The Coding}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!options&!driver>
+
+ % The language selected here is SPANISH
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{ "y"}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{ "et~al." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+%<!ed>{ "editores" }
+%<ed>{ "eds." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+%<!ed>{ "editor" }
+%<ed>{ "ed." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "editado por" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+%<!abr>{ "edici\'on" }
+%<abr>{ "ed\raise1ex\hbox{\underbar{\scriptsize \'on}}." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+{ "tomo" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "de" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+%<!abr>{ "n\'umero" }
+%<abr>{ "n\raise1ex\hbox{\underbar{\scriptsize o}}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "n\raise1ex\hbox{\underbar{\scriptsize o}}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "en" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "p\'aginas" }
+%<pp>{ "p\'ags." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+%<!pp&!ppx>{ "p\'agina" }
+%<pp>{ "p\'ag." }
+%<!pp&ppx>{ "" }
+
+%<*revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "p\'aginas" }
+
+%</revdata>
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+%<!abr>{ "cap\'{\i}tulo" }
+%<abr>{ "cap." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+%<!abr>{ "Informe T\'ecnico" }
+%<abr>{ "Inf.\ T\'ec." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Proyecto Fin de Carrera" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Tesis Doctoral" }
+
+%<*!xedn>
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+%<!ord>{ "primera" }
+%<ord>{ "1\raise1ex\hbox{\underbar{\scriptsize a}}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+%<!ord>{ "segunda" }
+%<ord>{ "2\raise1ex\hbox{\underbar{\scriptsize a}}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+%<!ord>{ "tercera" }
+%<ord>{ "3\raise1ex\hbox{\underbar{\scriptsize a}}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+%<!ord>{ "cuarta" }
+%<ord>{ "4\raise1ex\hbox{\underbar{\scriptsize a}}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+%<!ord>{ "quinta" }
+%<ord>{ "5\raise1ex\hbox{\underbar{\scriptsize a}}" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "\raise1ex\hbox{\underbar{\scriptsize a}}" }
+
+%</!xedn>
+%<*!abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"enero"}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"febrero"}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"marzo"}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"abril"}
+
+MACRO {may} {"mayo"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"junio"}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"julio"}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"agosto"}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"septiembre"}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"octubre"}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"noviembre"}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"diciembre"}
+
+%</!abr>
+%<*abr>
+MACRO {jan} {"ene."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"abr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"mayo"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"ago."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"oct."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"dic."}
+
+%</abr>
+%</!options&!driver>
+ % End module: spanish.mbs
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/suppjour.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/suppjour.mbs
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..69f2ca69c66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/custom-bib/suppjour.mbs
@@ -0,0 +1,231 @@
+%\iffalse         THIS IS A META COMMENT
+% File: suppjour.mbs
+% Copyright 1998, 1999 Patrick W Daly
+% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Aeronomie
+% Max-Planck-Str. 2
+% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau
+% Germany
+% E-mail: daly@linmpi.mpg.de
+% 
+% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+%
+% It is part of the custom-bib collection, 
+%   a contribution to the LaTeX2e system.
+%==================================================================== 
+%       A Journal Definition File for supplementary journals
+%     to be included with other master bibliography style files
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%   (See version and date in the \ProvidesFile command below)
+%--------------------------------------------------------------------
+%    This file is self-documenting: simply LaTeX it!
+%==================================================================== 
+%
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+%\fi
+ % \ProvidesFile{suppjour.mbs}[1999/02/24 1.1]
+%\iffalse
+%<*a&!a>
+% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst
+% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} !
+\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else
+  \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx
+%</a&!a>
+%<*driver>
+   \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
+   \documentclass[a4paper,10pt,twoside]{article}%
+   \usepackage{doc}%
+   \raggedbottom
+   \CodelineNumbered
+   \RecordChanges
+ %  Comment out next line to print coding
+   \OnlyDescription
+   \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0.5\paperwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5\textwidth}
+   \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+   \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
+
+\begin{document}
+   \DocInput{suppjour.mbs}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%                   END OF META COMMENT   \fi
+% \CharacterTable
+%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+% \setlength{\IndexMin}{10cm}
+%
+% \changes{1.0}{1998 Mar 12}{Initial contributed version}
+% \changes{1.1}{1999 Feb 24}{Update copyright notice}
+%
+% \pagestyle{myheadings}
+% \markboth{M. Bl\"ocker}{Supplementary Journal Names}
+%
+% \title{{\bfseries Supplementary Journal Definition File}\\
+%      for master bibliographic style files}
+%    
+% \author{Martin Bl\"ocker}
+%         
+% \GetFileInfo{suppjour.mbs}
+% \date{This paper describes file \texttt{\filename},\\
+%  version \fileversion{} from \filedate}
+% 
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+% 
+% \parskip=1ex \parindent=0pt
+%
+% \newcommand{\btx}{{\sc Bib}\TeX}
+% \newcommand{\dtx}{\textsf{docstrip}}
+% 
+% \section{Introduction}
+% 
+% This file adds a list of preprogrammed supplementary journal names to
+% bibliographic style files, in both full and abbreviated versions.
+% These defined journal names will be added to those in the main master
+% bibliography style file.
+% 
+% This is not a self-sufficient \texttt{.mbs} file, but rather may
+% be used together with one that contains support for
+% external definition files.
+% %
+% See the documentation for \texttt{makebst} for formatting details.
+% 
+% \section{The Menu Information}
+% 
+% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options
+% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is
+% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between |%<*!options>|
+% \dots\ |%</!options>| in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to
+% extract only the menu information.
+% 
+% A journal-names files should contain at most only one option, \texttt{jabr}.
+% This is because \texttt{merlin} version~3.5 can now handle several
+% journal-name files, but does not look into them for the options, but
+% rather asks for \texttt{jabr} from the main file. For compatibility with
+% older versions, the option menu must be kept here.
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+\mes{^^JSUPPLEMENTARY JOURNAL NAMES:}
+\optdef{*}{}{Full supplementary journal names}{}
+\optdef{a}{jabr}{Abbreviate supplementary names}{for journals}
+\getans
+\endoptions
+%</options>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges}
+%
+% \section{The Coding}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!options>
+%<*jabr>
+MACRO {cjp} {"Czech. J. Phys."}
+MACRO {el} {"Europhys. Lett."}
+MACRO {en} {"Europhys. News"}
+MACRO {fujitsustj} {"FUJITSU Sci. Tech. J."}
+MACRO {ieeeed} {"IEEE Trans. Electron Devices"}
+MACRO {ieeeim} {"IEEE Trans. Instrum. Meas."}
+MACRO {ieeejqe} {"IEEE J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {ieeem} {"IEEE Trans. Magn."}
+MACRO {ieeeptl} {"IEEE Photonic Technol. Lett."}
+MACRO {ieeeuffc} {"IEEE Trans. Ultrason., Ferroelect., Freq. Cont."}
+MACRO {jem} {"J. Electron. Mater."}
+MACRO {jes} {"J. Electrochem. Soc."}
+MACRO {jetplett} {"JETP Lett."}
+MACRO {jjap} {"Japan. J. Appl. Phys."}
+MACRO {jpha} {"J. Phys. A: Math. Gen."}
+MACRO {jphb} {"J. Phys. B: At. Mol. Opt. Phys."}
+MACRO {jphbold} {"J. Phys. B: At. Mol. Phys."}
+MACRO {jphc} {"J. Phys.: Condens. Matter"}
+MACRO {jphcold} {"J. Phys. C: Solid State Phys."}
+MACRO {jphd} {"J. Phys. D: Appl. Phys."}
+MACRO {jvsta} {"J. Vac. Sci. Technol. A"}
+MACRO {jvstb} {"J. Vac. Sci. Technol. B"}
+MACRO {me} {"Microelectron. Eng."}
+MACRO {necrd} {"NEC Res.{\&} Develop."}
+MACRO {pa} {"Physica A"}
+MACRO {pb} {"Physica B"}
+MACRO {pc} {"Physica C"}
+MACRO {pd} {"Physica D"}
+MACRO {procieee} {"Proc. IEEE"}
+MACRO {procspie} {"Proc. SPIE"}
+MACRO {pssa} {"Phys. Stat. Sol. A"}
+MACRO {pssb} {"Phys. Stat. Sol. B"}
+MACRO {rpp} {"Rep. Progr. Phys."}
+MACRO {sm} {"Synthet. Metal"}
+MACRO {sost} {"Solid State Technol."}
+MACRO {ss} {"Surf. Sci."}
+MACRO {ssc} {"Solid State Commun."}
+MACRO {sst} {"Semicond. Sci. Technol."}
+MACRO {suplatt} {"Superlatt. Microstr."}
+MACRO {sust} {"Supercond. Sci. Technol."}
+MACRO {znat} {"Z. Naturforsch."}
+%</jabr>
+%<*!jabr>
+MACRO {cjp} {"Czechoslovak Journal of Physics"}
+MACRO {el} {"Europhysics Letters"}
+MACRO {en} {"Europhysics News"}
+MACRO {fujitsustj} {"FUJITSU Scientific {\&} Technical Journal"}
+MACRO {ieeeed} {"IEEE Transactions on Electron Devices"}
+MACRO {ieeeim} {"IEEE Transactions on Instrumentation and Measurement"}
+MACRO {ieeejqe} {"IEEE Journal of Quantum Electronics"}
+MACRO {ieeem} {"IEEE Transactions on Magnetics"}
+MACRO {ieeeptl} {"IEEE Photonics Technology Letters"}
+MACRO {ieeeuffc} {"IEEE Transactions on Ultrasonics, Ferroelectrics and Frequency Control"}
+MACRO {jem} {"Journal of Electronic Materials"}
+MACRO {jes} {"Journal of the Electrochemical Society"}
+MACRO {jetplett} {"JETP Letters"}
+MACRO {jjap} {"Japanese Journal of Applied Physics"}
+MACRO {jpha} {"Journal of Physics A: Mathematical and General"}
+MACRO {jphb} {"Journal of Physics B: Atomic, Molecular and Optical Physics"}
+MACRO {jphbold} {"Journal of Physics B: Atomic and Molecular Physics"}
+MACRO {jphc} {"Journal of Physics: Condensed Matter"}
+MACRO {jphcold} {"Journal of Physics C: Solid State Physics"}
+MACRO {jphd} {"Journal of Physics D: Applied Physics"}
+MACRO {jvsta} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology A"}
+MACRO {jvstb} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology B"}
+MACRO {me} {"Microelectronic Engineering"}
+MACRO {necrd} {"NEC Research {\&} Development"}
+MACRO {pa} {"Physica A"}
+MACRO {pb} {"Physica B"}
+MACRO {pc} {"Physica C"}
+MACRO {pd} {"Physica D"}
+MACRO {procieee} {"Proceedings of the IEEE"}
+MACRO {procspie} {"Proceedings of the SPIE"}
+MACRO {pssa} {"Physica Status Solidi A"}
+MACRO {pssb} {"Physica Status Solidi B"}
+MACRO {rpp} {"Reports on Progress in Physics"}
+MACRO {sm} {"Synthetic Metals"}
+MACRO {sost} {"Solid State Technology"}
+MACRO {ss} {"Surface Science"}
+MACRO {ssc} {"Solid State Communications"}
+MACRO {sst} {"Semiconductor Science and Technology"}
+MACRO {suplatt} {"Superlattices and Microstructures"}
+MACRO {sust} {"Superconductor Science and Technology"}
+MACRO {znat} {"Zeitschrift f\^^b{u}r Naturforschung"}
+%</!jabr>
+%</!options>
+ % End module: suppjour.mbs 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \Finale